SPRUI30H November   2015  – May 2024 DRA744 , DRA745 , DRA746 , DRA750 , DRA756

 

  1.   1
  2.   Read This First
    1.     Support Resources
    2.     Glossary
    3.     About This Manual
    4.     Information About Cautions and Warnings
    5.     Register, Field, and Bit Calls
    6.     Coding Rules
    7.     Flow Chart Rules
    8.     Export Control Notice
    9.     DRA75x, DRA74x MIPI® Disclaimer
    10.     Trademarks
  3. 1 Introduction
    1. 1.1 DRA75x, DRA74x Overview
    2. 1.2 DRA75x, DRA74x Environment
    3. 1.3 DRA75x, DRA74x Description
      1. 1.3.1  MPU Subsystem
      2. 1.3.2  DSP Subsystems
      3. 1.3.3  EVE Subsystems
      4. 1.3.4  IPU Subsystems
      5. 1.3.5  IVA-HD Subsystem
      6. 1.3.6  Display Subsystem
      7. 1.3.7  Video Processing Subsystem
      8. 1.3.8  Video Capture
      9. 1.3.9  3D GPU Subsystem
      10. 1.3.10 BB2D Subsystem
      11. 1.3.11 On-Chip Debug Support
      12. 1.3.12 Power, Reset, and Clock Management
      13. 1.3.13 On-Chip Memory
      14. 1.3.14 Memory Management
      15. 1.3.15 External Memory Interfaces
      16. 1.3.16 System and Connectivity Peripherals
        1. 1.3.16.1 System Peripherals
        2. 1.3.16.2 Media Connectivity Peripherals
        3. 1.3.16.3 Car Connectivity Peripherals
        4. 1.3.16.4 Audio Connectivity Peripherals
        5. 1.3.16.5 Serial Control Peripherals
        6. 1.3.16.6 Radio Accelerators
    4. 1.4 DRA75x, DRA74x Family
    5. 1.5 DRA75x, DRA74x Device Identification
    6. 1.6 DRA75x, DRA74x Package Characteristics Overview
  4. 2 Memory Mapping
    1. 2.1 Introduction
    2. 2.2 L3_MAIN Memory Map
      1. 2.2.1 L3_INSTR Memory Map
    3. 2.3 L4 Memory Map
      1. 2.3.1 L4_CFG Memory Map
      2. 2.3.2 L4_WKUP Memory Map
    4. 2.4 L4_PER Memory Map
      1. 2.4.1 L4_PER1 Memory Space Mapping
      2. 2.4.2 L4_PER2 Memory Map
      3. 2.4.3 L4_PER3 Memory Map
    5. 2.5 MPU Memory Map
    6. 2.6 IPU Memory Map
    7. 2.7 DSP Memory Map
    8. 2.8 EVE Memory Map
    9. 2.9 TILER View Memory Map
  5. 3 Power, Reset, and Clock Management
    1. 3.1  Device Power Management Introduction
      1. 3.1.1 Device Power-Management Architecture Building Blocks
        1. 3.1.1.1 Clock Management
          1. 3.1.1.1.1 Module Interface and Functional Clocks
          2. 3.1.1.1.2 63
          3. 3.1.1.1.3 Module-Level Clock Management
          4. 3.1.1.1.4 Clock Domain
          5. 3.1.1.1.5 Clock Domain-Level Clock Management
          6. 3.1.1.1.6 Clock Domain HW_AUTO Mode Sequences
          7. 3.1.1.1.7 Clock Domain Sleep/Wake-up
          8. 3.1.1.1.8 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.1.1.1.8.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.1.1.1.8.2 Dynamic Dependency
            3. 3.1.1.1.8.3 Wake-Up Dependency
        2. 3.1.1.2 Power Management
          1. 3.1.1.2.1 Power Domain
          2. 3.1.1.2.2 Module Logic and Memory Context
          3. 3.1.1.2.3 Power Domain Management
        3. 3.1.1.3 Voltage Management
          1. 3.1.1.3.1 Voltage Domain
          2. 3.1.1.3.2 Voltage Domain Management
          3. 3.1.1.3.3 AVS Overview
            1. 3.1.1.3.3.1 AVS Class 0 (SmartReflex™) Voltage Control
      2. 3.1.2 Power-Management Techniques
        1. 3.1.2.1 Standby Leakage Management
        2. 3.1.2.2 Dynamic Voltage and Frequency Scaling
        3. 3.1.2.3 Dynamic Power Switching
        4. 3.1.2.4 Adaptive Voltage Scaling
        5. 3.1.2.5 Adaptive Body Bias
        6. 3.1.2.6 SR3-APG (Automatic Power Gating)
        7. 3.1.2.7 Combining Power-Management Techniques
          1. 3.1.2.7.1 DPS Versus SLM
    2. 3.2  PRCM Subsystem Overview
      1. 3.2.1 Introduction
      2. 3.2.2 Power-Management Framework Features
    3. 3.3  PRCM Subsystem Environment
      1. 3.3.1 External Clock Signals
      2. 3.3.2 External Boot Signals
      3. 3.3.3 External Reset Signals
      4. 3.3.4 External Voltage Inputs
    4. 3.4  PRCM Subsystem Integration
      1. 3.4.1 Device Power-Management Layout
      2. 3.4.2 Power-Management Scheme, Reset, and Interrupt Requests
        1. 3.4.2.1 Power Domain
        2. 3.4.2.2 Resets
        3. 3.4.2.3 PRCM Interrupt Requests
        4. 3.4.2.4 105
    5. 3.5  Reset Management Functional Description
      1. 3.5.1 Overview
        1. 3.5.1.1 PRCM Reset Management Functional Description
          1. 3.5.1.1.1 Power-On Reset
          2. 3.5.1.1.2 Warm Reset
        2. 3.5.1.2 PRM Reset Management Functional Description
      2. 3.5.2 General Characteristics of Reset Signals
        1. 3.5.2.1 Scope
        2. 3.5.2.2 Occurrence
        3. 3.5.2.3 Source Type
        4. 3.5.2.4 Retention Type
      3. 3.5.3 Reset Sources
        1. 3.5.3.1 Global Reset Sources
        2. 3.5.3.2 Local Reset Sources
      4. 3.5.4 Reset Logging
      5. 3.5.5 Reset Domains
      6. 3.5.6 Reset Sequences
        1. 3.5.6.1  MPU Subsystem Power-On Reset Sequence
        2. 3.5.6.2  MPU Subsystem Warm Reset Sequence
        3. 3.5.6.3  MPU Subsystem Reset Sequence on Sleep and Wake-Up Transitions From RETENTION State
        4. 3.5.6.4  IVA Subsystem Power-On Reset Sequence
        5. 3.5.6.5  IVA Subsystem Software Warm Reset Sequence
        6. 3.5.6.6  DSP1 Subsystem Power-On Reset Sequence
        7. 3.5.6.7  DSP1 Subsystem Software Warm Reset Sequence
        8. 3.5.6.8  DSP2 Subsystem Power-On Reset Sequence
        9. 3.5.6.9  DSP2 Subsystem Software Warm Reset Sequence
        10. 3.5.6.10 IPU1 Subsystem Power-On Reset Sequence
        11. 3.5.6.11 IPU1 Subsystem Software Warm Reset Sequence
        12. 3.5.6.12 IPU2 Subsystem Power-On Reset Sequence
        13. 3.5.6.13 IPU2 Subsystem Software Warm Reset Sequence
        14. 3.5.6.14 EVE1 Subsystem Power-On Reset Sequence
        15. 3.5.6.15 EVE1 Subsystem Software Warm Reset Sequence
        16. 3.5.6.16 EVE2 Subsystem Power-On Reset Sequence
        17. 3.5.6.17 EVE2 Subsystem Software Warm Reset Sequence
        18. 3.5.6.18 Global Warm Reset Sequence
    6. 3.6  Clock Management Functional Description
      1. 3.6.1 Overview
      2. 3.6.2 External Clock Inputs
        1. 3.6.2.1 FUNC_32K_CLK Clock
        2. 3.6.2.2 High-Frequency System Clock Input
        3. 3.6.2.3 External Reference Clock Input
      3. 3.6.3 Internal Clock Sources and Generators
        1. 3.6.3.1  PRM Clock Source
        2. 3.6.3.2  CM Clock Source
          1. 3.6.3.2.1 CM_CORE_AON Clock Generator
          2. 3.6.3.2.2 CM_CORE_AON_CLKOUTMUX Overview
          3. 3.6.3.2.3 CM_CORE_AON_TIMER Overview
          4. 3.6.3.2.4 CM_CORE_AON_MCASP Overview
        3. 3.6.3.3  Generic DPLL Overview
          1. 3.6.3.3.1 Generic APLL Overview
          2. 3.6.3.3.2 DPLLs Output Clocks Parameters
          3. 3.6.3.3.3 Enable Control, Status, and Low-Power Operation Mode
          4. 3.6.3.3.4 DPLL Power Modes
          5. 3.6.3.3.5 DPLL Recalibration
          6. 3.6.3.3.6 DPLL Output Power Down
        4. 3.6.3.4  DPLL_PER Description
          1. 3.6.3.4.1 DPLL_PER Overview
          2. 3.6.3.4.2 DPLL_PER Synthesized Clock Parameters
          3. 3.6.3.4.3 DPLL_PER Power Modes
          4. 3.6.3.4.4 DPLL_PER Recalibration
        5. 3.6.3.5  DPLL_CORE Description
          1. 3.6.3.5.1 DPLL_CORE Overview
          2. 3.6.3.5.2 DPLL_CORE Synthesized Clock Parameters
          3. 3.6.3.5.3 DPLL_CORE Power Modes
          4. 3.6.3.5.4 DPLL_CORE Recalibration
        6. 3.6.3.6  DPLL_ABE Description
          1. 3.6.3.6.1 DPLL_ABE Overview
          2. 3.6.3.6.2 DPLL_ABE Synthesized Clock Parameters
          3. 3.6.3.6.3 DPLL_ABE Power Modes
          4. 3.6.3.6.4 DPLL_ABE Recalibration
        7. 3.6.3.7  DPLL_MPU Description
          1. 3.6.3.7.1 DPLL_MPU Overview
          2. 3.6.3.7.2 DPLL_MPU Tactical Clocking Adjustment
          3. 3.6.3.7.3 DPLL_MPU Synthesized Clock Parameters
          4. 3.6.3.7.4 DPLL_MPU Power Modes
          5. 3.6.3.7.5 DPLL_MPU Recalibration
        8. 3.6.3.8  DPLL_IVA Description
          1. 3.6.3.8.1 DPLL_IVA Overview
          2. 3.6.3.8.2 DPLL_IVA Synthesized Clock Parameters
          3. 3.6.3.8.3 DPLL_IVA Power Modes
          4. 3.6.3.8.4 DPLL_IVA Recalibration
        9. 3.6.3.9  DPLL_USB Description
          1. 3.6.3.9.1 DPLL_USB Overview
          2. 3.6.3.9.2 DPLL_USB Synthesized Clock Parameters
          3. 3.6.3.9.3 DPLL_USB Power Modes
          4. 3.6.3.9.4 DPLL_USB Recalibration
        10. 3.6.3.10 DPLL_EVE Description
          1. 3.6.3.10.1 DPLL_EVE Overview
          2. 3.6.3.10.2 DPLL_EVE Synthesized Clock Parameters
          3. 3.6.3.10.3 DPLL_EVE Power Modes
          4. 3.6.3.10.4 DPLL_EVE Recalibration
        11. 3.6.3.11 DPLL_DSP Description
          1. 3.6.3.11.1 DPLL_DSP Overview
          2. 3.6.3.11.2 DPLL_DSP Synthesized Clock Parameters
          3. 3.6.3.11.3 DPLL_DSP Power Modes
          4. 3.6.3.11.4 DPLL_DSP Recalibration
        12. 3.6.3.12 DPLL_GMAC Description
          1. 3.6.3.12.1 DPLL_GMAC Overview
          2. 3.6.3.12.2 DPLL_GMAC Synthesized Clock Parameters
          3. 3.6.3.12.3 DPLL_GMAC Power Modes
          4. 3.6.3.12.4 DPLL_GMAC Recalibration
        13. 3.6.3.13 DPLL_GPU Description
          1. 3.6.3.13.1 DPLL_GPU Overview
          2. 3.6.3.13.2 DPLL_GPU Synthesized Clock Parameters
          3. 3.6.3.13.3 DPLL_GPU Power Modes
          4. 3.6.3.13.4 DPLL_GPU Recalibration
        14. 3.6.3.14 DPLL_DDR Description
          1. 3.6.3.14.1 DPLL_DDR Overview
          2. 3.6.3.14.2 DPLL_DDR Synthesized Clock Parameters
          3. 3.6.3.14.3 DPLL_DDR Power Modes
          4. 3.6.3.14.4 DPLL_DDR Recalibration
        15. 3.6.3.15 DPLL_PCIE_REF Description
          1. 3.6.3.15.1 DPLL_PCIE_REF Overview
          2. 3.6.3.15.2 DPLL_PCIE_REF Synthesized Clock Parameters
          3. 3.6.3.15.3 DPLL_PCIE_REF Power Modes
        16. 3.6.3.16 APLL_PCIE Description
          1. 3.6.3.16.1 APLL_PCIE Overview
          2. 3.6.3.16.2 APLL_PCIE Synthesized Clock Parameters
          3. 3.6.3.16.3 APLL_PCIE Power Modes
      4. 3.6.4 Clock Domains
        1. 3.6.4.1  CD_WKUPAON Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.1.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.1.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.1.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.1.3.1 Wake-Up Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.1.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        2. 3.6.4.2  CD_DSP1 Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.2.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.2.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.2.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.2.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.2.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.2.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        3. 3.6.4.3  CD_DSP2 Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.3.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.3.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.3.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.3.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.3.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.3.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        4. 3.6.4.4  CD_CUSTEFUSE Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.4.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.4.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.4.3 Clock Domain Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.4.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        5. 3.6.4.5  CD_MPU Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.5.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.5.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.5.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.5.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.5.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.5.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        6. 3.6.4.6  CD_L4PER1 Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.6.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.6.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.6.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.6.3.1 Dynamic Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.6.3.2 Wake-Up Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.6.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        7. 3.6.4.7  CD_L4PER2 Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.7.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.7.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.7.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.7.3.1 Dynamic Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.7.3.2 Wake-Up Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.7.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        8. 3.6.4.8  CD_L4PER3 Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.8.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.8.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.8.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.8.3.1 Dynamic Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.8.3.2 Wake-Up Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.8.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        9. 3.6.4.9  CD_L4SEC Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.9.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.9.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.9.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.9.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.9.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.9.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
          5. 3.6.4.9.5 286
        10. 3.6.4.10 CD_L3INIT Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.10.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.10.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.10.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.10.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.10.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
            3. 3.6.4.10.3.3 Wake-Up Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.10.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        11. 3.6.4.11 CD_IVA Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.11.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.11.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.11.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.11.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.11.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.11.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        12. 3.6.4.12 CD_GPU Description
          1. 3.6.4.12.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.12.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.12.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.12.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.12.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.12.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        13. 3.6.4.13 CD_EMU Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.13.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.13.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.13.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.13.3.1 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.13.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        14. 3.6.4.14 CD_DSS Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.14.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.14.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.14.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.14.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.14.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
            3. 3.6.4.14.3.3 Wake-Up Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.14.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        15. 3.6.4.15 CD_L4_CFG Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.15.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.15.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.15.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.15.3.1 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.15.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        16. 3.6.4.16 CD_L3_INSTR Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.16.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.16.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.16.3 Clock Domain Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.16.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        17. 3.6.4.17 CD_L3_MAIN1 Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.17.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.17.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.17.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.17.3.1 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.17.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        18. 3.6.4.18 CD_EMIF Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.18.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.18.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.18.3 Clock Domain Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.18.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        19. 3.6.4.19 CD_IPU Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.19.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.19.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.19.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.19.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.19.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.19.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        20. 3.6.4.20 CD_IPU1 Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.20.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.20.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.20.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.20.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.20.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.20.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        21. 3.6.4.21 CD_IPU2 Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.21.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.21.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.21.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.21.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.21.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.21.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        22. 3.6.4.22 CD_DMA Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.22.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.22.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.22.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.22.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.22.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.22.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        23. 3.6.4.23 CD_ATL Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.23.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.23.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.23.3 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        24. 3.6.4.24 CD_CAM Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.24.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.24.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.24.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.24.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.24.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.24.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
          5. 3.6.4.24.5 384
        25. 3.6.4.25 CD_GMAC Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.25.1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.25.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.25.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.25.3.1 Static Dependency
            2. 3.6.4.25.3.2 Dynamic Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.25.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        26. 3.6.4.26 CD_VPE Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.26.1 CD_VPE Overview
          2. 3.6.4.26.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.26.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.26.3.1 Wake-Up Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.26.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        27. 3.6.4.27 CD_EVE1 Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.27.1 CD_EVE1 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.27.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.27.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.27.3.1 Wake-Up Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.27.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        28. 3.6.4.28 CD_EVE2 Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.28.1 CD_EVE2 Overview
          2. 3.6.4.28.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.28.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.28.3.1 Wake-Up Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.28.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        29. 3.6.4.29 CD_RTC Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.29.1 CD_RTC Overview
          2. 3.6.4.29.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.29.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.29.3.1 Wake-Up Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.29.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
        30. 3.6.4.30 CD_PCIE Clock Domain
          1. 3.6.4.30.1 CD_PCIE Overview
          2. 3.6.4.30.2 Clock Domain Modes
          3. 3.6.4.30.3 Clock Domain Dependency
            1. 3.6.4.30.3.1 Wake-Up Dependency
          4. 3.6.4.30.4 Clock Domain Module Attributes
    7. 3.7  Power Management Functional Description
      1. 3.7.1  PD_WKUPAON Description
        1. 3.7.1.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.1.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
      2. 3.7.2  PD_DSP1 Description
        1. 3.7.2.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.2.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.2.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes Control and Status
      3. 3.7.3  PD_DSP2 Description
        1. 3.7.3.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.3.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.3.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes Control and Status
      4. 3.7.4  PD_CUSTEFUSE Description
        1. 3.7.4.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.4.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.4.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes Control and Status
      5. 3.7.5  PD_MPU Description
        1. 3.7.5.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.5.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.5.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes Control and Status
          3. 3.7.5.1.3 Power State Override
      6. 3.7.6  PD_IPU Description
        1. 3.7.6.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.6.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.6.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes Control and Status
      7. 3.7.7  PD_L3INIT Description
        1. 3.7.7.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.7.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.7.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes Control and Status
      8. 3.7.8  PD_L4PER Description
        1. 3.7.8.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.8.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.8.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes Control and Status
      9. 3.7.9  PD_IVA Description
        1. 3.7.9.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.9.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.9.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes Control and Status
      10. 3.7.10 PD_GPU Description
        1. 3.7.10.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.10.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.10.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes Control and Status
      11. 3.7.11 PD_EMU Description
        1. 3.7.11.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.11.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.11.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes Control and Status
      12. 3.7.12 PD_DSS Description
        1. 3.7.12.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.12.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.12.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Mode Control and Status
      13. 3.7.13 PD_CORE Description
        1. 3.7.13.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.13.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.13.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Mode Control and Status
      14. 3.7.14 PD_CAM Description
        1. 3.7.14.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.14.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.14.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Mode Control and Status
      15. 3.7.15 PD_MPUAON Description
        1. 3.7.15.1 Power Domain Modes
      16. 3.7.16 PD_MMAON Description
        1. 3.7.16.1 Power Domain Modes
      17. 3.7.17 PD_COREAON Description
        1. 3.7.17.1 Power Domain Modes
      18. 3.7.18 PD_VPE Description
        1. 3.7.18.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.18.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.18.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes Control and Status
      19. 3.7.19 PD_EVE1 Description
        1. 3.7.19.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.19.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.19.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes Control and Status
      20. 3.7.20 PD_EVE2 Description
        1. 3.7.20.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.20.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
          2. 3.7.20.1.2 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes Control and Status
      21. 3.7.21 PD_RTC Description
        1. 3.7.21.1 Power Domain Modes
          1. 3.7.21.1.1 Logic and Memory Area Power Modes
    8. 3.8  Voltage-Management Functional Description
      1. 3.8.1 Overview
      2. 3.8.2 Voltage-Control Architecture
      3. 3.8.3 Internal LDOs Control
        1. 3.8.3.1 VDD_MPU_L, VDD_CORE_L, and VDD_IVAHD_L, VDD_GPU_L, VDD_DSPEVE_L Control
          1. 3.8.3.1.1 Adaptive Voltage Scaling
            1. 3.8.3.1.1.1 SmartReflex in the Device
        2. 3.8.3.2 Memory LDOs
        3. 3.8.3.3 ABB LDOs Control
        4. 3.8.3.4 ABB LDO Programming Sequence
          1. 3.8.3.4.1 ABB LDO Enable Sequence
          2. 3.8.3.4.2 ABB LDO Disable Sequence (Entering in Bypass Mode)
        5. 3.8.3.5 BANDGAPs Control
      4. 3.8.4 DVFS
    9. 3.9  Device Low-Power States
      1. 3.9.1 Device Wake-Up Source Summary
      2. 3.9.2 Wakeup Upon Global Warm Reset
      3. 3.9.3 Global Warm Reset During a Device Wake-Up Sequence
      4. 3.9.4 I/O Management
        1. 3.9.4.1 Isolation / Wakeup Sequence
          1. 3.9.4.1.1 Software-Controlled I/O Isolation
    10. 3.10 PRCM Module Programming Guide
      1. 3.10.1 DPLLs Low-Level Programming Models
        1. 3.10.1.1 Global Initialization
          1. 3.10.1.1.1 Surrounding Module Global Initialization
          2. 3.10.1.1.2 DPLL Global Initialization
            1. 3.10.1.1.2.1 Main Sequence – DPLL Global Initialization
            2. 3.10.1.1.2.2 Subsequence – Recalibration Parameter Configuration
            3. 3.10.1.1.2.3 Subsequence – Synthesized Clock Parameter Configuration
            4. 3.10.1.1.2.4 Subsequence – Output Clock Parameter Configuration
        2. 3.10.1.2 DPLL Output Frequency Change
      2. 3.10.2 Clock Management Low-Level Programming Models
        1. 3.10.2.1 Global Initialization
          1. 3.10.2.1.1 Surrounding Module Global Initialization
          2. 3.10.2.1.2 Clock Management Global Initialization
            1. 3.10.2.1.2.1 Main Sequence – Clock Domain Global Initialization
            2. 3.10.2.1.2.2 Subsequence – Slave Module Clock-Management Parameters Configuration
        2. 3.10.2.2 Clock Domain Sleep Transition and Troubleshooting
        3. 3.10.2.3 Enable/Disable Software-Programmable Static Dependency
      3. 3.10.3 Power Management Low-Level Programming Models
        1. 3.10.3.1 Global Initialization
          1. 3.10.3.1.1 Surrounding Module Global Initialization
          2. 3.10.3.1.2 Power Management Global Initialization
            1. 3.10.3.1.2.1 Main Sequence – Power Domain Global Initialization and Setting
        2. 3.10.3.2 Forced Memory Area State Change With Power Domain ON
        3. 3.10.3.3 Forced Power Domain Low-Power State Transition
    11. 3.11 546
    12. 3.12 PRCM Software Configuration for OPP_PLUS
    13. 3.13 PRCM Register Manual
      1. 3.13.1  PRCM Instance Summary
      2. 3.13.2  CM_CORE_AON__CKGEN Registers
        1. 3.13.2.1 CM_CORE_AON__CKGEN Register Summary
        2. 3.13.2.2 CM_CORE_AON__CKGEN Register Description
      3. 3.13.3  CM_CORE_AON__DSP1 Registers
        1. 3.13.3.1 CM_CORE_AON__DSP1 Register Summary
        2. 3.13.3.2 CM_CORE_AON__DSP1 Register Description
      4. 3.13.4  CM_CORE_AON__DSP2 Registers
        1. 3.13.4.1 CM_CORE_AON__DSP2 Register Summary
        2. 3.13.4.2 CM_CORE_AON__DSP2 Register Description
      5. 3.13.5  CM_CORE_AON__EVE1 Registers
        1. 3.13.5.1 CM_CORE_AON__EVE1 Register Summary
        2. 3.13.5.2 CM_CORE_AON__EVE1 Register Description
      6. 3.13.6  CM_CORE_AON__EVE2 Registers
        1. 3.13.6.1 CM_CORE_AON__EVE2 Register Summary
        2. 3.13.6.2 CM_CORE_AON__EVE2 Register Description
      7. 3.13.7  CM_CORE_AON__INSTR Registers
        1. 3.13.7.1 CM_CORE_AON__INSTR Register Summary
        2. 3.13.7.2 CM_CORE_AON__INSTR Register Description
      8. 3.13.8  CM_CORE_AON__IPU Registers
        1. 3.13.8.1 CM_CORE_AON__IPU Register Summary
        2. 3.13.8.2 CM_CORE_AON__IPU Register Description
      9. 3.13.9  CM_CORE_AON__MPU Registers
        1. 3.13.9.1 CM_CORE_AON__MPU Register Summary
        2. 3.13.9.2 CM_CORE_AON__MPU Register Description
      10. 3.13.10 CM_CORE_AON__OCP_SOCKET Registers
        1. 3.13.10.1 CM_CORE_AON__OCP_SOCKET Register Summary
        2. 3.13.10.2 CM_CORE_AON__OCP_SOCKET Register Description
      11. 3.13.11 CM_CORE_AON__RESTORE Registers
        1. 3.13.11.1 CM_CORE_AON__RESTORE Register Summary
        2. 3.13.11.2 CM_CORE_AON__RESTORE Register Description
      12. 3.13.12 CM_CORE_AON__RTC Registers
        1. 3.13.12.1 CM_CORE_AON__RTC Register Summary
        2. 3.13.12.2 CM_CORE_AON__RTC Register Description
      13. 3.13.13 CM_CORE_AON__VPE Registers
        1. 3.13.13.1 CM_CORE_AON__VPE Register Summary
        2. 3.13.13.2 CM_CORE_AON__VPE Register Description
      14. 3.13.14 CM_CORE__CAM Registers
        1. 3.13.14.1 CM_CORE__CAM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.14.2 CM_CORE__CAM Register Description
      15. 3.13.15 CM_CORE__CKGEN Registers
        1. 3.13.15.1 CM_CORE__CKGEN Register Summary
        2. 3.13.15.2 CM_CORE__CKGEN Register Description
      16. 3.13.16 CM_CORE__COREAON Registers
        1. 3.13.16.1 CM_CORE__COREAON Register Summary
        2. 3.13.16.2 CM_CORE__COREAON Register Description
      17. 3.13.17 CM_CORE__CORE Registers
        1. 3.13.17.1 CM_CORE__CORE Register Summary
        2. 3.13.17.2 CM_CORE__CORE Register Description
      18. 3.13.18 CM_CORE__CUSTEFUSE Registers
        1. 3.13.18.1 CM_CORE__CUSTEFUSE Register Summary
        2. 3.13.18.2 CM_CORE__CUSTEFUSE Register Description
      19. 3.13.19 CM_CORE__DSS Registers
        1. 3.13.19.1 CM_CORE__DSS Register Summary
        2. 3.13.19.2 CM_CORE__DSS Register Description
      20. 3.13.20 CM_CORE__GPU Registers
        1. 3.13.20.1 CM_CORE__GPU Register Summary
        2. 3.13.20.2 CM_CORE__GPU Register Description
      21. 3.13.21 CM_CORE__IVA Registers
        1. 3.13.21.1 CM_CORE__IVA Register Summary
        2. 3.13.21.2 CM_CORE__IVA Register Description
      22. 3.13.22 CM_CORE__L3INIT Registers
        1. 3.13.22.1 CM_CORE__L3INIT Register Summary
        2. 3.13.22.2 CM_CORE__L3INIT Register Description
      23. 3.13.23 CM_CORE__L4PER Registers
        1. 3.13.23.1 CM_CORE__L4PER Register Summary
        2. 3.13.23.2 CM_CORE__L4PER Register Description
      24. 3.13.24 CM_CORE__OCP_SOCKET Registers
        1. 3.13.24.1 CM_CORE__OCP_SOCKET Register Summary
        2. 3.13.24.2 CM_CORE__OCP_SOCKET Register Description
      25. 3.13.25 CM_CORE__RESTORE Registers
        1. 3.13.25.1 CM_CORE__RESTORE Register Summary
        2. 3.13.25.2 CM_CORE__RESTORE Register Description
      26. 3.13.26 CAM_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.26.1 CAM_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.26.2 CAM_PRM Register Description
      27. 3.13.27 CKGEN_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.27.1 CKGEN_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.27.2 CKGEN_PRM Register Description
      28. 3.13.28 CORE_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.28.1 CORE_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.28.2 CORE_PRM Register Description
      29. 3.13.29 CUSTEFUSE_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.29.1 CUSTEFUSE_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.29.2 CUSTEFUSE_PRM Register Description
      30. 3.13.30 DEVICE_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.30.1 DEVICE_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.30.2 DEVICE_PRM Register Description
      31. 3.13.31 DSP1_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.31.1 DSP1_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.31.2 DSP1_PRM Register Description
      32. 3.13.32 DSP2_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.32.1 DSP2_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.32.2 DSP2_PRM Register Description
      33. 3.13.33 DSS_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.33.1 DSS_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.33.2 DSS_PRM Register Description
      34. 3.13.34 EMU_CM Registers
        1. 3.13.34.1 EMU_CM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.34.2 EMU_CM Register Description
      35. 3.13.35 EMU_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.35.1 EMU_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.35.2 EMU_PRM Register Description
      36. 3.13.36 EVE1_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.36.1 EVE1_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.36.2 EVE1_PRM Register Description
      37. 3.13.37 EVE2_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.37.1 EVE2_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.37.2 EVE2_PRM Register Description
      38. 3.13.38 GPU_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.38.1 GPU_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.38.2 GPU_PRM Register Description
      39. 3.13.39 INSTR_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.39.1 INSTR_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.39.2 INSTR_PRM Register Description
      40. 3.13.40 IPU_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.40.1 IPU_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.40.2 IPU_PRM Register Description
      41. 3.13.41 IVA_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.41.1 IVA_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.41.2 IVA_PRM Register Description
      42. 3.13.42 L3INIT_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.42.1 L3INIT_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.42.2 L3INIT_PRM Register Description
      43. 3.13.43 L4PER_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.43.1 L4PER_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.43.2 L4PER_PRM Register Description
      44. 3.13.44 MPU_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.44.1 MPU_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.44.2 MPU_PRM Register Description
      45. 3.13.45 OCP_SOCKET_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.45.1 OCP_SOCKET_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.45.2 OCP_SOCKET_PRM Register Description
      46. 3.13.46 RTC_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.46.1 RTC_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.46.2 RTC_PRM Register Description
      47. 3.13.47 VPE_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.47.1 VPE_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.47.2 VPE_PRM Register Description
      48. 3.13.48 WKUPAON_CM Registers
        1. 3.13.48.1 WKUPAON_CM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.48.2 WKUPAON_CM Register Description
      49. 3.13.49 WKUPAON_PRM Registers
        1. 3.13.49.1 WKUPAON_PRM Register Summary
        2. 3.13.49.2 WKUPAON_PRM Register Description
  6. 4 Dual Cortex-A15 MPU Subsystem
    1. 4.1 Dual Cortex-A15 MPU Subsystem Overview
      1. 4.1.1 Introduction
      2. 4.1.2 Features
    2. 4.2 Dual Cortex-A15 MPU Subsystem Integration
      1. 4.2.1 Clock Distribution
      2. 4.2.2 Reset Distribution
    3. 4.3 Dual Cortex-A15 MPU Subsystem Functional Description
      1. 4.3.1 MPU Subsystem Block Diagram
      2. 4.3.2 Cortex-A15 MPCore (MPU_CLUSTER)
        1. 4.3.2.1 MPU L2 Cache Memory System
          1. 4.3.2.1.1 MPU L2 Cache Architecture
          2. 4.3.2.1.2 MPU L2 Cache Controller
          3. 4.3.2.1.3 707
      3. 4.3.3 MPU_AXI2OCP
      4. 4.3.4 Memory Adapter
        1. 4.3.4.1 MPU_MA Overview
        2. 4.3.4.2 AXI Input Interface
        3. 4.3.4.3 Interleaving
          1. 4.3.4.3.1 High-Order Fixed Interleaving Model
          2. 4.3.4.3.2 Lower 2-GiB Programmable Interleaving Model
          3. 4.3.4.3.3 Local Interconnect and Synchronization Agent (LISA) Section Manager
          4. 4.3.4.3.4 MA_LSM Registers
          5. 4.3.4.3.5 Posted and Nonposted Writes
          6. 4.3.4.3.6 Errors
        4. 4.3.4.4 Statistics Collector Probe Ports
        5. 4.3.4.5 MPU_MA Firewall
        6. 4.3.4.6 MPU_MA Power and Reset Management
        7. 4.3.4.7 MPU_MA Watchpoint
          1. 4.3.4.7.1 Watchpoint Types
          2. 4.3.4.7.2 Transaction Filtering Options
          3. 4.3.4.7.3 Transaction Match Effects
          4. 4.3.4.7.4 Trigger Generation
          5. 4.3.4.7.5 Programming Options Summary
      5. 4.3.5 Realtime Counter (Master Counter)
        1. 4.3.5.1 Counter Operation
        2. 4.3.5.2 Frequency Change Procedure
      6. 4.3.6 MPU Watchdog Timer
      7. 4.3.7 MPU Subsystem Power Management
        1. 4.3.7.1 Power Domains
        2. 4.3.7.2 Power States of MPU_Cx
        3. 4.3.7.3 Power States of MPU Subsystem
        4. 4.3.7.4 MPU_WUGEN
        5. 4.3.7.5 Power Transition Sequence
        6. 4.3.7.6 SR3-APG Technology Fail-Safe Mode
      8. 4.3.8 MPU Subsystem AMBA Interface Configuration
    4. 4.4 Dual Cortex-A15 MPU Subsystem Register Manual
      1. 4.4.1  Dual Cortex-A15 MPU Subsystem Instance Summary
      2. 4.4.2  MPU_CS_STM Registers
      3. 4.4.3  MPU_INTC Registers
      4. 4.4.4  MPU_PRCM_OCP_SOCKET Registers
        1. 4.4.4.1 MPU_PRCM_OCP_SOCKET Register Summary
        2. 4.4.4.2 MPU_PRCM_OCP_SOCKET Register Description
      5. 4.4.5  MPU_PRCM_DEVICE Registers
        1. 4.4.5.1 MPU_PRCM_DEVICE Register Summary
        2. 4.4.5.2 MPU_PRCM_DEVICE Register Description
      6. 4.4.6  MPU_PRCM_PRM_C0 Registers
        1. 4.4.6.1 MPU_PRCM_PRM_C0 Register Summary
        2. 4.4.6.2 MPU_PRCM_PRM_C0 Register Description
      7. 4.4.7  MPU_PRCM_CM_C0 Registers
        1. 4.4.7.1 MPU_PRCM_CM_C0 Register Summary
        2. 4.4.7.2 MPU_PRCM_CM_C0 Register Description
      8. 4.4.8  MPU_PRCM_PRM_C1 Registers
        1. 4.4.8.1 MPU_PRCM_PRM_C1 Register Summary
        2. 4.4.8.2 MPU_PRCM_PRM_C1 Register Description
      9. 4.4.9  MPU_PRCM_CM_C1 Registers
        1. 4.4.9.1 MPU_PRCM_CM_C1 Register Summary
        2. 4.4.9.2 MPU_PRCM_CM_C1 Register Description
      10. 4.4.10 MPU_WUGEN Registers
        1. 4.4.10.1 MPU_WUGEN Register Summary
        2. 4.4.10.2 MPU_WUGEN Register Description
      11. 4.4.11 MPU_WD_TIMER Registers
        1. 4.4.11.1 MPU_WD_TIMER Register Summary
        2. 4.4.11.2 MPU_WD_TIMER Register Description
      12. 4.4.12 MPU_AXI2OCP_MISC Registers
        1. 4.4.12.1 MPU_AXI2OCP_MISC Register Summary
        2. 4.4.12.2 MPU_AXI2OCP_MISC Register Description
      13. 4.4.13 MPU_MA_LSM Registers
        1. 4.4.13.1 MPU_MA_LSM Register Summary
        2. 4.4.13.2 MPU_MA_LSM Register Description
      14. 4.4.14 MPU_MA_WP Registers
        1. 4.4.14.1 MPU_MA_WP Register Summary
        2. 4.4.14.2 MPU_MA_WP Register Description
  7. 5 DSP Subsystems
    1. 5.1 DSP Subsystems Overview
      1. 5.1.1 DSP Subsystems Key Features
    2. 5.2 DSP Subsystem Integration
    3. 5.3 DSP Subsystems Functional Description
      1. 5.3.1  DSP Subsystems Block Diagram
      2. 5.3.2  DSP Subsystem Components
        1. 5.3.2.1 C66x DSP Subsystem Introduction
        2. 5.3.2.2 DSP TMS320C66x CorePac
          1. 5.3.2.2.1 DSP TMS320C66x CorePac CPU
          2. 5.3.2.2.2 DSP TMS320C66x CorePac Internal Memory Controllers and Memories
            1. 5.3.2.2.2.1 Level 1 Memories
            2. 5.3.2.2.2.2 Level 2 Memory
          3. 5.3.2.2.3 DSP C66x CorePac Internal Peripherals
            1. 5.3.2.2.3.1 DSP C66x CorePac Interrupt Controller (DSP INTC)
            2. 5.3.2.2.3.2 DSP C66x CorePac Power-Down Controller (DSP PDC)
            3. 5.3.2.2.3.3 DSP C66x CorePac Bandwidth Manager (BWM)
            4. 5.3.2.2.3.4 DSP C66x CorePac Memory Protection Hardware
            5. 5.3.2.2.3.5 DSP C66x CorePac Internal DMA (IDMA) Controller
            6. 5.3.2.2.3.6 DSP C66x CorePac External Memory Controller
            7. 5.3.2.2.3.7 DSP C66x CorePac Extended Memory Controller
              1. 5.3.2.2.3.7.1 XMC MDMA Accesses at DSP System Level
                1. 5.3.2.2.3.7.1.1 DSP System MPAX Logic
                2. 5.3.2.2.3.7.1.2 MDMA Non-Post Override Control
            8. 5.3.2.2.3.8 L1P Memory Error Detection Logic
            9. 5.3.2.2.3.9 L2 Memory Error Detection and Correction Logic
        3. 5.3.2.3 DSP Debug and Trace Support
          1. 5.3.2.3.1 DSP Advanced Event Triggering (AET)
          2. 5.3.2.3.2 DSP Trace Support
          3. 5.3.2.3.3 806
      3. 5.3.3  DSP System Control Logic
        1. 5.3.3.1 DSP System Clocks
        2. 5.3.3.2 DSP Hardware Resets
        3. 5.3.3.3 DSP Software Resets
        4. 5.3.3.4 DSP Power Management
          1. 5.3.3.4.1 DSP System Powerdown Protocols
          2. 5.3.3.4.2 DSP Software and Hardware Power Down Sequence Overview
          3. 5.3.3.4.3 DSP IDLE Wakeup
          4. 5.3.3.4.4 DSP SYSTEM IRQWAKEEN registers
          5. 5.3.3.4.5 DSP Automatic Power Transition
      4. 5.3.4  DSP Interrupt Requests
        1. 5.3.4.1 DSP Input Interrupts
          1. 5.3.4.1.1 DSP Non-maskable Interrupt Input
        2. 5.3.4.2 DSP Event and Interrupt Generation Outputs
          1. 5.3.4.2.1 DSP MDMA and DSP EDMA Mflag Event Outputs
          2. 5.3.4.2.2 DSP Aggregated Error Interrupt Output
          3. 5.3.4.2.3 Non-DSP C66x CorePac Generated Peripheral Interrupt Outputs
      5. 5.3.5  DSP DMA Requests
        1. 5.3.5.1 DSP EDMA Wakeup Interrupt
      6. 5.3.6  DSP Intergated Memory Management Units
        1. 5.3.6.1 DSP MMUs Overview
        2. 5.3.6.2 Routing MDMA Traffic through DSP MMU0
        3. 5.3.6.3 Routing EDMA Traffic thorugh DSP MMU1
      7. 5.3.7  DSP Integrated EDMA Subsystem
        1. 5.3.7.1 DSP EDMA Overview
        2. 5.3.7.2 DSP System and Device Level Settings of DSP EDMA
      8. 5.3.8  DSP L2 interconnect Network
        1. 5.3.8.1 DSP Public Firewall Settings
        2. 5.3.8.2 DSP NoC Flag Mux and Error Log Registers
        3. 5.3.8.3 DSP NoC Arbitration
      9. 5.3.9  DSP Boot Configuration
      10. 5.3.10 DSP Internal and External Memory Views
        1. 5.3.10.1 C66x CPU View of the Address Space
        2. 5.3.10.2 DSP_EDMA View of the Address Space
        3. 5.3.10.3 L3_MAIN View of the DSP Address Space
    4. 5.4 DSP Subsystem Register Manual
      1. 5.4.1 DSP Subsystem Instance Summary
      2. 5.4.2 DSP_ICFG Registers
        1. 5.4.2.1 DSP_ICFG Register Summary
        2. 5.4.2.2 DSP_ICFG Register Description
      3. 5.4.3 DSP_SYSTEM Registers
        1. 5.4.3.1 DSP_SYSTEM Register Summary
        2. 5.4.3.2 DSP_SYSTEM Register Description
      4. 5.4.4 DSP_FW_L2_NOC_CFG Registers
        1. 5.4.4.1 DSP_FW_L2_NOC_CFG Register Summary
        2. 5.4.4.2 DSP_FW_L2_NOC_CFG Register Description
  8. 6 IVA Subsystem
  9. 7 Dual Cortex-M4 IPU Subsystem
    1. 7.1 Dual Cortex-M4 IPU Subsystem Overview
      1. 7.1.1 Introduction
      2. 7.1.2 Features
    2. 7.2 Dual Cortex-M4 IPU Subsystem Integration
      1. 7.2.1 Dual Cortex-M4 IPU Subsystem Clock and Reset Distribution
        1. 7.2.1.1 Clock Distribution
        2. 7.2.1.2 Reset Distribution
    3. 7.3 Dual Cortex-M4 IPU Subsystem Functional Description
      1. 7.3.1 IPUx Subsystem Block Diagram
      2. 7.3.2 Power Management
        1. 7.3.2.1 Local Power Management
        2. 7.3.2.2 Power Domains
        3. 7.3.2.3 867
        4. 7.3.2.4 Voltage Domain
        5. 7.3.2.5 Power States and Modes
        6. 7.3.2.6 Wake-Up Generator (IPUx_WUGEN)
          1. 7.3.2.6.1 IPUx_WUGEN Main Features
      3. 7.3.3 IPUx_UNICACHE
      4. 7.3.4 IPUx_UNICACHE_MMU
      5. 7.3.5 IPUx_UNICACHE_SCTM
        1. 7.3.5.1 Counter Functions
          1. 7.3.5.1.1 Input Events
          2. 7.3.5.1.2 Counters
            1. 7.3.5.1.2.1 Counting Modes
            2. 7.3.5.1.2.2 Counter Overflow
            3. 7.3.5.1.2.3 Counters and Processor State
            4. 7.3.5.1.2.4 Chaining Counters
            5. 7.3.5.1.2.5 Enabling and Disabling Counters
            6. 7.3.5.1.2.6 Resetting Counters
        2. 7.3.5.2 Timer Functions
          1. 7.3.5.2.1 Periodic Intervals
          2. 7.3.5.2.2 Event Generation
      6. 7.3.6 IPUx_MMU
        1. 7.3.6.1 IPUx_MMU Behavior on Page-Fault in IPUx Subsystem
      7. 7.3.7 Interprocessor Communication (IPC)
        1. 7.3.7.1 Use of WFE and SEV
        2. 7.3.7.2 Use of Interrupt for IPC
        3. 7.3.7.3 Use of the Bit-Band Feature for Semaphore Operations
        4. 7.3.7.4 Private Memory Space
      8. 7.3.8 IPU Boot Options
    4. 7.4 Dual Cortex-M4 IPU Subsystem Register Manual
      1. 7.4.1 IPUx Subsystem Instance Summary
      2. 7.4.2 IPUx_UNICACHE_CFG Registers
        1. 7.4.2.1 IPUx_UNICACHE_CFG Register Summary
        2. 7.4.2.2 IPUx_UNICACHE_CFG Register Description
      3. 7.4.3 IPUx_UNICACHE_SCTM Registers
        1. 7.4.3.1 IPUx_UNICACHE_SCTM Register Summary
        2. 7.4.3.2 IPUx_UNICACHE_SCTM Register Description
      4. 7.4.4 IPUx_UNICACHE_MMU (AMMU) Registers
        1. 7.4.4.1 IPUx_UNICACHE_MMU (AMMU) Register Summary
        2. 7.4.4.2 IPUx_UNICACHE_MMU (AMMU) Register Description
      5. 7.4.5 IPUx_MMU Registers
      6. 7.4.6 IPUx_Cx_INTC Registers
      7. 7.4.7 IPUx_WUGEN Registers
        1. 7.4.7.1 IPUx_WUGEN Register Summary
        2. 7.4.7.2 IPUx_WUGEN Register Description
      8. 7.4.8 IPUx_Cx_RW_TABLE Registers
        1. 7.4.8.1 IPUx_Cx_RW_TABLE Register Summary
        2. 7.4.8.2 IPUx_Cx_RW_TABLE Register Description
  10. 8 Embedded Vision Engine
    1. 8.1 Embedded Vision Engine (EVE) Subsystem
      1. 8.1.1 EVE Overview
        1. 8.1.1.1 EVE Memories
      2. 8.1.2 EVE Integration
        1. 8.1.2.1 Multi-EVE Recommended Connections
      3. 8.1.3 EVE Functional Description
        1. 8.1.3.1  EVE Connection ID (ConnID) Mapping
        2. 8.1.3.2  EVE Processors Overview
          1. 8.1.3.2.1 Scalar Core (ARP32)
          2. 8.1.3.2.2 VCOP
          3. 8.1.3.2.3 Scalar-Vector Interaction
        3. 8.1.3.3  Internal Memory Overview
          1. 8.1.3.3.1 Program Cache/Memory
          2. 8.1.3.3.2 ARP32 Data Memory (DMEM)
          3. 8.1.3.3.3 WBUF
          4. 8.1.3.3.4 Image Buffers–IBUFLA, IBUFLB, IBUFHA, and IBUFHB
          5. 8.1.3.3.5 Memory Switch Error Registers
          6. 8.1.3.3.6 Memory Error Detection
            1. 8.1.3.3.6.1 Captured Address – EDADDR and EDADDR_BO
            2. 8.1.3.3.6.2 Modes of Operation
            3. 8.1.3.3.6.3 Parity Error Testability
            4. 8.1.3.3.6.4 Parity Error Recovery
          7. 8.1.3.3.7 VCOP System Error Halt Conditions
        4. 8.1.3.4  Program Cache Architecture
          1. 8.1.3.4.1 Basic Operation
          2. 8.1.3.4.2 Line Buffer
          3. 8.1.3.4.3 Software Direct Preload
          4. 8.1.3.4.4 User Coherence Operation
            1. 8.1.3.4.4.1 Global Invalidate
            2. 8.1.3.4.4.2 Range-Based Invalidate
            3. 8.1.3.4.4.3 Single-Address Invalidate – For Breakpoint Operation
          5. 8.1.3.4.5 Demand-Based Prefetch
          6. 8.1.3.4.6 Debug Support
            1. 8.1.3.4.6.1 Read/Write Accessibility through OCP Debug Target Port
            2. 8.1.3.4.6.2 Breakpoint Support
            3. 8.1.3.4.6.3 Cache Profiling
          7. 8.1.3.4.7 Error Detection
        5. 8.1.3.5  EDMA
          1. 8.1.3.5.1 DMA Channel Events
          2. 8.1.3.5.2 DMA Parameter Set
          3. 8.1.3.5.3 Channel Controller
          4. 8.1.3.5.4 EVE-Level Bus Width and Throughput
            1. 8.1.3.5.4.1 Concurrent Transfer Requirements
        6. 8.1.3.6  General-Purpose Inputs/Outputs
        7. 8.1.3.7  CME Signaling
        8. 8.1.3.8  Multi-EVE and VIP Usage Models
          1. 8.1.3.8.1 Data Partitioning
          2. 8.1.3.8.2 Task Partitioning
          3. 8.1.3.8.3 963
        9. 8.1.3.9  Memory Management Unit
        10. 8.1.3.10 Interrupt Control
          1. 8.1.3.10.1 EVE Interrupt Sources – Memory Switch and Parity Error Interrupts
          2. 8.1.3.10.2 ARP32 INTC
          3. 8.1.3.10.3 Output Interrupt Reduction
          4. 8.1.3.10.4 End of Interrupt Mapping
        11. 8.1.3.11 Interprocessor Communication
          1. 8.1.3.11.1 Mailbox Configuration
            1. 8.1.3.11.1.1 Mailbox 0 – EVE to DSP1, DSP2 and MPU
            2. 8.1.3.11.1.2 Mailbox 1 – EVE to Other Hosts
            3. 8.1.3.11.1.3 Mailbox 2 – EVE to EVE in a 2x EVE System
        12. 8.1.3.12 Powerdown
          1. 8.1.3.12.1 Extended Duration Sleep
            1. 8.1.3.12.1.1 Sequence Overview
            2. 8.1.3.12.1.2 Idle Protocol Overview
            3. 8.1.3.12.1.3 Mstandby Protocol Overview
            4. 8.1.3.12.1.4 IDLE Wakeup
        13. 8.1.3.13 Hardware-Assisted Software Self-Test – MISRs
          1. 8.1.3.13.1 Mapping of MISRs to Different Width Buses
          2. 8.1.3.13.2 Detection of Valid Address and Data Cycles
          3. 8.1.3.13.3 Creating a Unique Signature – Software Self-Test Implications
          4. 8.1.3.13.4 Multipass Tests Using WBUF MISR
        14. 8.1.3.14 Error Recovery – ARP32 and OCP Disconnect
          1. 8.1.3.14.1 ARP32 Disconnect
          2. 8.1.3.14.2 OCP Initiator Disconnect
        15. 8.1.3.15 Lock and Unlock Feature
        16. 8.1.3.16 EVE Memory Map
          1. 8.1.3.16.1 VCOP and Local EDMA: IBUF Memory Map Aliasing
          2. 8.1.3.16.2 ARP32 Write Model – Avoiding Race Conditions
        17. 8.1.3.17 Debug Support
          1. 8.1.3.17.1 ARP32 Debug Support
          2. 8.1.3.17.2 SCTM
            1. 8.1.3.17.2.1 SCTM Configuration
            2. 8.1.3.17.2.2 SCTM Resources Reserved for BIOS
            3. 8.1.3.17.2.3 SCTM Event Mapping
            4. 8.1.3.17.2.4 SCTM Halt and Idle Modes
          3. 8.1.3.17.3 SMSET
            1. 8.1.3.17.3.1 SMSET Configuration
            2. 8.1.3.17.3.2 SMSET Event Mapping
        18. 8.1.3.18 EVE L2_FNOC Interconnect
          1. 8.1.3.18.1 EVE L2_FNOC Flag Mux and Error Log Registers
      4. 8.1.4 EVE Programming Model
        1. 8.1.4.1 Boot
        2. 8.1.4.2 Task Change and Program Cache Prefetch
          1. 8.1.4.2.1 Simple or Unoptimized Branch to New Task
          2. 8.1.4.2.2 Prefetch, Wait, then Branch to New Task
          3. 8.1.4.2.3 Hidden Prefetch
        3. 8.1.4.3 Interrupts
        4. 8.1.4.4 Safety Considerations
          1. 8.1.4.4.1 Memory Error Detection
          2. 8.1.4.4.2 MMU
          3. 8.1.4.4.3 Firewall
          4. 8.1.4.4.4 Interconnect
          5. 8.1.4.4.5 Application Stability/Sequencing
          6. 8.1.4.4.6 Interrupt Servicing
      5. 8.1.5 EVE Subsystem Register Manual
        1. 8.1.5.1 EVE Instance Summary
        2. 8.1.5.2 EVE Register Summary and Description
          1. 8.1.5.2.1 EVE Register Summary
          2. 8.1.5.2.2 EVE Register Description
        3. 8.1.5.3 EVE L2_FNOC Register Summary and Description
          1. 8.1.5.3.1 EVE L2_FNOC Register Summary
          2. 8.1.5.3.2 EVE L2_FNOC Register Description
      6. 8.1.6 Subsystem Counter Timer Module
        1. 8.1.6.1 Introduction
          1. 8.1.6.1.1 Overview
          2. 8.1.6.1.2 Top-Level Requirements
          3. 8.1.6.1.3 Configuration
          4. 8.1.6.1.4 Block Diagram
        2. 8.1.6.2 Functional Description
          1. 8.1.6.2.1 Configuration Interface
          2. 8.1.6.2.2 Counter Function
            1. 8.1.6.2.2.1 Input Events
            2. 8.1.6.2.2.2 Counters
            3. 8.1.6.2.2.3 Counting Mode
            4. 8.1.6.2.2.4 Counter Overflow
            5. 8.1.6.2.2.5 Counters and Processor State
            6. 8.1.6.2.2.6 Chaining Counters
              1. 8.1.6.2.2.6.1 Reading Chained Counters
            7. 8.1.6.2.2.7 Enabling and Disabling Counters
            8. 8.1.6.2.2.8 Resetting Counters
          3. 8.1.6.2.3 Timer Function
            1. 8.1.6.2.3.1 Periodic Intervals
            2. 8.1.6.2.3.2 Event Generation
            3. 8.1.6.2.3.3 Watchdog Timer Function
          4. 8.1.6.2.4 System Trace Integration
            1. 8.1.6.2.4.1 Overview
            2. 8.1.6.2.4.2 STM Configuration
              1. 8.1.6.2.4.2.1 Periodic Counter State Export
              2. 8.1.6.2.4.2.2 Application Control of Counter State Export
              3. 8.1.6.2.4.2.3 Application Control of the Counter Configuration Export
        3. 8.1.6.3 Use Case Examples
          1. 8.1.6.3.1 Counter Enable
            1. 8.1.6.3.1.1 Enabling a Single Counter
            2. 8.1.6.3.1.2 Reading a Single Counter
            3. 8.1.6.3.1.3 Enabling a Group of Counters Simultaneously
            4. 8.1.6.3.1.4 Reading a Group of Counters Simultaneously
            5. 8.1.6.3.1.5 Configuring a Chained Counter
          2. 8.1.6.3.2 Timer Enable
          3. 8.1.6.3.3 Periodic STM Export Enable
          4. 8.1.6.3.4 Disabling the SCTM
        4. 8.1.6.4 SCTM Register Manual
          1. 8.1.6.4.1 SCTM Instance Summary
          2. 8.1.6.4.2 SCTM Registers
            1. 8.1.6.4.2.1 SCTM Register Summary
            2. 8.1.6.4.2.2 SCTM Register Description
      7. 8.1.7 Software Message and System Event Trace
        1. 8.1.7.1 Introduction
          1. 8.1.7.1.1 Overview
          2. 8.1.7.1.2 Configuration
          3. 8.1.7.1.3 Block Diagram
        2. 8.1.7.2 Functional Description
          1. 8.1.7.2.1 Connectivity
          2. 8.1.7.2.2 SMSET Event Mapping
          3. 8.1.7.2.3 Software Messages
          4. 8.1.7.2.4 SMSET Master Port
            1. 8.1.7.2.4.1 OCP Disconnect
          5. 8.1.7.2.5 SMSET Debug Features
          6. 8.1.7.2.6 Component Ownership
            1. 8.1.7.2.6.1 Ownership State
              1. 8.1.7.2.6.1.1 Available State
              2. 8.1.7.2.6.1.2 Claimed State
              3. 8.1.7.2.6.1.3 Enabled State
            2. 8.1.7.2.6.2 Ownership Commands
            3. 8.1.7.2.6.3 Claim Reset
        3. 8.1.7.3 Use Case Examples
          1. 8.1.7.3.1 Procedure to Enable System Event Capture
          2. 8.1.7.3.2 Procedure to Start and Stop System Event Capture from External Trigger Detection
          3. 8.1.7.3.3 Procedure to Disable System Event Capture
        4. 8.1.7.4 SMSET Register Manual
          1. 8.1.7.4.1 SMSET Instance Summary
          2. 8.1.7.4.2 SMSET Register Summary
          3. 8.1.7.4.3 SMSET Register Description
    2. 8.2 ARP32 CPU and Instruction Set
      1. 8.2.1 Overview
      2. 8.2.2 Features
      3. 8.2.3 Block Diagram
      4. 8.2.4 Architecture
        1. 8.2.4.1  Interface Description
          1. 8.2.4.1.1 Data Memory Interface
          2. 8.2.4.1.2 Instruction Memory Interface
        2. 8.2.4.2  Pipeline
          1. 8.2.4.2.1 Overview
          2. 8.2.4.2.2 Pipeline Operation
            1. 8.2.4.2.2.1 ARP32 CPU Pipeline Operation
            2. 8.2.4.2.2.2 1109
          3. 8.2.4.2.3 Pipeline Interlocks
        3. 8.2.4.3  Data Format
        4. 8.2.4.4  Endian Support
        5. 8.2.4.5  Architectural Register File
        6. 8.2.4.6  CPU Control Registers
          1. 8.2.4.6.1  Control Status Register (CSR)
          2. 8.2.4.6.2  Interrupt Enable Register (IER)
          3. 8.2.4.6.3  Interrupt Flag Register (IFR)
          4. 8.2.4.6.4  Interrupt Set Register (ISR)
          5. 8.2.4.6.5  Interrupt Clear Register (ICR)
          6. 8.2.4.6.6  Nonmaskable Interrupt (NMI) Return Pointer Register (NRP)
          7. 8.2.4.6.7  Interrupt Return Pointer Register (IRP)
          8. 8.2.4.6.8  Stack Pointer Register (SP)
          9. 8.2.4.6.9  Global Data Pointer Register (GDP)
          10. 8.2.4.6.10 Link Register (LR)
          11. 8.2.4.6.11 Loop 0 Start Address Register (LSA0)
          12. 8.2.4.6.12 Loop 0 End Address Register (LEA0)
          13. 8.2.4.6.13 Loop 0 Iteration Count Register (LCNT0)
          14. 8.2.4.6.14 Loop 1 Start Address Register (LSA1)
          15. 8.2.4.6.15 Loop 1 End Address Register (LEA1)
          16. 8.2.4.6.16 Loop 1 Iteration Count Register (LCNT1)
          17. 8.2.4.6.17 Loop 0 Iteration Count Reload Value Register (LCNT0RLD)
          18. 8.2.4.6.18 Shadow Control Status Register (SCSR)
          19. 8.2.4.6.19 NMI Shadow Control Status Register (NMISCSR)
          20. 8.2.4.6.20 CPU Identification Register (CPUID)
          21. 8.2.4.6.21 Decode Program Counter Register (DPC)
          22. 8.2.4.6.22 Time Stamp Counter Registers (TSCL and TSCH)
            1. 8.2.4.6.22.1 Initialization
            2. 8.2.4.6.22.2 Enabling Counting
            3. 8.2.4.6.22.3 Disabling Counting
            4. 8.2.4.6.22.4 Reading the Counter
        7. 8.2.4.7  CPU Shadow Registers
        8. 8.2.4.8  Functional Units
        9. 8.2.4.9  Instruction Fetch
        10. 8.2.4.10 Alignment of 32-bit Instructions
        11. 8.2.4.11 Instruction Execution in Branch Delay Slot
        12. 8.2.4.12 Address Space
        13. 8.2.4.13 Program Counter Convention
        14. 8.2.4.14 Stack Pointer Convention
        15. 8.2.4.15 Global Data Pointer Convention
        16. 8.2.4.16 Conditional Execution
        17. 8.2.4.17 Hardware Loop Acceleration
          1. 8.2.4.17.1  Overview
          2. 8.2.4.17.2  Loop Registers
          3. 8.2.4.17.3  Loop Setup Instructions
          4. 8.2.4.17.4  Loop Operation
          5. 8.2.4.17.5  Call and Branch within Loop Context
          6. 8.2.4.17.6  Dynamic Changes to Loop Iteration Count
          7. 8.2.4.17.7  Interrupt Processing During HLA
          8. 8.2.4.17.8  HLA Usage in Interrupt Context
          9. 8.2.4.17.9  HLA Usage Restrictions
          10. 8.2.4.17.10 HLA Mapping Examples
            1. 8.2.4.17.10.1 Loops With Single Level of Nesting
              1. 8.2.4.17.10.1.1 C memset-like Loop, Single Level, Minimum Instructions
              2. 8.2.4.17.10.1.2 1164
              3. 8.2.4.17.10.1.3 C memcpy-like Loop, Single Level, Minimum Instructions
              4. 8.2.4.17.10.1.4 1166
            2. 8.2.4.17.10.2 Loops With Two Levels of Nesting
              1. 8.2.4.17.10.2.1 Two-level Nesting, Both Loops Ending at Same Instruction
              2. 8.2.4.17.10.2.2 1169
              3. 8.2.4.17.10.2.3 Two-level Nesting, Different Ending Instructions for Two Levels
              4. 8.2.4.17.10.2.4 1171
        18. 8.2.4.18 Interrupts
          1. 8.2.4.18.1  Overview
          2. 8.2.4.18.2  Interrupt Processing
          3. 8.2.4.18.3  Interrupt Acknowledgment
          4. 8.2.4.18.4  Interrupt Priorities
          5. 8.2.4.18.5  Interrupt Service Table (IST)
          6. 8.2.4.18.6  Interrupt Flags
            1. 8.2.4.18.6.1 Setting Interrupt Flag
            2. 8.2.4.18.6.2 Setting Interrupt Flag
            3. 8.2.4.18.6.3 1181
          7. 8.2.4.18.7  Interrupt Behavior
            1. 8.2.4.18.7.1 Reset Interrupt
            2. 8.2.4.18.7.2 Non-maskable Interrupt (NMI)
            3. 8.2.4.18.7.3 SWI Interrupt
            4. 8.2.4.18.7.4 Maskable Interrupts
            5. 8.2.4.18.7.5 UNDEF Interrupt
          8. 8.2.4.18.8  Interrupt Context Save and Restore
          9. 8.2.4.18.9  Nested Interrupts
            1. 8.2.4.18.9.1 Non-nested Interrupt Model
            2. 8.2.4.18.9.2 Nested Interrupt Model
          10. 8.2.4.18.10 Non-nested Interrupt Latency
            1. 8.2.4.18.10.1 Best Case Interrupt Latency
            2. 8.2.4.18.10.2 Worst Case Interrupt Latency
      5.      8.2.A Instruction Set
        1.       8.2.A.1 Instruction Operation and Execution Notations
        2.       8.2.A.2 Instruction Syntax and Opcode Notations
        3.       8.2.A.3 Instruction Scheduling Restrictions
          1.        8.2.A.3.1 Restrictions Applicable to a Branch Delay Slot
          2.        8.2.A.3.2 Restrictions on Loops Using Hardware Loop Assist (HLA)
          3.        8.2.A.3.3 Restrictions on Other Types of Control Flow Instructions
          4.        8.2.A.3.4 Restrictions for Write Data Bypass to Control Register Reads
          5.        8.2.A.3.5 Restrictions for Write Data Bypass to Shadow Register Reads
          6.        8.2.A.3.6 Restrictions for Link Register Update
        4.       8.2.A.4 Instruction Set Encoding
        5.       8.2.A.5 Instruction Descriptions
          1.        ABS
          2.        ADD
          3.        ADD
          4.        ADD
          5.        ADD
          6.        ADD
          7.        AND
          8.        AND
          9.        B(cc)
          10.        B(cc)
          11.        B(cc)
          12.        BIRP
          13.        BKPT
          14.        BNRP
          15.        CALL
          16.        CALL
          17.        CLR
          18.        CLR
          19.        CMP
          20.        CMP
          21.        CMP
          22.        CMPU
          23.        CMPU
          24.        CMPU
          25.        DIV
          26.        DIVU
          27.        EXT
          28.        EXT
          29.        EXTU
          30.        EXTU
          31.        IDLE
          32.        LDB(U)
          33.        LDB(U)
          34.        LDB(U)
          35.        LDB(U)
          36.        LDB(U)
          37.        LDB(U)
          38.        LDB(U)
          39.        LDB(U)
          40.        LDH(U)
          41.        LDH(U)
          42.        LDH(U)
          43.        LDH(U)
          44.        LDH(U)
          45.        LDH(U)
          46.        LDH(U)
          47.        LDH(U)
          48.        LDW
          49.        LDW
          50.        LDW
          51.        LDW
          52.        LDW
          53.        LDW
          54.        LDW
          55.        LDW
          56.        LDRF
          57.        LMBD
          58.        MAX
          59.        MAXU
          60.        MIN
          61.        MINU
          62.        MOD
          63.        MODU
          64.        MPY
          65.        MPYU
          66.        MV
          67.        MVC
          68.        MVC
          69.        MVC
          70.        MVCH
          71.        MVK
          72.        MVKH
          73.        MVKLS
          74.        MVKS
          75.        MVS
          76.        MVS
          77.        NEG
          78.        NOP
          79.        NOT
          80.        OR
          81.        OR
          82.        RET
          83.        REV
          84.        ROT
          85.        ROTC
          86.        SADD
          87.        SATN
          88.        SET
          89.        SET
          90.        SHL
          91.        SHL
          92.        SHRA
          93.        SHRA
          94.        SHRU
          95.        SHRU
          96.        SLA
          97.        SSUB
          98.        STB
          99.        STB
          100.        STB
          101.        STB
          102.        STB
          103.        STB
          104.        STB
          105.        STB
          106.        STH
          107.        STH
          108.        STH
          109.        STH
          110.        STH
          111.        STH
          112.        STH
          113.        STH
          114.        STW
          115.        STW
          116.        STW
          117.        STW
          118.        STW
          119.        STW
          120.        STW
          121.        STW
          122.        STHI
          123.        STRF
          124.        SUB
          125.        SUB
          126.        SUB
          127.        SUB
          128.        SUB
          129.        SWI
          130.        XOR
          131.        XOR
      6.      8.2.B Clock, Reset, and Dynamic Power Management
        1.       8.2.B.1 Introduction
        2.       8.2.B.2 CPU Reset Modes
        3.       8.2.B.3 Dynamic Power Management
      7.      8.2.C Notes on Programming Model
        1.       8.2.C.1 Booting
        2.       8.2.C.2 Enabling and Disabling Interrupts
          1.        8.2.C.2.1 Globally Enabling or Disabling Maskable Interrupts
          2.        8.2.C.2.2 Enabling or Disabling Individual Interrupts
        3.       8.2.C.3 Stack Usage in Interrupt Service Routine
        4.       8.2.C.4 General Restrictions
    3. 8.3 VCOP CPU and Instruction Set
      1. 8.3.1 Module Overview
      2. 8.3.2 Features
      3. 8.3.3 Block Diagram
      4. 8.3.4 System Interfaces
        1. 8.3.4.1 Interrupts
        2. 8.3.4.2 Configuration Bus Slave Port
        3. 8.3.4.3 Performance Counter Interface
        4. 8.3.4.4 Data Memory Map
      5. 8.3.5 Functional Description
        1. 8.3.5.1 Scalar-Vector Architecture
          1. 8.3.5.1.1 Scalar Core
          2. 8.3.5.1.2 Scalar-Vector Interaction
        2. 8.3.5.2 Vector Core Overview
          1. 8.3.5.2.1 Nested for Loop Model
            1. 8.3.5.2.1.1 Nested Loop Model Skeleton
            2. 8.3.5.2.1.2 1365
          2. 8.3.5.2.2 Instruction Organization
        3. 8.3.5.3 Vector Control
          1. 8.3.5.3.1 Repeat End Count
          2. 8.3.5.3.2 Parameter Pointer
          3. 8.3.5.3.3 Switch Buffers
        4. 8.3.5.4 Vector-Scalar Synchronization
          1. 8.3.5.4.1 Wait for Vector Core Done
          2. 8.3.5.4.2 Wait for Vector Core Ready
        5. 8.3.5.5 Vector Computation
          1. 8.3.5.5.1  Vector Loop
            1. 8.3.5.5.1.1 Retention of State Between VLOOPs
          2. 8.3.5.5.2  Vector Register Initialization
          3. 8.3.5.5.3  Address Generator (agen)
          4. 8.3.5.5.4  Vector Load
          5. 8.3.5.5.5  Vector Arithmetic/Logic Operations
          6. 8.3.5.5.6  Vector Store
          7. 8.3.5.5.7  Table Lookup Operation
          8. 8.3.5.5.8  Histogram Operation
          9. 8.3.5.5.9  Circular Buffer Addressing Support
          10. 8.3.5.5.10 Load/Store Address Alignment Constraints
        6. 8.3.5.6 Load/Store Buffer and Scheduling
          1. 8.3.5.6.1 3-Tap Horizontal Filtering, Byte Type
          2. 8.3.5.6.2 1388
          3. 8.3.5.6.3 Horizontal Filtering, Short Type
          4. 8.3.5.6.4 1390
        7. 8.3.5.7 VCOP Per-Loop Overhead
        8. 8.3.5.8 VCOP Error Handling
        9. 8.3.5.9 Vector Operation Details
          1. 8.3.5.9.1  VABS
          2. 8.3.5.9.2  VABSDIF
          3. 8.3.5.9.3  VADD
          4. 8.3.5.9.4  VADDH
          5. 8.3.5.9.5  VADDSUB
          6. 8.3.5.9.6  VADD3
          7. 8.3.5.9.7  VADIF3
          8. 8.3.5.9.8  VAND
          9. 8.3.5.9.9  VANDN
          10. 8.3.5.9.10 VAND3
          11. 8.3.5.9.11 VBINLOG
          12. 8.3.5.9.12 VBITC
          13. 8.3.5.9.13 VBITDI
          14. 8.3.5.9.14 VBITI
          15. 8.3.5.9.15 VBITPK
          16. 8.3.5.9.16 VBITR
          17. 8.3.5.9.17 VBITTR
          18. 8.3.5.9.18 VBITUNPK
          19. 8.3.5.9.19 VCMOV
          20. 8.3.5.9.20 VCMPEQ
          21. 8.3.5.9.21 VCMPGE
          22. 8.3.5.9.22 VCMPGT
          23. 8.3.5.9.23 VDINTRLV
          24. 8.3.5.9.24 VDINTRLV2
          25. 8.3.5.9.25 VEXITNZ
          26. 8.3.5.9.26 VINTRLV
          27. 8.3.5.9.27 VINTRLV2
          28. 8.3.5.9.28 VINTRLV4
          29. 8.3.5.9.29 VLMBD
          30. 8.3.5.9.30 VMADD
          31. 8.3.5.9.31 VMAX
          32. 8.3.5.9.32 VMAXSETF
          33. 8.3.5.9.33 VMIN
          34. 8.3.5.9.34 VMINSETF
          35. 8.3.5.9.35 VMPY
          36. 8.3.5.9.36 VMSUB
          37. 8.3.5.9.37 VNOP
          38. 8.3.5.9.38 VNOT
          39. 8.3.5.9.39 VOR
          40. 8.3.5.9.40 VOR3
          41. 8.3.5.9.41 VRND
          42. 8.3.5.9.42 VSAD
          43. 8.3.5.9.43 VSEL
          44. 8.3.5.9.44 VSHF
          45. 8.3.5.9.45 VSHFOR
          46. 8.3.5.9.46 VSHF16
          47. 8.3.5.9.47 VSIGN
          48. 8.3.5.9.48 VSORT2
          49. 8.3.5.9.49 VSUB
          50. 8.3.5.9.50 VSWAP
          51. 8.3.5.9.51 VXOR
      6. 8.3.6 Debug Support
      7. 8.3.7 VCOP Register Manual
        1. 8.3.7.1 VCOP Instance Summary
        2. 8.3.7.2 VCOP Registers
          1. 8.3.7.2.1 VCOP Registers Mapping Summary
          2. 8.3.7.2.2 VCOP Register Description
  11. 9 Video Input Port
    1. 9.1 VIP Overview
    2. 9.2 VIP Environment
    3. 9.3 VIP Integration
    4. 9.4 VIP Functional Description
      1. 9.4.1 VIP Block Diagram
      2. 9.4.2 VIP Software Reset
      3. 9.4.3 VIP Power and Clocks Management
        1. 9.4.3.1 VIP Clocks
        2. 9.4.3.2 VIP Idle Mode
        3. 9.4.3.3 VIP StandBy Mode
      4. 9.4.4 VIP Slice
        1. 9.4.4.1 VIP Slice Processing Path Overview
        2. 9.4.4.2 VIP Slice Processing Path Multiplexers
          1. 9.4.4.2.1 VIP_CSC Multiplexers
          2. 9.4.4.2.2 VIP_SC Multiplexer
          3. 9.4.4.2.3 Output to VPDMA Multiplexers
        3. 9.4.4.3 VIP Slice Processing Path Examples
          1. 9.4.4.3.1 Input: A=RGB, B=YUV422; Output: A=RGB, B=RGB
          2. 9.4.4.3.2 Input: A=YUV422 8/16, B=YUV422; Output: A=Scaled YUV420, B=RGB
          3. 9.4.4.3.3 Input: A=RGB, B=YUV422; Output: A=RGB, B=Scaled YUV420
          4. 9.4.4.3.4 Input: A=YUV444, B=YUV422; Output: A=YUV422, A=Scaled YUV422, B=YUV422
          5. 9.4.4.3.5 Input: A=YUV444; Output: A=Scaled YUV420, A=YUV420
          6. 9.4.4.3.6 Input: A=YUV444; Output: A=Scaled YUV420, A=YUV444
          7. 9.4.4.3.7 Input: A=YUV422 8/16; Output: A=Scaled YUV420, A=YUV444
          8. 9.4.4.3.8 Input: A=YUV422 8/16, B=YUV422; Output: A=Scaled YUV420, B=YUV420
          9. 9.4.4.3.9 Input: A=YUV422 8/16, B=YUV422; Output: A=YUV420, B=YUV420
      5. 9.4.5 VIP Parser
        1. 9.4.5.1  Features
        2. 9.4.5.2  Repacker
        3. 9.4.5.3  Analog Video
        4. 9.4.5.4  Digitized Video
        5. 9.4.5.5  Frame Buffers
        6. 9.4.5.6  Input Data Interface
          1. 9.4.5.6.1  8b Interface Mode
          2. 9.4.5.6.2  16b Interface Mode
          3. 9.4.5.6.3  24b Interface Mode
          4. 9.4.5.6.4  Signal Relationships
          5. 9.4.5.6.5  General 5 Pin Interfaces
          6. 9.4.5.6.6  Signal Subsets—4 Pin VSYNC, ACTVID, and FID
          7. 9.4.5.6.7  Signal Subsets—4 Pin VSYNC, HSYNC, and FID
          8. 9.4.5.6.8  Vertical Sync
          9. 9.4.5.6.9  Field ID Determination Using Dedicated Signal
          10. 9.4.5.6.10 Field ID Determination Using VSYNC Skew
          11. 9.4.5.6.11 Rationale for FID Determination By VSYNC Skew
          12. 9.4.5.6.12 ACTVID Framing
          13. 9.4.5.6.13 Ancillary Data Storage in Descrete Sync Mode
        7. 9.4.5.7  BT.656 Style Embedded Sync
          1. 9.4.5.7.1 Data Input
          2. 9.4.5.7.2 Sync Words
          3. 9.4.5.7.3 Error Correction
          4. 9.4.5.7.4 Embedded Sync Ancillary Data
          5. 9.4.5.7.5 Embedded Sync RGB 24-bit Data
        8. 9.4.5.8  Source Multiplexing
          1. 9.4.5.8.1  Multiplexing Scenarios
          2. 9.4.5.8.2  2-Way Multiplexing
          3. 9.4.5.8.3  4-Way Multiplexing
          4. 9.4.5.8.4  Line Multiplexing
          5. 9.4.5.8.5  Super Frame Concept in Line Multiplexing
          6. 9.4.5.8.6  8-bit Data Interface in Line Multiplexing
          7. 9.4.5.8.7  16-bit Data Interface in Line Multiplexing
          8. 9.4.5.8.8  Split Lines in Line Multiplex Mode
          9. 9.4.5.8.9  Meta Data
          10. 9.4.5.8.10 TI Line Mux Mode, Split Lines, and Channel ID Remapping
        9. 9.4.5.9  Channel ID Extraction for 2x/4x Multiplexed Source
          1. 9.4.5.9.1 Channel ID Extraction Overview
          2. 9.4.5.9.2 Channel ID Embedded in Protection Bits for 2- and 4-Way Multiplexing
          3. 9.4.5.9.3 Channel ID Embedded in Horizontal Blanking Pixel Data for 2- and 4-Way Multiplexing
        10. 9.4.5.10 Embedded Sync Mux Modes and Data Bus Widths
        11. 9.4.5.11 Ancillary and Active Video Cropping
        12. 9.4.5.12 Interrupts
        13. 9.4.5.13 VDET Interrupt
        14. 9.4.5.14 Source Video Size
        15. 9.4.5.15 Clipping
        16. 9.4.5.16 Current and Last FID Value
        17. 9.4.5.17 Disable Handling
        18. 9.4.5.18 Picture Size Interrupt
        19. 9.4.5.19 Discrete Sync Signals
          1. 9.4.5.19.1 VBLNK and HBLNK
          2. 9.4.5.19.2 BLNK and ACTVID (1)
          3. 9.4.5.19.3 VBLNK and ACTVID(2)
          4. 9.4.5.19.4 VBLNK and HSYNC
          5. 9.4.5.19.5 VSYNC and HBLNK
          6. 9.4.5.19.6 VSYNC and ACTIVID(1)
          7. 9.4.5.19.7 VSYNC and ACTIVID(2)
          8. 9.4.5.19.8 VSYNC and HSYNC
          9. 9.4.5.19.9 Line and Pixel Capture Examples
        20. 9.4.5.20 VIP Overflow Detection and Recovery
      6. 9.4.6 VIP Color Space Converter (CSC)
        1. 9.4.6.1 CSC Features
        2. 9.4.6.2 CSC Functional Description
          1. 9.4.6.2.1 HDTV Application
            1. 9.4.6.2.1.1 HDTV Application with Video Data Range
            2. 9.4.6.2.1.2 HDTV Application with Graphics Data Range
            3. 9.4.6.2.1.3 Quantized Coefficients for Color Space Converter in HDTV
          2. 9.4.6.2.2 SDTV Application
            1. 9.4.6.2.2.1 SDTV Application with Video Data Range
            2. 9.4.6.2.2.2 SDTV Application with Graphics Data Range
            3. 9.4.6.2.2.3 Quantized Coefficients for Color Space Converter in SDTV
        3. 9.4.6.3 CSC Bypass Mode
      7. 9.4.7 VIP Scaler (SC)
        1. 9.4.7.1 SC Features
        2. 9.4.7.2 SC Functional Description
          1. 9.4.7.2.1 Trimmer
          2. 9.4.7.2.2 1555
          3. 9.4.7.2.3 Peaking
          4. 9.4.7.2.4 Vertical Scaler
            1. 9.4.7.2.4.1 Running Average Filter
            2. 9.4.7.2.4.2 Vertical Scaler Configuration Parameters
          5. 9.4.7.2.5 Horizontal Scaler
            1. 9.4.7.2.5.1 Half Decimation Filter
            2. 9.4.7.2.5.2 Polyphase Filter
            3. 9.4.7.2.5.3 Nonlinear Horizontal Scaling
            4. 9.4.7.2.5.4 Horizontal Scaler Configuration Registers
          6. 9.4.7.2.6 Basic Configurations
          7. 9.4.7.2.7 Coefficient Memory
            1. 9.4.7.2.7.1 Overview
            2. 9.4.7.2.7.2 Physical Coefficient SRAM Layout
            3. 9.4.7.2.7.3 Scaler Coefficients Packing on 128-bit VPI Control I/F
            4. 9.4.7.2.7.4 VPI Control I/F Memory Map for Scaler Coefficients
            5. 9.4.7.2.7.5 VPI Control Interface
            6. 9.4.7.2.7.6 Coefficient Table Selection Guide
        3. 9.4.7.3 SC Code
          1. 9.4.7.3.1 Generate Coefficient Memory Image
          2. 9.4.7.3.2 Scaler Configuration Calculation
          3. 9.4.7.3.3 Typical Configuration Values
        4. 9.4.7.4 SC Coefficient Data Files
          1. 9.4.7.4.1 HS Polyphase Filter Coefficients
            1. 9.4.7.4.1.1 ppfcoef_scale_eq_1_32_phases_flip.dat
            2. 9.4.7.4.1.2 ppfcoef_scale_eq_8div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            3. 9.4.7.4.1.3 ppfcoef_scale_eq_9div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            4. 9.4.7.4.1.4 ppfcoef_scale_eq_10div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            5. 9.4.7.4.1.5 ppfcoef_scale_eq_11div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            6. 9.4.7.4.1.6 ppfcoef_scale_eq_12div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            7. 9.4.7.4.1.7 ppfcoef_scale_eq_13div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            8. 9.4.7.4.1.8 ppfcoef_scale_eq_14div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            9. 9.4.7.4.1.9 ppfcoef_scale_eq_15div16_32_phases_flip.dat
          2. 9.4.7.4.2 VS Polyphase Filter Coefficients
            1. 9.4.7.4.2.1 ppfcoef_scale_eq_1_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
            2. 9.4.7.4.2.2 ppfcoef_scale_eq_3_32_phases_flip.dat
            3. 9.4.7.4.2.3 ppfcoef_scale_eq_4_32_phases_flip.dat
            4. 9.4.7.4.2.4 ppfcoef_scale_eq_5_32_phases_flip.dat
            5. 9.4.7.4.2.5 ppfcoef_scale_eq_6_32_phases_flip.dat
            6. 9.4.7.4.2.6 ppfcoef_scale_eq_7_32_phases_flip.dat
              1. 9.4.7.4.2.6.1 ppfcoef_scale_eq_8div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              2. 9.4.7.4.2.6.2 ppfcoef_scale_eq_9div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              3. 9.4.7.4.2.6.3 ppfcoef_scale_eq_10div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              4. 9.4.7.4.2.6.4 ppfcoef_scale_eq_11div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              5. 9.4.7.4.2.6.5 ppfcoef_scale_eq_12div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              6. 9.4.7.4.2.6.6 ppfcoef_scale_eq_13div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              7. 9.4.7.4.2.6.7 ppfcoef_scale_eq_14div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              8. 9.4.7.4.2.6.8 ppfcoef_scale_eq_15div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
          3. 9.4.7.4.3 VS (Bilinear Filter Coefficients)
            1. 9.4.7.4.3.1 ppfcoef_scale_eq_1_32_phases_flip_PPF3_peak5_gain_eq_1_25.dat
      8. 9.4.8 VIP Video Port Direct Memory Access (VPDMA)
        1. 9.4.8.1  VPDMA Introduction
        2. 9.4.8.2  VPDMA Basic Definitions
          1. 9.4.8.2.1 Client
          2. 9.4.8.2.2 Channel
          3. 9.4.8.2.3 List
          4. 9.4.8.2.4 Data Formats Supported
        3. 9.4.8.3  1612
        4. 9.4.8.4  VPDMA Client Buffering and Functionality
        5. 9.4.8.5  VPDMA Channels Assignment
        6. 9.4.8.6  VPDMA MFLAG Mechanism
        7. 9.4.8.7  VPDMA Interrupts
        8. 9.4.8.8  VPDMA Descriptors
          1. 9.4.8.8.1 Data Transfer Descriptors
            1. 9.4.8.8.1.1 Data Packet Descriptor Word 0 (Data)
              1. 9.4.8.8.1.1.1 Data Type
              2. 9.4.8.8.1.1.2 Notify
              3. 9.4.8.8.1.1.3 Field
              4. 9.4.8.8.1.1.4 Even Line Skip
              5. 9.4.8.8.1.1.5 Odd Line Skip
              6. 9.4.8.8.1.1.6 Line Stride
            2. 9.4.8.8.1.2 Data Packet Descriptor Word 1
              1. 9.4.8.8.1.2.1 Line Length
              2. 9.4.8.8.1.2.2 Transfer Height
            3. 9.4.8.8.1.3 Data Packet Descriptor Word 2
              1. 9.4.8.8.1.3.1 Start Address
            4. 9.4.8.8.1.4 Data Packet Descriptor Word 3
              1. 9.4.8.8.1.4.1 Packet Type
              2. 9.4.8.8.1.4.2 Mode
              3. 9.4.8.8.1.4.3 Direction
              4. 9.4.8.8.1.4.4 Channel
              5. 9.4.8.8.1.4.5 Priority
              6. 9.4.8.8.1.4.6 Next Channel
            5. 9.4.8.8.1.5 Data Packet Descriptor Word 4
              1. 9.4.8.8.1.5.1 Inbound data
                1. 9.4.8.8.1.5.1.1 Frame Width
                2. 9.4.8.8.1.5.1.2 Frame Height
              2. 9.4.8.8.1.5.2 Outbound data
                1. 9.4.8.8.1.5.2.1 Descriptor Write Address
                2. 9.4.8.8.1.5.2.2 Write Descriptor
                3. 9.4.8.8.1.5.2.3 Drop Data
            6. 9.4.8.8.1.6 Data Packet Descriptor Word 5
              1. 9.4.8.8.1.6.1 Outbound data
                1. 9.4.8.8.1.6.1.1 Max Width
                2. 9.4.8.8.1.6.1.2 Max Height
          2. 9.4.8.8.2 Configuration Descriptor
            1. 9.4.8.8.2.1 Configuration Descriptor Header Word0
            2. 9.4.8.8.2.2 Configuration Descriptor Header Word1
              1. 9.4.8.8.2.2.1 Number of Data Words
            3. 9.4.8.8.2.3 Configuration Descriptor Header Word2
              1. 9.4.8.8.2.3.1 Payload Location
            4. 9.4.8.8.2.4 Configuration Descriptor Header Word3
              1. 9.4.8.8.2.4.1 Packet Type
              2. 9.4.8.8.2.4.2 Direct
              3. 9.4.8.8.2.4.3 Class
                1. 9.4.8.8.2.4.3.1 Address Data Block Format
              4. 9.4.8.8.2.4.4 Destination
              5. 9.4.8.8.2.4.5 Descriptor Length
          3. 9.4.8.8.3 Control Descriptor
            1. 9.4.8.8.3.1 Generic Control Descriptor Format
            2. 9.4.8.8.3.2 Control Descriptor Header Description
              1. 9.4.8.8.3.2.1 Packet Type
              2. 9.4.8.8.3.2.2 Source
              3. 9.4.8.8.3.2.3 Control
            3. 9.4.8.8.3.3 Control Descriptor Types
              1. 9.4.8.8.3.3.1 Sync on Client
              2. 9.4.8.8.3.3.2 Sync on List
              3. 9.4.8.8.3.3.3 Sync on External Event
              4. 9.4.8.8.3.3.4 Sync on Channel
              5. 9.4.8.8.3.3.5 Sync on LM Timer
              6. 9.4.8.8.3.3.6 Change Client Interrupt
              7. 9.4.8.8.3.3.7 Send Interrupt
              8. 9.4.8.8.3.3.8 Reload List
              9. 9.4.8.8.3.3.9 Abort Channel
        9. 9.4.8.9  VPDMA Configuration
          1. 9.4.8.9.1 Regular List
          2. 9.4.8.9.2 Video Input Ports
            1. 9.4.8.9.2.1 Multiplexed Data Streams
            2. 9.4.8.9.2.2 Single YUV Color Separate
            3. 9.4.8.9.2.3 Dual YUV Interleaved
        10. 9.4.8.10 VPDMA Data Formats
          1. 9.4.8.10.1 YUV Data Formats
            1. 9.4.8.10.1.1 Y 4:4:4 (Data Type 0)
            2. 9.4.8.10.1.2 Y 4:2:2 (Data Type 1)
            3. 9.4.8.10.1.3 Y 4:2:0 (Data Type 2)
            4. 9.4.8.10.1.4 C 4:4:4 (Data Type 4)
            5. 9.4.8.10.1.5 C 4:2:2 (Data Type 5)
            6. 9.4.8.10.1.6 C 4:2:0 (Data Type 6)
            7. 9.4.8.10.1.7 YC 4:2:2 (Data Type 7)
            8. 9.4.8.10.1.8 YC 4:4:4 (Data Type 8)
            9. 9.4.8.10.1.9 CY 4:2:2 (Data Type 23)
          2. 9.4.8.10.2 RGB Data Formats
            1. 9.4.8.10.2.1  RGB16-565 (Data Type 0)
            2. 9.4.8.10.2.2  ARGB-1555 (Data Type 1)
            3. 9.4.8.10.2.3  ARGB-4444 (Data Type 2)
            4. 9.4.8.10.2.4  RGBA-5551 (Data Type 3)
            5. 9.4.8.10.2.5  RGBA-4444 (Data Type 4)
            6. 9.4.8.10.2.6  ARGB24-6666 (Data Type 5)
            7. 9.4.8.10.2.7  RGB24-888 (Data Type 6)
            8. 9.4.8.10.2.8  ARGB32-8888 (Data Type 7)
            9. 9.4.8.10.2.9  RGBA24-6666 (Data Type 8)
            10. 9.4.8.10.2.10 RGBA32-8888 (Data Type 9)
          3. 9.4.8.10.3 Miscellaneous Data Type
    5. 9.5 VIP Register Manual
      1. 9.5.1 VIP Instance Summary
      2. 9.5.2 VIP Top Level Registers
        1. 9.5.2.1 VIP Top Level Register Summary
        2. 9.5.2.2 VIP Top Level Register Description
      3. 9.5.3 VIP Parser Registers
        1. 9.5.3.1 VIP Parser Register Summary
        2. 9.5.3.2 VIP Parser Register Description
      4. 9.5.4 VIP CSC Registers
        1. 9.5.4.1 VIP CSC Register Summary
        2. 9.5.4.2 VIP CSC Register Description
      5. 9.5.5 VIP SC registers
        1. 9.5.5.1 VIP SC Register Summary
        2. 9.5.5.2 VIP SC Register Description
      6. 9.5.6 VIP VPDMA Registers
        1. 9.5.6.1 VIP VPDMA Register Summary
        2. 9.5.6.2 VIP VPDMA Register Description
  12. 10Video Processing Engine
    1. 10.1 VPE Overview
    2. 10.2 VPE Integration
    3. 10.3 VPE Functional Description
      1. 10.3.1  VPE Block Diagram
      2. 10.3.2  VPE VC1 Range Mapping/Range Reduction
      3. 10.3.3  VPE Deinterlacer (DEI)
        1. 10.3.3.1 Functional Description
        2. 10.3.3.2 Bypass Mode
        3. 10.3.3.3 1734
          1. 10.3.3.3.1 VPDMA Interface
          2. 10.3.3.3.2 MDT
          3. 10.3.3.3.3 EDI
          4. 10.3.3.3.4 FMD
          5. 10.3.3.3.5 MUX
          6. 10.3.3.3.6 LINE BUFFER
      4. 10.3.4  VPE Scaler (SC)
        1. 10.3.4.1 SC Features
        2. 10.3.4.2 SC Functional Description
          1. 10.3.4.2.1 Trimmer
          2. 10.3.4.2.2 1745
          3. 10.3.4.2.3 Peaking
          4. 10.3.4.2.4 Vertical Scaler
            1. 10.3.4.2.4.1 Running Average Filter
            2. 10.3.4.2.4.2 Vertical Scaler Configuration Parameters
          5. 10.3.4.2.5 Horizontal Scaler
            1. 10.3.4.2.5.1 Half Decimation Filter
            2. 10.3.4.2.5.2 Polyphase Filter
            3. 10.3.4.2.5.3 Nonlinear Horizontal Scaling
            4. 10.3.4.2.5.4 Horizontal Scaler Configuration Registers
          6. 10.3.4.2.6 Basic Configurations
          7. 10.3.4.2.7 Coefficient Memory
            1. 10.3.4.2.7.1 Overview
            2. 10.3.4.2.7.2 Physical Coefficient SRAM Layout
            3. 10.3.4.2.7.3 Scaler Coefficients Packing on 128-bit VPI Control I/F
            4. 10.3.4.2.7.4 VPI Control I/F Memory Map for Scaler Coefficients
            5. 10.3.4.2.7.5 VPI Control Interface
            6. 10.3.4.2.7.6 Coefficient Table Selection Guide
        3. 10.3.4.3 SC Code
          1. 10.3.4.3.1 Generate Coefficient Memory Image
          2. 10.3.4.3.2 Scaler Configuration Calculation
          3. 10.3.4.3.3 Typical Configuration Values
        4. 10.3.4.4 SC Coefficient Data Files
          1. 10.3.4.4.1 HS Polyphase Filter Coefficients
            1. 10.3.4.4.1.1 ppfcoef_scale_eq_1_32_phases_flip.dat
            2. 10.3.4.4.1.2 ppfcoef_scale_eq_8div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            3. 10.3.4.4.1.3 ppfcoef_scale_eq_9div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            4. 10.3.4.4.1.4 ppfcoef_scale_eq_10div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            5. 10.3.4.4.1.5 ppfcoef_scale_eq_11div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            6. 10.3.4.4.1.6 ppfcoef_scale_eq_12div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            7. 10.3.4.4.1.7 ppfcoef_scale_eq_13div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            8. 10.3.4.4.1.8 ppfcoef_scale_eq_14div16_32_phases_flip.dat
            9. 10.3.4.4.1.9 ppfcoef_scale_eq_15div16_32_phases_flip.dat
          2. 10.3.4.4.2 VS Polyphase Filter Coefficients
            1. 10.3.4.4.2.1 ppfcoef_scale_eq_1_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
            2. 10.3.4.4.2.2 ppfcoef_scale_eq_3_32_phases_flip.dat
            3. 10.3.4.4.2.3 ppfcoef_scale_eq_4_32_phases_flip.dat
            4. 10.3.4.4.2.4 ppfcoef_scale_eq_5_32_phases_flip.dat
            5. 10.3.4.4.2.5 ppfcoef_scale_eq_6_32_phases_flip.dat
            6. 10.3.4.4.2.6 ppfcoef_scale_eq_7_32_phases_flip.dat
              1. 10.3.4.4.2.6.1 ppfcoef_scale_eq_8div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              2. 10.3.4.4.2.6.2 ppfcoef_scale_eq_9div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              3. 10.3.4.4.2.6.3 ppfcoef_scale_eq_10div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              4. 10.3.4.4.2.6.4 ppfcoef_scale_eq_11div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              5. 10.3.4.4.2.6.5 ppfcoef_scale_eq_12div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              6. 10.3.4.4.2.6.6 ppfcoef_scale_eq_13div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              7. 10.3.4.4.2.6.7 ppfcoef_scale_eq_14div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              8. 10.3.4.4.2.6.8 ppfcoef_scale_eq_15div16_32_phases_ver_5tap_flip.dat
              9. 10.3.4.4.2.6.9 ppcoef_scale_1x_ver_5tap.dat
          3. 10.3.4.4.3 VS (Bilinear Filter Coefficients)
            1. 10.3.4.4.3.1 ppfcoef_scale_eq_1_32_phases_flip_PPF3_peak5_gain_eq_1_25.dat
      5. 10.3.5  VPE Color Space Converter (CSC)
        1. 10.3.5.1 CSC Features
        2. 10.3.5.2 CSC Functional Description
        3. 10.3.5.3 1799
          1. 10.3.5.3.1 HDTV Application
            1. 10.3.5.3.1.1 HDTV Application with Video Data Range
            2. 10.3.5.3.1.2 HDTV Application with Graphics Data Range
            3. 10.3.5.3.1.3 Quantized Coefficients for Color Space Converter in HDTV
          2. 10.3.5.3.2 SDTV Application
            1. 10.3.5.3.2.1 SDTV Application with Video Data Range
            2. 10.3.5.3.2.2 SDTV Application with Graphics Data Range
            3. 10.3.5.3.2.3 Quantized Coefficients for Color Space Converter in SDTV
        4. 10.3.5.4 CSC Bypass Mode
      6. 10.3.6  VPE Chroma Up-Sampler (CHR_US)
        1. 10.3.6.1 Features
        2. 10.3.6.2 Functional Description
        3. 10.3.6.3 For Interlaced YUV420 Input Data
        4. 10.3.6.4 Edge Effects
        5. 10.3.6.5 Modes of Operation (VPDMA)
        6. 10.3.6.6 Coefficient Configuration
      7. 10.3.7  VPE Chroma Down-Sampler (CHR_DS)
      8. 10.3.8  VPE YUV422 to YUV444 Conversion
      9. 10.3.9  VPE Video Port Direct Memory Access (VPDMA)
        1. 10.3.9.1 VPDMA Introduction
        2. 10.3.9.2 VPDMA Basic Definitions
          1. 10.3.9.2.1 Client
          2. 10.3.9.2.2 Channel
          3. 10.3.9.2.3 List
          4. 10.3.9.2.4 Data Formats Supported
        3. 10.3.9.3 VPDMA Client Buffering and Functionality
        4. 10.3.9.4 VPDMA Channels Assignment
        5. 10.3.9.5 VPDMA Interrupts
        6. 10.3.9.6 VPDMA Descriptors
          1. 10.3.9.6.1 Data Transfer Descriptors
            1. 10.3.9.6.1.1 Data Packet Descriptor Word 0 (Data)
              1. 10.3.9.6.1.1.1 Data Type
              2. 10.3.9.6.1.1.2 Notify
              3. 10.3.9.6.1.1.3 Field
              4. 10.3.9.6.1.1.4 1D
              5. 10.3.9.6.1.1.5 Even Line Skip
              6. 10.3.9.6.1.1.6 Odd Line Skip
              7. 10.3.9.6.1.1.7 Line Stride
            2. 10.3.9.6.1.2 Data Packet Descriptor Word 1
              1. 10.3.9.6.1.2.1 Line Length
              2. 10.3.9.6.1.2.2 Transfer Height
            3. 10.3.9.6.1.3 Data Packet Descriptor Word 2
              1. 10.3.9.6.1.3.1 Start Address
            4. 10.3.9.6.1.4 Data Packet Descriptor Word 3
              1. 10.3.9.6.1.4.1 Packet Type
              2. 10.3.9.6.1.4.2 Mode
              3. 10.3.9.6.1.4.3 Direction
              4. 10.3.9.6.1.4.4 Channel
              5. 10.3.9.6.1.4.5 Priority
              6. 10.3.9.6.1.4.6 Next Channel
            5. 10.3.9.6.1.5 Data Packet Descriptor Word 4
              1. 10.3.9.6.1.5.1 Inbound data
                1. 10.3.9.6.1.5.1.1 Frame Width
                2. 10.3.9.6.1.5.1.2 Frame Height
              2. 10.3.9.6.1.5.2 Outbound data
                1. 10.3.9.6.1.5.2.1 Descriptor Write Address
                2. 10.3.9.6.1.5.2.2 Write Descriptor
                3. 10.3.9.6.1.5.2.3 Drop Data
                4. 10.3.9.6.1.5.2.4 Use Descriptor Register
            6. 10.3.9.6.1.6 Data Packet Descriptor Word 5
              1. 10.3.9.6.1.6.1 Outbound data
                1. 10.3.9.6.1.6.1.1 Max Width
                2. 10.3.9.6.1.6.1.2 Max Height
            7. 10.3.9.6.1.7 Data Packet Descriptor Word 6/7 (Data)
          2. 10.3.9.6.2 Configuration Descriptor
            1. 10.3.9.6.2.1 Configuration Descriptor Header Word0
            2. 10.3.9.6.2.2 Configuration Descriptor Header Word1
              1. 10.3.9.6.2.2.1 Number of Data Words
            3. 10.3.9.6.2.3 Configuration Descriptor Header Word2
              1. 10.3.9.6.2.3.1 Payload Location
            4. 10.3.9.6.2.4 Configuration Descriptor Header Word3
              1. 10.3.9.6.2.4.1 Packet Type
              2. 10.3.9.6.2.4.2 Direct
              3. 10.3.9.6.2.4.3 Class
                1. 10.3.9.6.2.4.3.1 Address Data Block Format
              4. 10.3.9.6.2.4.4 Destination
              5. 10.3.9.6.2.4.5 Descriptor Length
          3. 10.3.9.6.3 Control Descriptor
            1. 10.3.9.6.3.1 Generic Control Descriptor Format
            2. 10.3.9.6.3.2 Control Descriptor Header Description
              1. 10.3.9.6.3.2.1 Packet Type
              2. 10.3.9.6.3.2.2 Source
              3. 10.3.9.6.3.2.3 Control
            3. 10.3.9.6.3.3 Control Descriptor Types
              1. 10.3.9.6.3.3.1 Sync on Client
              2. 10.3.9.6.3.3.2 Sync on List
              3. 10.3.9.6.3.3.3 Sync on External Event
              4. 10.3.9.6.3.3.4 Sync on Channel
              5. 10.3.9.6.3.3.5 Sync on LM Timer
              6. 10.3.9.6.3.3.6 Change Client Interrupt
              7. 10.3.9.6.3.3.7 Send Interrupt
              8. 10.3.9.6.3.3.8 Reload List
              9. 10.3.9.6.3.3.9 Abort Channel
        7. 10.3.9.7 VPDMA Configuration
          1. 10.3.9.7.1 Regular List
          2. 10.3.9.7.2 Video Input Ports
            1. 10.3.9.7.2.1 Single YUV Color Separate
            2. 10.3.9.7.2.2 Dual YUV Interleaved
            3. 10.3.9.7.2.3 Single RGB Stream
        8. 10.3.9.8 VPDMA Data Formats
          1. 10.3.9.8.1 YUV Data Formats
            1. 10.3.9.8.1.1 Y 4:4:4 (Data Type 0)
            2. 10.3.9.8.1.2 Y 4:2:2 (Data Type 1)
            3. 10.3.9.8.1.3 Y 4:2:0 (Data Type 2)
            4. 10.3.9.8.1.4 C 4:4:4 (Data Type 4)
            5. 10.3.9.8.1.5 C 4:2:2 (Data Type 5)
            6. 10.3.9.8.1.6 C 4:2:0 (Data Type 6)
            7. 10.3.9.8.1.7 YC 4:2:2 (Data Type 7)
            8. 10.3.9.8.1.8 YC 4:4:4 (Data Type 8)
            9. 10.3.9.8.1.9 CY 4:2:2 (Data Type 23)
          2. 10.3.9.8.2 RGB Data Formats
            1. 10.3.9.8.2.1 Input Data Formats
              1. 10.3.9.8.2.1.1  RGB16-565 (Data Type 0)
              2. 10.3.9.8.2.1.2  ARGB-1555 (Data Type 1)
              3. 10.3.9.8.2.1.3  ARGB-4444 (Data Type 2)
              4. 10.3.9.8.2.1.4  RGBA-5551 (Data Type 3)
              5. 10.3.9.8.2.1.5  RGBA-4444 (Data Type 4)
              6. 10.3.9.8.2.1.6  ARGB24-6666 (Data Type 5)
              7. 10.3.9.8.2.1.7  RGB24-888 (Data Type 6)
              8. 10.3.9.8.2.1.8  ARGB32-8888 (Data Type 7)
              9. 10.3.9.8.2.1.9  RGBA24-6666 (Data Type 8)
              10. 10.3.9.8.2.1.10 RGBA32-8888 (Data Type 9)
            2. 10.3.9.8.2.2 Output Data Formats
              1. 10.3.9.8.2.2.1  RGB16-565 (Data Type 0)
              2. 10.3.9.8.2.2.2  ARGB-1555 (Data Type 1)
              3. 10.3.9.8.2.2.3  ARGB-4444 (Data Type 2)
              4. 10.3.9.8.2.2.4  RGBA-5551 (Data Type 3)
              5. 10.3.9.8.2.2.5  RGBA-4444 (Data Type 4)
              6. 10.3.9.8.2.2.6  ARGB24-6666 (Data Type 5)
              7. 10.3.9.8.2.2.7  RGB24-888 (Data Type 6)
              8. 10.3.9.8.2.2.8  ARGB32-8888 (Data Type 7)
              9. 10.3.9.8.2.2.9  RGBA24-6666 (Data Type 8)
              10. 10.3.9.8.2.2.10 RGBA32-8888 (Data Type 9)
          3. 10.3.9.8.3 Miscellaneous Data Type
      10. 10.3.10 VPE Software Reset
      11. 10.3.11 VPE Power and Clocks Management
        1. 10.3.11.1 VPE Clocks
        2. 10.3.11.2 VPE Idle Mode
        3. 10.3.11.3 VPE StandBy Mode
    4. 10.4 VPE Register Manual
      1. 10.4.1 VPE Instance Summary
      2. 10.4.2 VPE_CSC Registers
        1. 10.4.2.1 VPE_CSC Register Summary
        2. 10.4.2.2 VPE_CSC Register Description
      3. 10.4.3 VPE_SC Registers
        1. 10.4.3.1 VPE_SC Register Summary
        2. 10.4.3.2 VPE_SC Register Description
      4. 10.4.4 VPE_CHR_US Registers
        1. 10.4.4.1 VPE_CHR_US Register Summary
        2. 10.4.4.2 VPE_CHR_US Register Description
      5. 10.4.5 VPE_DEI Registers
        1. 10.4.5.1 VPE_DEI Register Summary
        2. 10.4.5.2 VPE_DEI Register Description
      6. 10.4.6 VPE_VPDMA Registers
        1. 10.4.6.1 VPE_VPDMA Register Summary
        2. 10.4.6.2 VPE_VPDMA Register Description
      7. 10.4.7 VPE_TOP_LEVEL Registers
        1. 10.4.7.1 VPE_TOP_LEVEL Register Summary
        2. 10.4.7.2 VPE_TOP_LEVEL Register Description
  13. 11Display Subsystem
    1. 11.1 Display Subsystem Overview
      1. 11.1.1 Display Subsystem Environment
        1. 11.1.1.1 Display Subsystem LCD Support
          1. 11.1.1.1.1 Display Subsystem LCD with Parallel Interfaces
        2. 11.1.1.2 Display Subsystem TV Display Support
          1. 11.1.1.2.1 Display Subsystem TV With Parallel Interfaces
          2. 11.1.1.2.2 Display Subsystem TV With Serial Interfaces
      2. 11.1.2 Display Subsystem Integration
        1. 11.1.2.1 Display Subsystem Clocks
        2. 11.1.2.2 Display Subsystem Resets
        3. 11.1.2.3 Display Subsystem Power Management
          1. 11.1.2.3.1 Display Subsystem Standby Mode
          2. 11.1.2.3.2 1972
          3. 11.1.2.3.3 Display Subsystem Wake-Up Mode
      3. 11.1.3 Display Subsystem DPLL Controllers Functional Description
        1. 11.1.3.1 DPLL Controllers Overview
        2. 11.1.3.2 OCP2SCP2 Functional Description
          1. 11.1.3.2.1 OCP2SCP2 Reset
            1. 11.1.3.2.1.1 Hardware Reset
            2. 11.1.3.2.1.2 Software Reset
          2. 11.1.3.2.2 OCP2SCP2 Power Management
            1. 11.1.3.2.2.1 Idle Mode
            2. 11.1.3.2.2.2 Clock Gating
          3. 11.1.3.2.3 OCP2SCP2 Timing Registers
        3. 11.1.3.3 DPLL_VIDEO Functional Description
          1. 11.1.3.3.1 DPLL_VIDEO Controller Architecture
          2. 11.1.3.3.2 DPLL_VIDEO Operations
          3. 11.1.3.3.3 DPLL_VIDEO Error Handling
          4. 11.1.3.3.4 DPLL_VIDEO Software Reset
          5. 11.1.3.3.5 DPLL_VIDEO Power Management
          6. 11.1.3.3.6 DPLL_VIDEO HSDIVIDER Loading Operation
          7. 11.1.3.3.7 DPLL_VIDEO Clock Sequence
          8. 11.1.3.3.8 DPLL_VIDEO Go Sequence
          9. 11.1.3.3.9 DPLL_VIDEO Recommended Values
        4. 11.1.3.4 DPLL_HDMI Functional Description
          1. 11.1.3.4.1  DPLL_HDMI and PLLCTRL_HDMI Overview
          2. 11.1.3.4.2  DPLL_HDMI and PLLCTRL_HDMI Architecture
          3. 11.1.3.4.3  DPLL_HDMI Operations
          4. 11.1.3.4.4  DPLL_HDMI Register Access
          5. 11.1.3.4.5  DPLL_HDMI Error Handling
          6. 11.1.3.4.6  DPLL_HDMI Software Reset
          7. 11.1.3.4.7  DPLL_HDMI Power Management
          8. 11.1.3.4.8  DPLL_HDMI Lock Sequence
          9. 11.1.3.4.9  DPLL_HDMI Go Sequence
          10. 11.1.3.4.10 DPLL_HDMI Recommended Values
      4. 11.1.4 Display Subsystem Programming Guide
      5. 11.1.5 Display Subsystem Register Manual
        1. 11.1.5.1 Display Subsystem Instance Summary
        2. 11.1.5.2 Display Subsystem Registers
          1. 11.1.5.2.1 Display Subsystem Registers Mapping Summary
          2. 11.1.5.2.2 Display Subsystem Register Description
        3. 11.1.5.3 OCP2SCP2 registers
          1. 11.1.5.3.1 OCP2SCP2 Register Summary
          2. 11.1.5.3.2 OCP2SCP Register Description
        4. 11.1.5.4 DPLL_VIDEO Registers
          1. 11.1.5.4.1 DPLL_VIDEO Register Summary
          2. 11.1.5.4.2 DPLL_VIDEO Register Description
        5. 11.1.5.5 DPLL_HDMI Registers
          1. 11.1.5.5.1 DPLL_HDMI Registers Mapping Summary
          2. 11.1.5.5.2 DPLL_HDMI Register Description
        6. 11.1.5.6 HDMI_WP Registers
          1. 11.1.5.6.1 HDMI_WP Registers Mapping Summary
          2. 11.1.5.6.2 HDMI_WP Register Description
        7. 11.1.5.7 DSI Registers
          1. 11.1.5.7.1 DSI Register Summary
          2. 11.1.5.7.2 DSI Register Description
    2. 11.2 Display Controller
      1. 11.2.1 DISPC Overview
      2. 11.2.2 DISPC Environment
        1. 11.2.2.1 DISPC LCD Output and Data Format for the Parallel Interface
        2. 11.2.2.2 DISPC Transaction Timing Diagrams
        3. 11.2.2.3 DISPC TV Output and Data Format for the Parallel Interface
      3. 11.2.3 DISPC Integration
      4. 11.2.4 DISPC Functional Description
        1. 11.2.4.1  DISPC Clock Configuration
        2. 11.2.4.2  DISPC Software Reset
        3. 11.2.4.3  DISPC Power Management
          1. 11.2.4.3.1 DISPC Idle Mode
          2. 11.2.4.3.2 DISPC StandBy Mode
          3. 11.2.4.3.3 DISPC Wakeup
        4. 11.2.4.4  DISPC Interrupt Requests
        5. 11.2.4.5  DISPC DMA Requests
        6. 11.2.4.6  DISPC DMA Engine
          1. 11.2.4.6.1 DISPC Addressing and Bursts
          2. 11.2.4.6.2 DISPC Immediate Base Address Flip Mechanism
          3. 11.2.4.6.3 DISPC DMA Buffers
            1. 11.2.4.6.3.1 DISPC READ DMA Buffers (GFX and VID Pipelines)
            2. 11.2.4.6.3.2 DISPC WRITE DMA Buffer (WB Pipeline)
          4. 11.2.4.6.4 DISPC MFLAG Mechanism and Arbitration
          5. 11.2.4.6.5 DISPC Predecimation
          6. 11.2.4.6.6 DISPC Progressive-to-Interlaced Format Conversion
          7. 11.2.4.6.7 DISPC Arbitration
          8. 11.2.4.6.8 DISPC DMA Power Modes
            1. 11.2.4.6.8.1 DISPC DMA Low-Power Mode
            2. 11.2.4.6.8.2 DISPC DMA Ultralow-Power Mode
        7. 11.2.4.7  DISPC Rotation and Mirroring
        8. 11.2.4.8  DISPC Memory Format
        9. 11.2.4.9  DISPC Graphics Pipeline
          1. 11.2.4.9.1 DISPC Replication Logic
          2. 11.2.4.9.2 DISPC Antiflicker Filter
        10. 11.2.4.10 DISPC Video Pipelines
          1. 11.2.4.10.1 DISPC Replication Logic
          2. 11.2.4.10.2 DISPC VC-1 Range Mapping Unit
          3. 11.2.4.10.3 DISPC CSC Unit YUV to RGB
            1. 11.2.4.10.3.1 DISPC Chrominance Resampling
          4. 11.2.4.10.4 DISPC Scaler Unit
            1. 11.2.4.10.4.1 DISPC Scaling Algorithms
            2. 11.2.4.10.4.2 DISPC Scaling limitations
        11. 11.2.4.11 DISPC Write-Back Pipeline
          1. 11.2.4.11.1 DISPC Write-Back CSC Unit RGB to YUV
          2. 11.2.4.11.2 DISPC Write-Back Scaler Unit
          3. 11.2.4.11.3 DISPC Write-Back RGB Truncation Logic
        12. 11.2.4.12 DISPC Hardware Cursor
        13. 11.2.4.13 DISPC LCD Outputs
          1. 11.2.4.13.1 DISPC Overlay Manager
            1. 11.2.4.13.1.1 DISPC Priority Rule
            2. 11.2.4.13.1.2 DISPC Alpha Blender
            3. 11.2.4.13.1.3 DISPC Transparency Color Keys
            4. 11.2.4.13.1.4 DISPC Overlay Optimization
          2. 11.2.4.13.2 DISPC Gamma Correction Unit
          3. 11.2.4.13.3 DISPC Color Phase Rotation Unit
          4. 11.2.4.13.4 DISPC Color Space Conversion
          5. 11.2.4.13.5 DISPC BT.656 and BT.1120 Modes
            1. 11.2.4.13.5.1 Blanking
            2. 11.2.4.13.5.2 EAV and SAV
          6. 11.2.4.13.6 DISPC Active Matrix
            1. 11.2.4.13.6.1 DISPC Spatial/Temporal Dithering
            2. 11.2.4.13.6.2 DISPC Multiple Cycle Output Format (TDM)
          7. 11.2.4.13.7 DISPC Synchronized Buffer Update
          8. 11.2.4.13.8 DISPC Timing Generator and Panel Settings
        14. 11.2.4.14 DISPC TV Output
          1. 11.2.4.14.1 DISPC Overlay Manager
          2. 11.2.4.14.2 DISPC Gamma Correction Unit
          3. 11.2.4.14.3 DISPC Synchronized Buffer Update
          4. 11.2.4.14.4 DISPC Timing and TV Format Settings
        15. 11.2.4.15 DISPC Frame Width Considerations
        16. 11.2.4.16 DISPC Extended 3D Support
          1. 11.2.4.16.1 DISPC Extended 3D Support - Line Alternative Format
          2. 11.2.4.16.2 2098
          3. 11.2.4.16.3 DISPC Extended 3D Support - Frame Packing Format Format
          4. 11.2.4.16.4 DISPC Extended 3D Support - DLP 3D Format
        17. 11.2.4.17 DISPC Shadow Registers
      5. 11.2.5 DISPC Programming Guide
        1. 11.2.5.1 DISPC Low-Level Programming Models
          1. 11.2.5.1.1 DISPC Global Initialization
            1. 11.2.5.1.1.1 DISPC Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
          2. 11.2.5.1.2 DISPC Operational Modes Configuration
            1. 11.2.5.1.2.1 DISPC DMA Configuration
              1. 11.2.5.1.2.1.1 DISPC Main Sequence – DISPC DMA Channel Configuration
            2. 11.2.5.1.2.2 DISPC GFX Pipeline Configuration
              1. 11.2.5.1.2.2.1 DISPC Main Sequence – Configure the GFX Pipeline
              2. 11.2.5.1.2.2.2 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the GFX Window
              3. 11.2.5.1.2.2.3 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the GFX Pipeline Processing
              4. 11.2.5.1.2.2.4 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the GFX Pipeline Layer Output
            3. 11.2.5.1.2.3 DISPC Video Pipeline Configuration
              1. 11.2.5.1.2.3.1 DISPC Main Sequence – Configure the Video Pipeline
              2. 11.2.5.1.2.3.2 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the Video Window
              3. 11.2.5.1.2.3.3 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the Video Pipeline Processing
              4. 11.2.5.1.2.3.4 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the VC-1 Range Mapping
              5. 11.2.5.1.2.3.5 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the Video Color Space Conversion
              6. 11.2.5.1.2.3.6 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the Video Scaler Unit
              7. 11.2.5.1.2.3.7 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the Video Pipeline Layer Output
            4. 11.2.5.1.2.4 DISPC WB Pipeline Configuration
              1. 11.2.5.1.2.4.1 DISPC Main Sequence – Configure the WB Pipeline
              2. 11.2.5.1.2.4.2 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the Capture Window
              3. 11.2.5.1.2.4.3 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the WB Scaler Unit
              4. 11.2.5.1.2.4.4 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the WB Color Space Conversion Unit
            5. 11.2.5.1.2.5 DISPC LCD Output Configuration
              1. 11.2.5.1.2.5.1 DISPC Main Sequence – Configure the LCD Output
              2. 11.2.5.1.2.5.2 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the Overlay Manager
              3. 11.2.5.1.2.5.3 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the Gamma Table for Gamma Correction
              4. 11.2.5.1.2.5.4 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the Color Phase Rotation
              5. 11.2.5.1.2.5.5 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the LCD Panel Timings and Parameters
              6. 11.2.5.1.2.5.6 DISPC Subsequence – Configure BT.656 or BT.1120 Mode
            6. 11.2.5.1.2.6 DISPC TV Output Configuration
              1. 11.2.5.1.2.6.1 DISPC Main Sequence – Configure the TV Output
                1. 11.2.5.1.2.6.1.1 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the TV Overlay Manager
                2. 11.2.5.1.2.6.1.2 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the Gamma Table for Gamma Correction
                3. 11.2.5.1.2.6.1.3 DISPC Subsequence – Configure the TV Panel Timings and Parameters
      6. 11.2.6 DISPC Register Manual
        1. 11.2.6.1 DISPC Instance Summary
        2. 11.2.6.2 DISPC Logical Register Mapping
        3. 11.2.6.3 DISPC Registers
          1. 11.2.6.3.1 DISPC Register Summary
          2. 11.2.6.3.2 DISPC Register Description
    3. 11.3 High-Definition Multimedia Interface
      1. 11.3.1 HDMI Overview
        1. 11.3.1.1 HDMI Main Features
        2. 11.3.1.2 HDMI Video Formats and Timings
          1. 11.3.1.2.1 HDMI CEA-861-D Video Formats and Timings
          2. 11.3.1.2.2 VESA DMT Video Formats and Timings
  14. 123D Graphics Accelerator
    1. 12.1 GPU Overview
      1. 12.1.1 GPU Features Overview
      2. 12.1.2 Graphics Feature Overview
    2. 12.2 GPU Integration
    3. 12.3 GPU Functional Description
      1. 12.3.1 GPU Block Diagram
      2. 12.3.2 GPU Clock Configuration
      3. 12.3.3 GPU Software Reset
      4. 12.3.4 GPU Power Management
      5. 12.3.5 GPU Thermal Management
      6. 12.3.6 GPU Interrupt Requests
    4. 12.4 GPU Register Manual
      1. 12.4.1 GPU Instance Summary
      2. 12.4.2 GPU Registers
        1. 12.4.2.1 GPU_WRAPPER Register Summary
        2. 12.4.2.2 GPU_WRAPPER Register Description
  15. 132D Graphics Accelerator
    1. 13.1 BB2D Overview
      1. 13.1.1 BB2D Key Features Overview
    2. 13.2 BB2D Integration
    3. 13.3 BB2D Functional Description
      1. 13.3.1 BB2D Block Diagram
      2. 13.3.2 BB2D Clock Configuration
      3. 13.3.3 BB2D Software Reset
      4. 13.3.4 BB2D Power Management
    4. 13.4 BB2D Register Manual
      1. 13.4.1 BB2D Instance Summary
      2. 13.4.2 BB2D Registers
        1. 13.4.2.1 BB2D Register Summary
        2. 13.4.2.2 BB2D Register Description
  16. 14Interconnect
    1. 14.1 Interconnect Overview
      1. 14.1.1 Terminology
      2. 14.1.2 Architecture Overview
    2. 14.2 L3_MAIN Interconnect
      1. 14.2.1 L3_MAIN Interconnect Overview
      2. 14.2.2 L3_MAIN Interconnect Integration
      3. 14.2.3 L3_MAIN Interconnect Functional Description
        1. 14.2.3.1 Module Use in L3_MAIN Interconnect
        2. 14.2.3.2 Module Distribution
          1. 14.2.3.2.1 L3_MAIN Interconnect Agents
          2. 14.2.3.2.2 L3_MAIN Connectivity Matrix
            1. 14.2.3.2.2.1 Clock Domain Mapping of the L3_MAIN Interconnect Modules
            2. 14.2.3.2.2.2 2195
          3. 14.2.3.2.3 Master NIU Identification
        3. 14.2.3.3 Bandwidth Regulators
        4. 14.2.3.4 Bandwidth Limiters
        5. 14.2.3.5 Flag Muxing
          1. 14.2.3.5.1 Flag Mux Time-out
        6. 14.2.3.6 Statistic Collectors Group
        7. 14.2.3.7 L3_MAIN Protection and Firewalls
          1. 14.2.3.7.1 L3_MAIN Firewall Reset
            1. 14.2.3.7.1.1 L3_MAIN Firewall – Exported Reset Values
          2. 14.2.3.7.2 Power Management
          3. 14.2.3.7.3 L3_MAIN Firewall Functionality
            1. 14.2.3.7.3.1 Protection Regions
            2. 14.2.3.7.3.2 L3_MAIN Firewall Registers Overview
            3. 14.2.3.7.3.3 Protection Mechanism per Region Examples
            4. 14.2.3.7.3.4 L3_MAIN Firewall Error Logging
            5. 14.2.3.7.3.5 L3_MAIN Firewall Default Configuration
        8. 14.2.3.8 L3_MAIN Interconnect Error Handling
          1. 14.2.3.8.1 Global Error-Routing Scheme
          2. 14.2.3.8.2 Slave NIU Error Logging
          3. 14.2.3.8.3 Flag Mux Error Logging
          4. 14.2.3.8.4 Severity Level of Standard and Custom Errors
          5. 14.2.3.8.5 Example for Decoding Standard/Custom Errors Logged in L3_MAIN
      4. 14.2.4 L3_MAIN Interconnect Programming Guide
        1. 14.2.4.1 L3 _MAIN Interconnect Low-Level Programming Models
          1. 14.2.4.1.1 Global Initialization
            1. 14.2.4.1.1.1 Global Initialization of Surrounding Modules
        2. 14.2.4.2 Operational Modes Configuration
          1. 14.2.4.2.1 L3_MAIN Interconnect Error Analysis Mode
            1. 14.2.4.2.1.1 Main Sequence: L3_MAIN Interconnect Error Analysis Mode
              1. 14.2.4.2.1.1.1 Subsequence: L3_MAIN Custom Error Identification
              2. 14.2.4.2.1.1.2 Subsequence: L3_MAIN Interconnect Protection Violation Error Identification
              3. 14.2.4.2.1.1.3 Subsequence: L3_MAIN Interconnect Standard Error Identification
              4. 14.2.4.2.1.1.4 Subsequence: L3_MAIN Interconnect FLAGMUX Configuration
      5. 14.2.5 L3_MAIN Interconnect Register Manual
        1. 14.2.5.1 L3_MAIN Register Group Summary
          1. 14.2.5.1.1 L3_MAIN Firewall Registers Summary and Description
            1. 14.2.5.1.1.1 L3_MAIN Firewall Registers Summary
            2. 14.2.5.1.1.2 L3_MAIN Firewall Registers Description
          2. 14.2.5.1.2 L3_MAIN Host Register Summary and Description
            1. 14.2.5.1.2.1 L3_MAIN HOST Register Summary
            2. 14.2.5.1.2.2 L3_MAIN HOST Register Description
          3. 14.2.5.1.3 L3_MAIN TARG Register Summary and Description
            1. 14.2.5.1.3.1 L3_MAIN TARG Register Summary
            2. 14.2.5.1.3.2 L3_MAIN TARG Register Description
          4. 14.2.5.1.4 L3_MAIN FLAGMUX Registers Summary and Description
            1. 14.2.5.1.4.1 L3_MAIN FLAGMUX Registers Summary
            2. 14.2.5.1.4.2 L3_MAIN FLAGMUX Rebisters Description
          5. 14.2.5.1.5 L3_MAIN FLAGMUX CLK1MERGE Registers Summary and Description
            1. 14.2.5.1.5.1 L3_MAIN FLAGMUX CLK1MERGE Registers Summary
            2. 14.2.5.1.5.2 L3_MAIN FLAGMUX CLK1MERGE Registers Description
          6. 14.2.5.1.6 L3_MAIN FLAGMUX TIMEOUT Registers Summary and Description
            1. 14.2.5.1.6.1 L3_MAIN FLAGMUX TIMEOUT Registers Summary
            2. 14.2.5.1.6.2 L3_MAIN FLAGMUX TIMEOUT Registers Description
          7. 14.2.5.1.7 L3_MAIN BW Regulator Register Summary and Description
            1. 14.2.5.1.7.1 L3_MAIN BW_REGULATOR Register Summary
            2. 14.2.5.1.7.2 L3_MAIN BW_REGULATOR Register Description
          8. 14.2.5.1.8 L3_MAIN Bandwidth Limiter Register Summary and Description
            1. 14.2.5.1.8.1 L3_MAIN BW Limiter Register Summary
            2. 14.2.5.1.8.2 L3_MAIN BW Limiter Register Description
          9. 14.2.5.1.9 L3_MAIN STATCOLL Register Summary and Description
            1. 14.2.5.1.9.1 L3_MAIN STATCOLL Register Summary
            2. 14.2.5.1.9.2 L3_MAIN STATCOLL Register Description
    3. 14.3 L4 Interconnects
      1. 14.3.1 L4 Interconnect Overview
      2. 14.3.2 L4 Interconnect Integration
      3. 14.3.3 L4 Interconnect Functional Description
        1. 14.3.3.1 Module Distribution
          1. 14.3.3.1.1 L4_PER1 Interconnect Agents
          2. 14.3.3.1.2 L4_PER2 Interconnect Agents
          3. 14.3.3.1.3 L4_PER3 Interconnect Agents
          4. 14.3.3.1.4 L4_CFG Interconnect Agents
          5. 14.3.3.1.5 L4_WKUP Interconnect Agents
        2. 14.3.3.2 Power Management
        3. 14.3.3.3 L4 Firewalls
          1. 14.3.3.3.1 Protection Group
          2. 14.3.3.3.2 Segments and Regions
          3. 14.3.3.3.3 L4 Firewall Address and Protection Register Settings
        4. 14.3.3.4 L4 Error Detection and Reporting
          1. 14.3.3.4.1 IA and TA Error Detection and Logging
          2. 14.3.3.4.2 Time-Out
          3. 14.3.3.4.3 Error Reporting
          4. 14.3.3.4.4 Error Recovery
          5. 14.3.3.4.5 Firewall Error Logging in the Control Module
      4. 14.3.4 L4 Interconnect Programming Guide
        1. 14.3.4.1 L4 Interconnect Low-level Programming Models
          1. 14.3.4.1.1 Global Initialization
            1. 14.3.4.1.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
          2. 14.3.4.1.2 Operational Modes Configuration
            1. 14.3.4.1.2.1 L4 Interconnect Error Analysis Mode
              1. 14.3.4.1.2.1.1 Main Sequence: L4 Interconnect Error Analysis Mode
              2. 14.3.4.1.2.1.2 Subsequence: L4 Interconnect Protection Violation Error Identification
              3. 14.3.4.1.2.1.3 Subsequence: L4 Interconnect Unsupported Command/Address Hole Error Identification
              4. 14.3.4.1.2.1.4 Subsequence: L4 Interconnect Reset TA and Module
            2. 14.3.4.1.2.2 L4 Interconnect Time-Out Configuration Mode
              1. 14.3.4.1.2.2.1 Main Sequence: L4 Interconnect Time-Out Configuration Mode
            3. 14.3.4.1.2.3 L4 Interconnect Firewall Configuration Mode
              1. 14.3.4.1.2.3.1 Main Sequence: L4 Interconnect Firewall Configuration Mode
      5. 14.3.5 L4 Interconnects Register Manual
        1. 14.3.5.1 L4 Interconnects Instance Summary
        2. 14.3.5.2 L4 Initiator Agent (L4 IA)
          1. 14.3.5.2.1 L4 Initiator Agent (L4 IA) Register Summary
          2. 14.3.5.2.2 L4 Initiator Agent (L4 IA) Register Description
        3. 14.3.5.3 L4 Target Agent (L4 TA)
          1. 14.3.5.3.1 L4 Target Agent (L4 TA) Register Summary
          2. 14.3.5.3.2 L4 Target Agent (L4 TA) Register Description
        4. 14.3.5.4 L4 Link Agent (L4 LA)
          1. 14.3.5.4.1 L4 Link Agent (L4 LA) Register Summary
          2. 14.3.5.4.2 L4 Link Agent (L4 LA) Register Description
        5. 14.3.5.5 L4 Address Protection (L4 AP)
          1. 14.3.5.5.1 L4 Address Protection (L4 AP) Register Summary
          2. 14.3.5.5.2 L4 Address Protection (L4 AP) Register Description
  17. 15Memory Subsystem
    1. 15.1 Memory Subsystem Overview
      1. 15.1.1 DMM Overview
      2. 15.1.2 TILER Overview
      3. 15.1.3 EMIF Overview
      4. 15.1.4 GPMC Overview
      5. 15.1.5 ELM Overview
      6. 15.1.6 OCM Overview
    2. 15.2 Dynamic Memory Manager
      1. 15.2.1 DMM Overview
      2. 15.2.2 DMM Integration
        1. 15.2.2.1 DMM Configuration
      3. 15.2.3 DMM Functional Description
        1. 15.2.3.1 DMM Block Diagram
        2. 15.2.3.2 DMM Clock Configuration
        3. 15.2.3.3 DMM Power Management
        4. 15.2.3.4 DMM Interrupt Requests
        5. 15.2.3.5 DMM
          1. 15.2.3.5.1 DMM Concepts
            1. 15.2.3.5.1.1 Dynamic Mapping
            2. 15.2.3.5.1.2 Address Mapping
            3. 15.2.3.5.1.3 Address Translation
              1. 15.2.3.5.1.3.1 PAT View Mappings
              2. 15.2.3.5.1.3.2 PAT View Map Base Address
              3. 15.2.3.5.1.3.3 PAT Views
                1. 15.2.3.5.1.3.3.1 PAT Direct Access Translation
                2. 15.2.3.5.1.3.3.2 PAT Indirect Access Translation
                3. 15.2.3.5.1.3.3.3 PAT View Configuration
                4. 15.2.3.5.1.3.3.4 PAT Address Translation LUT
                5. 15.2.3.5.1.3.3.5 Direct Access to the PAT Table Vectors
                6. 15.2.3.5.1.3.3.6 Automatic Refill Through the Refill Engines
          2. 15.2.3.5.2 DMM Transaction Flows
            1. 15.2.3.5.2.1 Nontiled Transaction Flow
            2. 15.2.3.5.2.2 Tiled Transaction Flow
          3. 15.2.3.5.3 DMM Internal Macro-Architecture
            1. 15.2.3.5.3.1 LISA Description
            2. 15.2.3.5.3.2 PAT Description
            3. 15.2.3.5.3.3 PEG Description
            4. 15.2.3.5.3.4 LISA Interconnect Arbitration
            5. 15.2.3.5.3.5 ROBIN Description
            6. 15.2.3.5.3.6 TILER Description
        6. 15.2.3.6 TILER
          1. 15.2.3.6.1 TILER Concepts
            1. 15.2.3.6.1.1 TILER Rationale
              1. 15.2.3.6.1.1.1 The TILER is a 4-GiB Virtual Address Space Composed of Eight Views
              2. 15.2.3.6.1.1.2 A View is a 512-MiB Virtual Address Space Composed of Four Containers
              3. 15.2.3.6.1.1.3 A Container is a 128-MiB Virtual Address Space
              4. 15.2.3.6.1.1.4 A Page is a 4-kiB Virtual Address Space
              5. 15.2.3.6.1.1.5 A Tile is a 1-kiB Address Space
              6. 15.2.3.6.1.1.6 2356
              7. 15.2.3.6.1.1.7 A Subtile is a 128-Bit Address Space
            2. 15.2.3.6.1.2 TILER Modes
              1. 15.2.3.6.1.2.1 Bypass Mode
              2. 15.2.3.6.1.2.2 Page Mode
              3. 15.2.3.6.1.2.3 Tiled Mode
            3. 15.2.3.6.1.3 Object Container Definition
            4. 15.2.3.6.1.4 Page Definition
              1. 15.2.3.6.1.4.1 Container Geometry With 4-kiB Pages
              2. 15.2.3.6.1.4.2 Container Geometry and Page Mapping Summary
            5. 15.2.3.6.1.5 Orientation
            6. 15.2.3.6.1.6 Tile Definition
            7. 15.2.3.6.1.7 Subtiles
              1. 15.2.3.6.1.7.1 Subtiling Definition
            8. 15.2.3.6.1.8 TILER Virtual Addressing
              1. 15.2.3.6.1.8.1 Page Mode Virtual Addressing and Characteristics
              2. 15.2.3.6.1.8.2 Tiled Mode Virtual Addressing and Characteristics
              3. 15.2.3.6.1.8.3 Element Ordering in the TILER Container
                1. 15.2.3.6.1.8.3.1 Natural View or 0-Degree View (Orientation 0)
                2. 15.2.3.6.1.8.3.2 0-Degree View With Vertical Mirror or 180-Degree View With Horizontal Mirror (Orientation 1)
                3. 15.2.3.6.1.8.3.3 0-Degree View With Horizontal Mirror or 180-Degree View With Vertical Mirror (Orientation 2)
                4. 15.2.3.6.1.8.3.4 180-Degree View (Orientation 3)
                5. 15.2.3.6.1.8.3.5 90-Degree View With Vertical Mirror or 270-Degree View With Horizontal Mirror (Orientation 4)
                6. 15.2.3.6.1.8.3.6 270-Degree View (Orientation 5)
                7. 15.2.3.6.1.8.3.7 90-Degree View (Orientation 6)
                8. 15.2.3.6.1.8.3.8 90-Degree View With Horizontal Mirror or 270-Degree View With Vertical Mirror (Orientation 7)
          2. 15.2.3.6.2 TILER Macro-Architecture
          3. 15.2.3.6.3 TILER Guidelines for Initiators
            1. 15.2.3.6.3.1 Buffered Raster-Based Initiators
              1. 15.2.3.6.3.1.1 Buffer Size
              2. 15.2.3.6.3.1.2 Performance
      4. 15.2.4 DMM Use Cases and Tips
        1. 15.2.4.1 PAT Use Cases
          1. 15.2.4.1.1 Simple Manual Area Refill
          2. 15.2.4.1.2 Single Auto-Configured Area Refill
          3. 15.2.4.1.3 Chained Auto-Configured Area Refill
          4. 15.2.4.1.4 Synchronized Auto-Configured Area Refill
          5. 15.2.4.1.5 Cyclic Synchronized Auto-Configured Area Refill
        2. 15.2.4.2 Addressing Management with LISA
          1. 15.2.4.2.1 Case 1: Use of One Memory Controller
          2. 15.2.4.2.2 Case 2: Use of Two Memory Controllers
            1. 15.2.4.2.2.1 Address Upper Bits Shifting
      5. 15.2.5 DMM Basic Programming Model
        1. 15.2.5.1 Global Initialization
        2. 15.2.5.2 DMM Module Global Initialization
        3. 15.2.5.3 DMM Operational Modes Configuration
          1. 15.2.5.3.1 Different Operational Modes
          2. 15.2.5.3.2 Configuration Settings and LUT Refill
          3. 15.2.5.3.3 Interleaving Settings
          4. 15.2.5.3.4 Aliased Tiled View Orientation Settings and LUT Refill
          5. 15.2.5.3.5 Priority Settings
          6. 15.2.5.3.6 Error Handling
          7. 15.2.5.3.7 PAT Programming Model
            1. 15.2.5.3.7.1 PAT in Direct Translation Mode
            2. 15.2.5.3.7.2 PAT in Indirect Translation Mode
        4. 15.2.5.4 Addressing an Object in Tiled Mode
          1. 15.2.5.4.1 Frame-Buffer Addressing
          2. 15.2.5.4.2 TILER Page Mapping
        5. 15.2.5.5 Addressing an Object in Page Mode
        6. 15.2.5.6 Sharing Containers Between Different Modes
      6. 15.2.6 DMM Register Manual
        1. 15.2.6.1 DMM Instance Summary
        2. 15.2.6.2 DMM Registers
          1. 15.2.6.2.1 DMM Register Summary
          2. 15.2.6.2.2 DMM Register Description
    3. 15.3 EMIF Controller
      1. 15.3.1 EMIF Controller Overview
      2. 15.3.2 EMIF Module Environment
      3. 15.3.3 EMIF Module Integration
      4. 15.3.4 EMIF Functional Description
        1. 15.3.4.1  Block Diagram
          1. 15.3.4.1.1 Local Interface
          2. 15.3.4.1.2 FIFO Description
          3. 15.3.4.1.3 MPU Port Restrictions
          4. 15.3.4.1.4 Arbitration of Commands in the Command FIFO
        2. 15.3.4.2  Clock Management
          1. 15.3.4.2.1 EMIF_FICLK Overview
          2. 15.3.4.2.2 EMIF Dependency on MPU Clock Rate
        3. 15.3.4.3  Reset
        4. 15.3.4.4  System Power Management
          1. 15.3.4.4.1 Power-Down Mode
          2. 15.3.4.4.2 Self-Refresh Mode
        5. 15.3.4.5  Interrupt Requests
        6. 15.3.4.6  SDRAM Refresh Scheduling
        7. 15.3.4.7  SDRAM Initialization
          1. 15.3.4.7.1 DDR2 SDRAM Initialization
          2. 15.3.4.7.2 DDR3 SDRAM Initialization
        8. 15.3.4.8  DDR3 Read-Write Leveling
          1. 15.3.4.8.1 Full Leveling
          2. 15.3.4.8.2 Software Leveling
        9. 15.3.4.9  EMIF Access Cycles
        10. 15.3.4.10 Turnaround Time
        11. 15.3.4.11 PHY DLL Calibration
        12. 15.3.4.12 SDRAM Address Mapping
          1. 15.3.4.12.1 Address Mapping for IBANK_POS = 0 and EBANK_POS = 0
          2. 15.3.4.12.2 Address Mapping for IBANK_POS = 1 and EBANK_POS = 0
          3. 15.3.4.12.3 Address Mapping for IBANK_POS = 2 and EBANK_POS = 0
          4. 15.3.4.12.4 Address Mapping for IBANK_POS = 3 and EBANK_POS = 0
          5. 15.3.4.12.5 Address Mapping for IBANK_POS = 0 and EBANK_POS = 1
          6. 15.3.4.12.6 Address Mapping for IBANK_POS = 1 and EBANK_POS = 1
          7. 15.3.4.12.7 Address Mapping for IBANK_POS = 2 and EBANK_POS = 1
          8. 15.3.4.12.8 2457
          9. 15.3.4.12.9 Address Mapping for IBANK_POS = 3 and EBANK_POS = 1
        13. 15.3.4.13 DDR3 Output Impedance Calibration
        14. 15.3.4.14 Error Correction And Detection Feature
        15. 15.3.4.15 Class of Service
        16. 15.3.4.16 Performance Counters
          1. 15.3.4.16.1 Performance Counters General Examples
        17. 15.3.4.17 Forcing CKE to tri-state
      5. 15.3.5 EMIF Programming Guide
        1. 15.3.5.1 EMIF Low-Level Programming Models
          1. 15.3.5.1.1 Global Initialization
            1. 15.3.5.1.1.1 EMIF Configuration Sequence
          2. 15.3.5.1.2 Operational Modes Configuration
            1. 15.3.5.1.2.1 EMIF Output Impedance Calibration Mode
            2. 15.3.5.1.2.2 EMIF SDRAM Self-Refresh
            3. 15.3.5.1.2.3 EMIF SDRAM Power-Down Mode
            4. 15.3.5.1.2.4 EMIF ECC Configuration
      6. 15.3.6 EMIF Register Manual
        1. 15.3.6.1 EMIF Instance Summary
        2. 15.3.6.2 EMIF Registers
          1. 15.3.6.2.1 EMIF Register Summary
          2. 15.3.6.2.2 EMIF Register Description
    4. 15.4 General-Purpose Memory Controller
      1. 15.4.1 GPMC Overview
      2. 15.4.2 GPMC Environment
        1. 15.4.2.1 GPMC Modes
        2. 15.4.2.2 GPMC Signals
      3. 15.4.3 GPMC Integration
      4. 15.4.4 GPMC Functional Description
        1. 15.4.4.1  GPMC Block Diagram
        2. 15.4.4.2  GPMC Clock Configuration
        3. 15.4.4.3  GPMC Software Reset
        4. 15.4.4.4  GPMC Power Management
        5. 15.4.4.5  GPMC Interrupt Requests
        6. 15.4.4.6  L3 Interconnect Interface
        7. 15.4.4.7  GPMC Address and Data Bus
          1. 15.4.4.7.1 GPMC I/O Configuration Setting
          2. 15.4.4.7.2 GPMC CS0 Default Configuration at Device Reset
        8. 15.4.4.8  Address Decoder and Chip-Select Configuration
          1. 15.4.4.8.1 Chip-Select Base Address and Region Size
          2. 15.4.4.8.2 Access Protocol
            1. 15.4.4.8.2.1 Supported Devices
            2. 15.4.4.8.2.2 Access Size Adaptation and Device Width
            3. 15.4.4.8.2.3 Address/Data-Multiplexing Interface
          3. 15.4.4.8.3 External Signals
            1. 15.4.4.8.3.1 Wait Pin Monitoring Control
              1. 15.4.4.8.3.1.1 Wait Monitoring During Asynchronous Read Access
              2. 15.4.4.8.3.1.2 Wait Monitoring During Asynchronous Write Access
              3. 15.4.4.8.3.1.3 Wait Monitoring During Synchronous Read Access
              4. 15.4.4.8.3.1.4 Wait Monitoring During Synchronous Write Access
              5. 15.4.4.8.3.1.5 Wait With NAND Device
              6. 15.4.4.8.3.1.6 Idle Cycle Control Between Successive Accesses
                1. 15.4.4.8.3.1.6.1 Bus Turnaround (BUSTURNAROUND)
                2. 15.4.4.8.3.1.6.2 Idle Cycles Between Accesses to Same Chip-Select (CYCLE2CYCLESAMECSEN, CYCLE2CYCLEDELAY)
                3. 15.4.4.8.3.1.6.3 Idle Cycles Between Accesses to Different Chip-Select (CYCLE2CYCLEDIFFCSEN, CYCLE2CYCLEDELAY)
              7. 15.4.4.8.3.1.7 Slow Device Support (TIMEPARAGRANULARITY Parameter)
            2. 15.4.4.8.3.2 Reset
            3. 15.4.4.8.3.3 Byte Enable (nBE1/nBE0)
          4. 15.4.4.8.4 Error Handling
        9. 15.4.4.9  Timing Setting
          1. 15.4.4.9.1  Read Cycle Time and Write Cycle Time (RDCYCLETIME / WRCYCLETIME)
          2. 15.4.4.9.2  nCS: Chip-Select Signal Control Assertion/Deassertion Time (CSONTIME / CSRDOFFTIME / CSWROFFTIME / CSEXTRADELAY)
          3. 15.4.4.9.3  nADV/ALE: Address Valid/Address Latch Enable Signal Control Assertion/Deassertion Time (ADVONTIME / ADVRDOFFTIME / ADVWROFFTIME / ADVEXTRADELAY/ADVAADMUXONTIME/ADVAADMUXRDOFFTIME/ADVAADMUXWROFFTIME)
          4. 15.4.4.9.4  nOE/nRE: Output Enable/Read Enable Signal Control Assertion/Deassertion Time (OEONTIME / OEOFFTIME / OEEXTRADELAY / OEAADMUXONTIME / OEAADMUXOFFTIME)
          5. 15.4.4.9.5  nWE: Write Enable Signal Control Assertion/Deassertion Time (WEONTIME / WEOFFTIME / WEEXTRADELAY)
          6. 15.4.4.9.6  GPMC_CLK
          7. 15.4.4.9.7  GPMC_CLK and Control Signals Setup and Hold
          8. 15.4.4.9.8  Access Time (RDACCESSTIME / WRACCESSTIME)
            1. 15.4.4.9.8.1 Access Time on Read Access
            2. 15.4.4.9.8.2 Access Time on Write Access
          9. 15.4.4.9.9  Page Burst Access Time (PAGEBURSTACCESSTIME)
            1. 15.4.4.9.9.1 Page Burst Access Time on Read Access
            2. 15.4.4.9.9.2 Page Burst Access Time on Write Access
          10. 15.4.4.9.10 Bus Keeping Support
        10. 15.4.4.10 NOR Access Description
          1. 15.4.4.10.1 Asynchronous Access Description
            1. 15.4.4.10.1.1 Access on Address/Data Multiplexed Devices
              1. 15.4.4.10.1.1.1 Asynchronous Single-Read Operation on an Address/Data Multiplexed Device
              2. 15.4.4.10.1.1.2 Asynchronous Single-Write Operation on an Address/Data-Multiplexed Device
              3. 15.4.4.10.1.1.3 Asynchronous Multiple (Page) Write Operation on an Address/Data-Multiplexed Device
            2. 15.4.4.10.1.2 Access on Address/Address/Data-Multiplexed Devices
              1. 15.4.4.10.1.2.1 Asynchronous Single Read Operation on an AAD-Multiplexed Device
              2. 15.4.4.10.1.2.2 Asynchronous Single-Write Operation on an AAD-Multiplexed Device
              3. 15.4.4.10.1.2.3 Asynchronous Multiple (Page) Read Operation on an AAD-Multiplexed Device
          2. 15.4.4.10.2 Synchronous Access Description
            1. 15.4.4.10.2.1 Synchronous Single Read
            2. 15.4.4.10.2.2 Synchronous Multiple (Burst) Read (4-, 8-, 16-Word16 Burst With Wraparound Capability)
            3. 15.4.4.10.2.3 Synchronous Single Write
            4. 15.4.4.10.2.4 Synchronous Multiple (Burst) Write
          3. 15.4.4.10.3 Asynchronous and Synchronous Accesses in Nonmultiplexed Mode
            1. 15.4.4.10.3.1 Asynchronous Single-Read Operation on Nonmultiplexed Device
            2. 15.4.4.10.3.2 Asynchronous Single-Write Operation on Nonmultiplexed Device
            3. 15.4.4.10.3.3 Asynchronous Multiple (Page Mode) Read Operation on Nonmultiplexed Device
            4. 15.4.4.10.3.4 Synchronous Operations on a Nonmultiplexed Device
          4. 15.4.4.10.4 Page and Burst Support
          5. 15.4.4.10.5 System Burst vs External Device Burst Support
        11. 15.4.4.11 pSRAM Access Specificities
        12. 15.4.4.12 NAND Access Description
          1. 15.4.4.12.1 NAND Memory Device in Byte or 16-bit Word Stream Mode
            1. 15.4.4.12.1.1 Chip-Select Configuration for NAND Interfacing in Byte or Word Stream Mode
            2. 15.4.4.12.1.2 NAND Device Command and Address Phase Control
            3. 15.4.4.12.1.3 Command Latch Cycle
            4. 15.4.4.12.1.4 Address Latch Cycle
            5. 15.4.4.12.1.5 NAND Device Data Read and Write Phase Control in Stream Mode
            6. 15.4.4.12.1.6 NAND Device General Chip-Select Timing Control Requirement
            7. 15.4.4.12.1.7 Read and Write Access Size Adaptation
              1. 15.4.4.12.1.7.1 8-Bit-Wide NAND Device
              2. 15.4.4.12.1.7.2 16-Bit-Wide NAND Device
          2. 15.4.4.12.2 NAND Device-Ready Pin
            1. 15.4.4.12.2.1 Ready Pin Monitored by Software Polling
            2. 15.4.4.12.2.2 Ready Pin Monitored by Hardware Interrupt
          3. 15.4.4.12.3 ECC Calculator
            1. 15.4.4.12.3.1 Hamming Code
              1. 15.4.4.12.3.1.1 ECC Result Register and ECC Computation Accumulation Size
              2. 15.4.4.12.3.1.2 ECC Enabling
              3. 15.4.4.12.3.1.3 ECC Computation
              4. 15.4.4.12.3.1.4 ECC Comparison and Correction
              5. 15.4.4.12.3.1.5 ECC Calculation Based on 8-Bit Word
              6. 15.4.4.12.3.1.6 ECC Calculation Based on 16-Bit Word
            2. 15.4.4.12.3.2 BCH Code
              1. 15.4.4.12.3.2.1 Requirements
              2. 15.4.4.12.3.2.2 Memory Mapping of BCH Codeword
                1. 15.4.4.12.3.2.2.1 Memory Mapping of Data Message
                2. 15.4.4.12.3.2.2.2 Memory-Mapping of the ECC
                3. 15.4.4.12.3.2.2.3 Wrapping Modes
                  1. 4.4.12.3.2.2.3.1  Manual Mode (0x0)
                  2. 4.4.12.3.2.2.3.2  Mode 0x1
                  3. 4.4.12.3.2.2.3.3  Mode 0xA (10)
                  4. 4.4.12.3.2.2.3.4  Mode 0x2
                  5. 4.4.12.3.2.2.3.5  Mode 0x3
                  6. 4.4.12.3.2.2.3.6  Mode 0x7
                  7. 4.4.12.3.2.2.3.7  Mode 0x8
                  8. 4.4.12.3.2.2.3.8  Mode 0x4
                  9. 4.4.12.3.2.2.3.9  Mode 0x9
                  10. 4.4.12.3.2.2.3.10 Mode 0x5
                  11. 4.4.12.3.2.2.3.11 Mode 0xB (11)
                  12. 4.4.12.3.2.2.3.12 Mode 0x6
              3. 15.4.4.12.3.2.3 Supported NAND Page Mappings and ECC Schemes
                1. 15.4.4.12.3.2.3.1 Per-Sector Spare Mappings
                2. 15.4.4.12.3.2.3.2 Pooled Spare Mapping
                3. 15.4.4.12.3.2.3.3 Per-Sector Spare Mapping, with ECC Separated at the End of the Page
          4. 15.4.4.12.4 Prefetch and Write-Posting Engine
            1. 15.4.4.12.4.1 General Facts About the Engine Configuration
            2. 15.4.4.12.4.2 Prefetch Mode
            3. 15.4.4.12.4.3 FIFO Control in Prefetch Mode
            4. 15.4.4.12.4.4 Write-Posting Mode
            5. 15.4.4.12.4.5 FIFO Control in Write-Posting Mode
            6. 15.4.4.12.4.6 Optimizing NAND Access Using the Prefetch and Write-Posting Engine
            7. 15.4.4.12.4.7 Interleaved Accesses Between Prefetch and Write-Posting Engine and Other Chip-Selects
      5. 15.4.5 GPMC Basic Programming Model
        1. 15.4.5.1 GPMC High-Level Programming Model Overview
        2. 15.4.5.2 GPMC Initialization
        3. 15.4.5.3 GPMC Configuration in NOR Mode
        4. 15.4.5.4 GPMC Configuration in NAND Mode
        5. 15.4.5.5 Set Memory Access
        6. 15.4.5.6 GPMC Timing Parameters
          1. 15.4.5.6.1 GPMC Timing Parameters Formulas
            1. 15.4.5.6.1.1 NAND Flash Interface Timing Parameters Formulas
            2. 15.4.5.6.1.2 Synchronous NOR Flash Timing Parameters Formulas
            3. 15.4.5.6.1.3 Asynchronous NOR Flash Timing Parameters Formulas
      6. 15.4.6 GPMC Use Cases and Tips
        1. 15.4.6.1 How to Set GPMC Timing Parameters for Typical Accesses
          1. 15.4.6.1.1 External Memory Attached to the GPMC Module
          2. 15.4.6.1.2 Typical GPMC Setup
            1. 15.4.6.1.2.1 GPMC Configuration for Synchronous Burst Read Access
            2. 15.4.6.1.2.2 GPMC Configuration for Asynchronous Read Access
            3. 15.4.6.1.2.3 GPMC Configuration for Asynchronous Single Write Access
        2. 15.4.6.2 How to Choose a Suitable Memory to Use With the GPMC
          1. 15.4.6.2.1 Supported Memories or Devices
            1. 15.4.6.2.1.1 Memory Pin Multiplexing
            2. 15.4.6.2.1.2 NAND Interface Protocol
            3. 15.4.6.2.1.3 NOR Interface Protocol
            4. 15.4.6.2.1.4 Other Technologies
            5. 15.4.6.2.1.5 Supported Protocols
          2. 15.4.6.2.2 GPMC Features and Settings
      7. 15.4.7 GPMC Register Manual
        1. 15.4.7.1 GPMC Register Summary
        2. 15.4.7.2 GPMC Register Descriptions
    5. 15.5 Error Location Module
      1. 15.5.1 Error Location Module Overview
      2. 15.5.2 ELM Integration
      3. 15.5.3 ELM Functional Description
        1. 15.5.3.1 ELM Software Reset
        2. 15.5.3.2 ELM Power Management
        3. 15.5.3.3 ELM Interrupt Requests
        4. 15.5.3.4 Processing Initialization
        5. 15.5.3.5 Processing Sequence
        6. 15.5.3.6 Processing Completion
      4. 15.5.4 ELM Basic Programming Model
        1. 15.5.4.1 ELM Low-Level Programming Model
          1. 15.5.4.1.1 Processing Initialization
          2. 15.5.4.1.2 Read Results
          3. 15.5.4.1.3 2649
        2. 15.5.4.2 Use Case: ELM Used in Continuous Mode
        3. 15.5.4.3 Use Case: ELM Used in Page Mode
      5. 15.5.5 ELM Register Manual
        1. 15.5.5.1 ELM Instance Summary
        2. 15.5.5.2 ELM Registers
          1. 15.5.5.2.1 ELM Register Summary
          2. 15.5.5.2.2 ELM Register Description
    6. 15.6 On-Chip Memory (OCM) Subsystem
      1. 15.6.1 OCM Subsystem Overview
      2. 15.6.2 OCM Subsystem Integration
      3. 15.6.3 OCM Subsystem Functional Desctiption
        1. 15.6.3.1  Block Diagram
        2. 15.6.3.2  Resets
        3. 15.6.3.3  Clock Management
        4. 15.6.3.4  Interrupt Requests
        5. 15.6.3.5  OCM Subsystem Memory Regions
        6. 15.6.3.6  OCM Controller Modes Of Operation
        7. 15.6.3.7  ECC Associated FIFOs
        8. 15.6.3.8  ECC Counters And Corrected Bit Distribution Register
        9. 15.6.3.9  ECC Support
        10. 15.6.3.10 Circular Buffer (CBUF) Support
        11. 15.6.3.11 CBUF Mode Error Handling
          1. 15.6.3.11.1 VBUF Address Not Mapped to a CBUF Memory Space
          2. 15.6.3.11.2 VBUF Access Not Starting At The Base Address
          3. 15.6.3.11.3 Illegal Address Change Between Two Same Type Accesses
          4. 15.6.3.11.4 Illegal Frame SIze (Short Frame Detection)
          5. 15.6.3.11.5 CBUF Overflow
          6. 15.6.3.11.6 CBUF Underflow
        12. 15.6.3.12 Status Reporting
      4. 15.6.4 OCM Subsystem Register Manual
        1. 15.6.4.1 OCM Subsystem Instance Summary
        2. 15.6.4.2 OCM Subsystem Registers
          1. 15.6.4.2.1 OCM Subsystem Register Summary
          2. 15.6.4.2.2 OCM Subsystem Register Description
  18. 16DMA Controllers
    1. 16.1 System DMA
      1. 16.1.1 DMA_SYSTEM Module Overview
      2. 16.1.2 DMA_SYSTEM Controller Environment
      3. 16.1.3 DMA_SYSTEM Module Integration
        1. 16.1.3.1 DMA Requests to the DMA_SYSTEM Controller
        2. 16.1.3.2 Mapping of DMA Requests to DMA_CROSSBAR Inputs
      4. 16.1.4 DMA_SYSTEM Functional Description
        1. 16.1.4.1  DMA_SYSTEM Controller Power Management
        2. 16.1.4.2  DMA_SYSTEM Controller Interrupt Requests
          1. 16.1.4.2.1 Interrupt Generation
        3. 16.1.4.3  Logical Channel Transfer Overview
        4. 16.1.4.4  FIFO Queue Memory Pool
        5. 16.1.4.5  Addressing Modes
        6. 16.1.4.6  Packed Accesses
        7. 16.1.4.7  Burst Transactions
        8. 16.1.4.8  Endianism Conversion
        9. 16.1.4.9  Transfer Synchronization
          1. 16.1.4.9.1 Software Synchronization
          2. 16.1.4.9.2 Hardware Synchronization
        10. 16.1.4.10 Thread Budget Allocation
        11. 16.1.4.11 FIFO Budget Allocation
        12. 16.1.4.12 Chained Logical Channel Transfers
        13. 16.1.4.13 Reprogramming an Active Channel
        14. 16.1.4.14 Packet Synchronization
        15. 16.1.4.15 Graphics Acceleration Support
        16. 16.1.4.16 Supervisor Modes
        17. 16.1.4.17 Posted and Nonposted Writes
        18. 16.1.4.18 Disabling a Channel During Transfer
        19. 16.1.4.19 FIFO Draining Mechanism
        20. 16.1.4.20 Linked List
          1. 16.1.4.20.1 Overview
          2. 16.1.4.20.2 Link-List Transfer Profile
          3. 16.1.4.20.3 Descriptors
            1. 16.1.4.20.3.1 Type 1
            2. 16.1.4.20.3.2 Type 2
            3. 16.1.4.20.3.3 Type 3
          4. 16.1.4.20.4 Linked-List Control and Monitoring
            1. 16.1.4.20.4.1 Transfer Mode Setting
            2. 16.1.4.20.4.2 Starting a Linked List
            3. 16.1.4.20.4.3 Monitoring a Linked-List Progression
            4. 16.1.4.20.4.4 Interrupt During Linked-List Execution
            5. 16.1.4.20.4.5 Pause a Linked List
            6. 16.1.4.20.4.6 Stop a Linked List (Abort or Drain)
              1. 16.1.4.20.4.6.1 Drain
              2. 16.1.4.20.4.6.2 Abort
            7. 16.1.4.20.4.7 Status Bit Behavior
            8. 16.1.4.20.4.8 Linked-List Channel Linking
      5. 16.1.5 DMA_SYSTEM Basic Programming Model
        1. 16.1.5.1 Setup Configuration
        2. 16.1.5.2 Software-Triggered (Nonsynchronized) Transfer
        3. 16.1.5.3 Hardware-Synchronized Transfer
        4. 16.1.5.4 Synchronized Transfer Monitoring Using CDAC
        5. 16.1.5.5 Concurrent Software and Hardware Synchronization
        6. 16.1.5.6 Chained Transfer
        7. 16.1.5.7 90-Degree Clockwise Image Rotation
        8. 16.1.5.8 Graphic Operations
        9. 16.1.5.9 Linked-List Programming Guidelines
      6. 16.1.6 DMA_SYSTEM Register Manual
        1. 16.1.6.1 DMA_SYSTEM Instance Summary
        2. 16.1.6.2 DMA_SYSTEM Registers
          1. 16.1.6.2.1 DMA_SYSTEM Register Summary
          2. 16.1.6.2.2 DMA_SYSTEM Register Description
    2. 16.2 Enhanced DMA
      1. 16.2.1 EDMA Module Overview
        1. 16.2.1.1 EDMA Features
        2. 16.2.1.2 2750
        3. 16.2.1.3 EDMA Controllers Configuration
      2. 16.2.2 EDMA Controller Environment
      3. 16.2.3 EDMA Controller Integration
        1. 16.2.3.1 EDMA Requests to the EDMA Controller
      4. 16.2.4 EDMA Controller Functional Description
        1. 16.2.4.1  Block Diagram
          1. 16.2.4.1.1 Third-Party Channel Controller
          2. 16.2.4.1.2 Third-Party Transfer Controller
        2. 16.2.4.2  Types of EDMA controller Transfers
          1. 16.2.4.2.1 A-Synchronized Transfers
          2. 16.2.4.2.2 AB-Synchronized Transfers
        3. 16.2.4.3  Parameter RAM (PaRAM)
          1. 16.2.4.3.1 PaRAM
          2. 16.2.4.3.2 EDMA Channel PaRAM Set Entry Fields
            1. 16.2.4.3.2.1  Channel Options Parameter (OPT)
            2. 16.2.4.3.2.2  Channel Source Address (SRC)
            3. 16.2.4.3.2.3  Channel Destination Address (DST)
            4. 16.2.4.3.2.4  Count for 1st Dimension (ACNT)
            5. 16.2.4.3.2.5  Count for 2nd Dimension (BCNT)
            6. 16.2.4.3.2.6  Count for 3rd Dimension (CCNT)
            7. 16.2.4.3.2.7  BCNT Reload (BCNTRLD)
            8. 16.2.4.3.2.8  Source B Index (SBIDX)
            9. 16.2.4.3.2.9  Destination B Index (DBIDX)
            10. 16.2.4.3.2.10 Source C Index (SCIDX)
            11. 16.2.4.3.2.11 Destination C Index (DCIDX)
            12. 16.2.4.3.2.12 Link Address (LINK)
          3. 16.2.4.3.3 Null PaRAM Set
          4. 16.2.4.3.4 Dummy PaRAM Set
          5. 16.2.4.3.5 Dummy Versus Null Transfer Comparison
          6. 16.2.4.3.6 Parameter Set Updates
          7. 16.2.4.3.7 Linking Transfers
          8. 16.2.4.3.8 Constant Addressing Mode Transfers/Alignment Issues
          9. 16.2.4.3.9 Element Size
        4. 16.2.4.4  Initiating a DMA Transfer
          1. 16.2.4.4.1 DMA Channel
            1. 16.2.4.4.1.1 Event-Triggered Transfer Request
            2. 16.2.4.4.1.2 Manually-Triggered Transfer Request
            3. 16.2.4.4.1.3 Chain-Triggered Transfer Request
          2. 16.2.4.4.2 QDMA Channels
            1. 16.2.4.4.2.1 Auto-triggered and Link-Triggered Transfer Request
          3. 16.2.4.4.3 Comparison Between DMA and QDMA Channels
        5. 16.2.4.5  Completion of a DMA Transfer
          1. 16.2.4.5.1 Normal Completion
          2. 16.2.4.5.2 Early Completion
          3. 16.2.4.5.3 Dummy or Null Completion
        6. 16.2.4.6  Event, Channel, and PaRAM Mapping
          1. 16.2.4.6.1 DMA Channel to PaRAM Mapping
          2. 16.2.4.6.2 QDMA Channel to PaRAM Mapping
        7. 16.2.4.7  EDMA Channel Controller Regions
          1. 16.2.4.7.1 Region Overview
          2. 16.2.4.7.2 Channel Controller Regions
            1. 16.2.4.7.2.1 Resource Pool Division Across Two Regions
          3. 16.2.4.7.3 Region Interrupts
        8. 16.2.4.8  Chaining EDMA Channels
        9. 16.2.4.9  EDMA Interrupts
          1. 16.2.4.9.1 Transfer Completion Interrupts
            1. 16.2.4.9.1.1 Enabling Transfer Completion Interrupts
            2. 16.2.4.9.1.2 Clearing Transfer Completion Interrupts
          2. 16.2.4.9.2 EDMA Interrupt Servicing
          3. 16.2.4.9.3 Interrupt Servicing
          4. 16.2.4.9.4 2811
          5. 16.2.4.9.5 Interrupt Servicing
          6. 16.2.4.9.6 Interrupt Evaluation Operations
          7. 16.2.4.9.7 Error Interrupts
          8. 16.2.4.9.8 2815
        10. 16.2.4.10 Memory Protection
          1. 16.2.4.10.1 Active Memory Protection
          2. 16.2.4.10.2 Proxy Memory Protection
        11. 16.2.4.11 Event Queue(s)
          1. 16.2.4.11.1 DMA/QDMA Channel to Event Queue Mapping
          2. 16.2.4.11.2 Queue RAM Debug Visibility
          3. 16.2.4.11.3 Queue Resource Tracking
          4. 16.2.4.11.4 Performance Considerations
        12. 16.2.4.12 EDMA Transfer Controller (EDMA_TPTC)
          1. 16.2.4.12.1 Architecture Details
            1. 16.2.4.12.1.1 Command Fragmentation
            2. 16.2.4.12.1.2 TR Pipelining
            3. 16.2.4.12.1.3 Command Fragmentation (DBS = 64)
            4. 16.2.4.12.1.4 Performance Tuning
          2. 16.2.4.12.2 Memory Protection
          3. 16.2.4.12.3 Error Generation
          4. 16.2.4.12.4 Debug Features
            1. 16.2.4.12.4.1 Destination FIFO Register Pointer
          5. 16.2.4.12.5 EDMA_TPTC Configuration
        13. 16.2.4.13 Event Dataflow
        14. 16.2.4.14 EDMA controller Prioritization
          1. 16.2.4.14.1 Channel Priority
          2. 16.2.4.14.2 Trigger Source Priority
          3. 16.2.4.14.3 Dequeue Priority
        15. 16.2.4.15 EDMA Power, Reset and Clock Management
          1. 16.2.4.15.1 Clock and Power Management
          2. 16.2.4.15.2 Reset Considerations
        16. 16.2.4.16 Emulation Considerations
      5. 16.2.5 EDMA Transfer Examples
        1. 16.2.5.1 Block Move Example
        2. 16.2.5.2 Subframe Extraction Example
        3. 16.2.5.3 Data Sorting Example
        4. 16.2.5.4 Peripheral Servicing Example
          1. 16.2.5.4.1 Non-bursting Peripherals
          2. 16.2.5.4.2 Bursting Peripherals
          3. 16.2.5.4.3 Continuous Operation
            1. 16.2.5.4.3.1 Receive Channel
            2. 16.2.5.4.3.2 Transmit Channel
            3. 16.2.5.4.3.3 2854
          4. 16.2.5.4.4 Ping-Pong Buffering
            1. 16.2.5.4.4.1 Synchronization with the CPU
          5. 16.2.5.4.5 Transfer Chaining Examples
            1. 16.2.5.4.5.1 Servicing Input/Output FIFOs with a Single Event
            2. 16.2.5.4.5.2 Breaking Up Large Transfers with Intermediate Chaining
        5. 16.2.5.5 Setting Up an EDMA Transfer
          1. 16.2.5.5.1 2861
      6. 16.2.6 EDMA Debug Checklist and Programming Tips
        1. 16.2.6.1 EDMA Debug Checklist
        2. 16.2.6.2 EDMA Programming Tips
      7. 16.2.7 EDMA Register Manual
        1. 16.2.7.1 EDMA Instance Summary
        2. 16.2.7.2 EDMA Registers
          1. 16.2.7.2.1 EDMA Register Summary
          2. 16.2.7.2.2 EDMA Register Description
            1. 16.2.7.2.2.1 EDMA_TPCC Register Description
            2. 16.2.7.2.2.2 EDMA_TPTC0 and EDMA_TPTC1 Register Description
  19. 17Interrupt Controllers
    1. 17.1 Interrupt Controllers Overview
    2. 17.2 Interrupt Controllers Environment
    3. 17.3 Interrupt Controllers Integration
      1. 17.3.1 Interrupt Requests to MPU_INTC
      2. 17.3.2 Interrupt Requests to DSP1_INTC
      3. 17.3.3 Interrupt Requests to DSP2_INTC
      4. 17.3.4 Interrupt Requests to IPU1_Cx_INTC
      5. 17.3.5 Interrupt Requests to IPU2_Cx_INTC
      6. 17.3.6 Interrupt Requests to EVE1_INTC1
      7. 17.3.7 Interrupt Requests to EVE2_INTC1
      8. 17.3.8 Mapping of Device Interrupts to IRQ_CROSSBAR Inputs
    4. 17.4 Interrupt Controllers Functional Description
  20. 18Control Module
    1. 18.1 Control Module Overview
    2. 18.2 Control Module Environment
    3. 18.3 Control Module Integration
    4. 18.4 Control Module Functional Description
      1. 18.4.1 Control Module Clock Configuration
      2. 18.4.2 Control Module Resets
      3. 18.4.3 Control Module Power Management
        1. 18.4.3.1 Power Management Protocols
      4. 18.4.4 Hardware Requests
      5. 18.4.5 Control Module Initialization
      6. 18.4.6 Functional Description Of The Various Register Types In CTRL_MODULE_CORE Submodule
        1. 18.4.6.1  Pad Configuration
          1. 18.4.6.1.1 Pad Configuration Registers
            1. 18.4.6.1.1.1 Permanent PU/PD disabling (SR 2.0 only)
          2. 18.4.6.1.2 Pull Selection
          3. 18.4.6.1.3 Pad multiplexing
          4. 18.4.6.1.4 IOSETs
          5. 18.4.6.1.5 Virtual IO Timing Modes
          6. 18.4.6.1.6 Manual IO Timing Modes
          7. 18.4.6.1.7 Isolation Requirements
          8. 18.4.6.1.8 IO Delay Recalibration
        2. 18.4.6.2  Thermal Management Related Registers
          1. 18.4.6.2.1 Temperature Sensors Control Registers
          2. 18.4.6.2.2 Registers For The Thermal Alert Comparators
          3. 18.4.6.2.3 Thermal Shutdown Comparators
          4. 18.4.6.2.4 Temperature Timestamp Registers
          5. 18.4.6.2.5 Other Thermal Management Related Registers
          6. 18.4.6.2.6 Summary of the Thermal Management Related Registers
          7. 18.4.6.2.7 ADC Values Versus Temperature
        3. 18.4.6.3  PBIAS Cell And MMC1 I/O Cells Control Registers
        4. 18.4.6.4  IRQ_CROSSBAR Module Functional Description
        5. 18.4.6.5  DMA_CROSSBAR Module Functional Description
        6. 18.4.6.6  SDRAM Initiator Priority Registers
        7. 18.4.6.7  L3_MAIN Initiator Priority Registers
        8. 18.4.6.8  Memory Region Lock Registers
        9. 18.4.6.9  NMI Mapping To Respective Cores
        10. 18.4.6.10 Software Controls for the DDR2/DDR3 I/O Cells
        11. 18.4.6.11 Reference Voltage for the Device DDR2/DDR3 Receivers
        12. 18.4.6.12 AVS Class 0 Associated Registers
        13. 18.4.6.13 ABB Associated Registers
        14. 18.4.6.14 Registers For Other Miscellaneous Functions
          1. 18.4.6.14.1 System Boot Status Settings
          2. 18.4.6.14.2 Force MPU Write Nonposted Transactions
          3. 18.4.6.14.3 Firewall Error Status Registers
          4. 18.4.6.14.4 Settings Related To Different Peripheral Modules
      7. 18.4.7 Functional Description Of The Various Register Types In CTRL_MODULE_WKUP Submodule
        1. 18.4.7.1 Registers For Basic EMIF Configuration
    5. 18.5 Control Module Register Manual
    6. 18.6 IODELAYCONFIG Module Integration
    7. 18.7 IODELAYCONFIG Module Register Manual
  21. 19Mailbox
    1. 19.1 Mailbox Overview
    2. 19.2 Mailbox Integration
      1. 19.2.1 System MAILBOX Integration
      2. 19.2.2 IVA Mailbox Integration
      3. 19.2.3 EVE Mailbox Integration
    3. 19.3 Mailbox Functional Description
      1. 19.3.1 Mailbox Block Diagram
        1. 19.3.1.1 2944
      2. 19.3.2 Mailbox Software Reset
      3. 19.3.3 Mailbox Power Management
      4. 19.3.4 Mailbox Interrupt Requests
      5. 19.3.5 Mailbox Assignment
        1. 19.3.5.1 Description
      6. 19.3.6 Sending and Receiving Messages
        1. 19.3.6.1 Description
      7. 19.3.7 16-Bit Register Access
        1. 19.3.7.1 Description
      8. 19.3.8 Example of Communication
    4. 19.4 Mailbox Programming Guide
      1. 19.4.1 Mailbox Low-level Programming Models
        1. 19.4.1.1 Global Initialization
          1. 19.4.1.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
          2. 19.4.1.1.2 Mailbox Global Initialization
            1. 19.4.1.1.2.1 Main Sequence - Mailbox Global Initialization
        2. 19.4.1.2 Mailbox Operational Modes Configuration
          1. 19.4.1.2.1 Mailbox Processing modes
            1. 19.4.1.2.1.1 Main Sequence - Sending a Message (Polling Method)
            2. 19.4.1.2.1.2 Main Sequence - Sending a Message (Interrupt Method)
            3. 19.4.1.2.1.3 Main Sequence - Receiving a Message (Polling Method)
            4. 19.4.1.2.1.4 Main Sequence - Receiving a Message (Interrupt Method)
        3. 19.4.1.3 Mailbox Events Servicing
          1. 19.4.1.3.1 Events Servicing in Sending Mode
          2. 19.4.1.3.2 Events Servicing in Receiving Mode
    5. 19.5 Mailbox Register Manual
      1. 19.5.1 Mailbox Instance Summary
      2. 19.5.2 Mailbox Registers
        1. 19.5.2.1 Mailbox Register Summary
        2. 19.5.2.2 Mailbox Register Description
  22. 20Memory Management Units
    1. 20.1 MMU Overview
    2. 20.2 MMU Integration
    3. 20.3 MMU Functional Description
      1. 20.3.1 MMU Block Diagram
        1. 20.3.1.1 MMU Address Translation Process
        2. 20.3.1.2 Translation Tables
          1. 20.3.1.2.1 Translation Table Hierarchy
          2. 20.3.1.2.2 First-Level Translation Table
            1. 20.3.1.2.2.1 First-Level Descriptor Format
            2. 20.3.1.2.2.2 First-Level Page Descriptor Format
            3. 20.3.1.2.2.3 First-Level Section Descriptor Format
            4. 20.3.1.2.2.4 Section Translation Summary
            5. 20.3.1.2.2.5 Supersection Translation Summary
          3. 20.3.1.2.3 Two-Level Translation
            1. 20.3.1.2.3.1 Second-Level Descriptor Format
            2. 20.3.1.2.3.2 Small Page Translation Summary
            3. 20.3.1.2.3.3 Large Page Translation Summary
        3. 20.3.1.3 Translation Lookaside Buffer
          1. 20.3.1.3.1 TLB Entry Format
        4. 20.3.1.4 No Translation (Bypass) Regions
      2. 20.3.2 MMU Software Reset
      3. 20.3.3 MMU Power Management
      4. 20.3.4 MMU Interrupt Requests
      5. 20.3.5 MMU Error Handling
    4. 20.4 MMU Low-level Programming Models
      1. 20.4.1 Global Initialization
        1. 20.4.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
        2. 20.4.1.2 MMU Global Initialization
          1. 20.4.1.2.1 Main Sequence - MMU Global Initialization
          2. 20.4.1.2.2 Subsequence - Configure a TLB entry
        3. 20.4.1.3 Operational Modes Configuration
          1. 20.4.1.3.1 Main Sequence - Writing TLB Entries Statically
          2. 20.4.1.3.2 Main Sequence - Protecting TLB Entries
          3. 20.4.1.3.3 Main Sequence - Deleting TLB Entries
          4. 20.4.1.3.4 Main Sequence - Read TLB Entries
    5. 20.5 MMU Register Manual
      1. 20.5.1 MMU Instance Summary
      2. 20.5.2 MMU Registers
        1. 20.5.2.1 MMU Register Summary
        2. 20.5.2.2 MMU Register Description
  23. 21Spinlock
    1. 21.1 Spinlock Overview
    2. 21.2 Spinlock Integration
    3. 21.3 Spinlock Functional Description
      1. 21.3.1 Spinlock Software Reset
      2. 21.3.2 Spinlock Power Management
      3. 21.3.3 About Spinlocks
      4. 21.3.4 Spinlock Functional Operation
    4. 21.4 Spinlock Programming Guide
      1. 21.4.1 Spinlock Low-level Programming Models
        1. 21.4.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
        2. 21.4.1.2 Basic Spinlock Operations
          1. 21.4.1.2.1 Spinlocks Clearing After a System Bug Recovery
          2. 21.4.1.2.2 Take and Release Spinlock
    5. 21.5 Spinlock Register Manual
      1. 21.5.1 Spinlock Instance Summary
      2. 21.5.2 Spinlock Registers
        1. 21.5.2.1 Spinlock Register Summary
        2. 21.5.2.2 Spinlock Register Description
  24. 22Timers
    1. 22.1 Timers Overview
    2. 22.2 General-Purpose Timers
      1. 22.2.1 General-Purpose Timers Overview
        1. 22.2.1.1 GP Timer Features
      2. 22.2.2 GP Timer Environment
        1. 22.2.2.1 GP Timer External System Interface
      3. 22.2.3 GP Timer Integration
      4. 22.2.4 GP Timer Functional Description
        1. 22.2.4.1  GP Timer Block Diagram
        2. 22.2.4.2  TIMER1, TIMER2 and TIMER10 Power Management
          1. 22.2.4.2.1 Wake-Up Capability
        3. 22.2.4.3  Power Management of Other GP Timers
          1. 22.2.4.3.1 Wake-Up Capability
        4. 22.2.4.4  Software Reset
        5. 22.2.4.5  GP Timer Interrupts
        6. 22.2.4.6  Timer Mode Functionality
          1. 22.2.4.6.1 1-ms Tick Generation (Only TIMER1, TIMER2 and TIMER10)
        7. 22.2.4.7  Capture Mode Functionality
        8. 22.2.4.8  Compare Mode Functionality
        9. 22.2.4.9  Prescaler Functionality
        10. 22.2.4.10 Pulse-Width Modulation
        11. 22.2.4.11 Timer Counting Rate
        12. 22.2.4.12 Timer Under Emulation
        13. 22.2.4.13 Accessing GP Timer Registers
          1. 22.2.4.13.1 Writing to Timer Registers
            1. 22.2.4.13.1.1 Write Posting Synchronization Mode
            2. 22.2.4.13.1.2 Write Nonposting Synchronization Mode
          2. 22.2.4.13.2 Reading From Timer Counter Registers
            1. 22.2.4.13.2.1 Read Posted
            2. 22.2.4.13.2.2 Read Non-Posted
        14. 22.2.4.14 Posted Mode Selection
      5. 22.2.5 GP Timer Low-Level Programming Models
        1. 22.2.5.1 Global Initialization
          1. 22.2.5.1.1 Global Initialization of Surrounding Modules
          2. 22.2.5.1.2 GP Timer Module Global Initialization
            1. 22.2.5.1.2.1 Main Sequence – GP Timer Module Global Initialization
        2. 22.2.5.2 Operational Mode Configuration
          1. 22.2.5.2.1 GP Timer Mode
            1. 22.2.5.2.1.1 Main Sequence – GP Timer Mode Configuration
          2. 22.2.5.2.2 GP Timer Compare Mode
            1. 22.2.5.2.2.1 Main Sequence – GP Timer Compare Mode Configuration
          3. 22.2.5.2.3 GP Timer Capture Mode
            1. 22.2.5.2.3.1 Main Sequence – GP Timer Capture Mode Configuration
            2. 22.2.5.2.3.2 Subsequence – Initialize Capture Mode
            3. 22.2.5.2.3.3 Subsequence – Detect Event
          4. 22.2.5.2.4 GP Timer PWM Mode
            1. 22.2.5.2.4.1 Main Sequence – GP Timer PWM Mode Configuration
      6. 22.2.6 GP Timer Register Manual
        1. 22.2.6.1 GP Timer Instance Summary
        2. 22.2.6.2 GP Timer Registers
          1. 22.2.6.2.1 GP Timer Register Summary
          2. 22.2.6.2.2 GP Timer Register Description
          3. 22.2.6.2.3 TIMER1, TIMER2, and TIMER10 Register Description
    3. 22.3 32-kHz Synchronized Timer (COUNTER_32K)
      1. 22.3.1 32-kHz Synchronized Timer Overview
        1. 22.3.1.1 32-kHz Synchronized Timer Features
      2. 22.3.2 32-kHz Synchronized Timer Integration
      3. 22.3.3 32-kHz Synchronized Timer Functional Description
        1. 22.3.3.1 Reading the 32-kHz Synchronized Timer
      4. 22.3.4 COUNTER_32K Timer Register Manual
        1. 22.3.4.1 COUNTER_32K Timer Register Mapping Summary
        2. 22.3.4.2 COUNTER_32K Timer Register Description
    4. 22.4 Watchdog Timer
      1. 22.4.1 Watchdog Timer Overview
        1. 22.4.1.1 Watchdog Timer Features
      2. 22.4.2 Watchdog Timer Integration
      3. 22.4.3 Watchdog Timer Functional Description
        1. 22.4.3.1  Power Management
          1. 22.4.3.1.1 Wake-Up Capability
        2. 22.4.3.2  Interrupts
        3. 22.4.3.3  General Watchdog Timer Operation
        4. 22.4.3.4  Reset Context
        5. 22.4.3.5  Overflow/Reset Generation
        6. 22.4.3.6  Prescaler Value/Timer Reset Frequency
        7. 22.4.3.7  Triggering a Timer Reload
        8. 22.4.3.8  Start/Stop Sequence for Watchdog Timer (Using the WSPR Register)
        9. 22.4.3.9  Modifying Timer Count/Load Values and Prescaler Setting
        10. 22.4.3.10 Watchdog Counter Register Access Restriction (WCRR)
        11. 22.4.3.11 Watchdog Timer Interrupt Generation
        12. 22.4.3.12 Watchdog Timer Under Emulation
        13. 22.4.3.13 Accessing Watchdog Timer Registers
      4. 22.4.4 Watchdog Timer Low-Level Programming Model
        1. 22.4.4.1 Global Initialization
          1. 22.4.4.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
          2. 22.4.4.1.2 Watchdog Timer Module Global Initialization
            1. 22.4.4.1.2.1 Main Sequence – Watchdog Timer Module Global Initialization
        2. 22.4.4.2 Operational Mode Configuration
          1. 22.4.4.2.1 Watchdog Timer Basic Configuration
            1. 22.4.4.2.1.1 Main Sequence – Watchdog Timer Basic Configuration
            2. 22.4.4.2.1.2 Subsequence – Disable the Watchdog Timer
            3. 22.4.4.2.1.3 Subsequence – Enable the Watchdog Timer
      5. 22.4.5 Watchdog Timer Register Manual
        1. 22.4.5.1 Watchdog Timer Instance Summary
        2. 22.4.5.2 Watchdog Timer Registers
          1. 22.4.5.2.1 Watchdog Timer Register Summary
          2. 22.4.5.2.2 3131
          3. 22.4.5.2.3 Watchdog Timer Register Description
  25. 23Real-Time Clock (RTC)
    1. 23.1 RTC Overview
      1. 23.1.1 RTC Features
    2. 23.2 RTC Environment
      1. 23.2.1 RTC External Interface
    3. 23.3 RTC Integration
    4. 23.4 RTC Functional Description
      1. 23.4.1 Clock Source
      2. 23.4.2 Interrupt Support
        1. 23.4.2.1 CPU Interrupts
        2. 23.4.2.2 Interrupt Description
          1. 23.4.2.2.1 Timer Interrupt (timer_intr)
          2. 23.4.2.2.2 Alarm Interrupt (alarm_intr)
      3. 23.4.3 RTC Programming/Usage Guide
        1. 23.4.3.1 Time/Calendar Data Format
        2. 23.4.3.2 Register Access
        3. 23.4.3.3 Register Spurious Write Protection
        4. 23.4.3.4 Reading the Timer/Calendar (TC) Registers
          1. 23.4.3.4.1 Rounding Seconds
        5. 23.4.3.5 Modifying the TC Registers
          1. 23.4.3.5.1 General Registers
        6. 23.4.3.6 Crystal Compensation
      4. 23.4.4 Scratch Registers
      5. 23.4.5 Debouncing
      6. 23.4.6 Power Management
        1. 23.4.6.1 Device-Level Power Management
        2. 23.4.6.2 Subsystem-Level Power Management — PMIC Mode
    5. 23.5 RTC Low-Level Programming Guide
      1. 23.5.1 Global Initialization
        1. 23.5.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
        2. 23.5.1.2 RTC Module Global Initialization
          1. 23.5.1.2.1 Main Sequence – RTC Module Global Initialization
    6. 23.6 RTC Register Manual
      1. 23.6.1 RTC Instance Summary
      2. 23.6.2 RTC_SS Registers
        1. 23.6.2.1 RTC_SS Register Summary
        2. 23.6.2.2 RTC_SS Register Description
  26. 24Serial Communication Interfaces
    1. 24.1  Multimaster High-Speed I2C Controller
      1. 24.1.1 HS I2C Overview
      2. 24.1.2 HS I2C Environment
        1. 24.1.2.1 HS I2C Typical Application
          1. 24.1.2.1.1 HS I2C Pins for Typical Connections in I2C Mode
          2. 24.1.2.1.2 HS I2C Interface Typical Connections
        2. 24.1.2.2 HS I2C Typical Connection Protocol and Data Format
          1. 24.1.2.2.1  HS I2C Serial Data Format
          2. 24.1.2.2.2  HS I2C Data Validity
          3. 24.1.2.2.3  HS I2C Start and Stop Conditions
          4. 24.1.2.2.4  HS I2C Addressing
            1. 24.1.2.2.4.1 Data Transfer Formats in F/S Mode
            2. 24.1.2.2.4.2 Data Transfer Format in HS Mode
          5. 24.1.2.2.5  HS I2C Master Transmitter
          6. 24.1.2.2.6  HS I2C Master Receiver
          7. 24.1.2.2.7  HS I2C Slave Transmitter
          8. 24.1.2.2.8  HS I2C Slave Receiver
          9. 24.1.2.2.9  HS I2C Bus Arbitration
          10. 24.1.2.2.10 HS I2C Clock Generation and Synchronization
      3. 24.1.3 HS I2C Integration
      4. 24.1.4 HS I2C Functional Description
        1. 24.1.4.1  HS I2C Block Diagram
        2. 24.1.4.2  HS I2C Clocks
          1. 24.1.4.2.1 HS I2C Clocking
          2. 24.1.4.2.2 HS I2C Automatic Blocking of the I2C Clock Feature
        3. 24.1.4.3  HS I2C Software Reset
        4. 24.1.4.4  HS I2C Power Management
        5. 24.1.4.5  HS I2C Interrupt Requests
        6. 24.1.4.6  HS I2C DMA Requests
        7. 24.1.4.7  HS I2C Programmable Multislave Channel Feature
        8. 24.1.4.8  HS I2C FIFO Management
          1. 24.1.4.8.1 HS I2C FIFO Interrupt Mode
          2. 24.1.4.8.2 HS I2C FIFO Polling Mode
          3. 24.1.4.8.3 HS I2C FIFO DMA Mode
          4. 24.1.4.8.4 HS I2C Draining Feature
        9. 24.1.4.9  HS I2C Noise Filter
        10. 24.1.4.10 HS I2C System Test Mode
      5. 24.1.5 HS I2C Programming Guide
        1. 24.1.5.1 HS I2C Low-Level Programming Models
          1. 24.1.5.1.1 HS I2C Programming Model
            1. 24.1.5.1.1.1 Main Program
              1. 24.1.5.1.1.1.1 Configure the Module Before Enabling the I2C Controller
              2. 24.1.5.1.1.1.2 Initialize the I2C Controller
              3. 24.1.5.1.1.1.3 Configure Slave Address and the Data Control Register
              4. 24.1.5.1.1.1.4 Initiate a Transfer
              5. 24.1.5.1.1.1.5 Receive Data
              6. 24.1.5.1.1.1.6 Transmit Data
            2. 24.1.5.1.1.2 Interrupt Subroutine Sequence
            3. 24.1.5.1.1.3 Programming Flow-Diagrams
      6. 24.1.6 HS I2C Register Manual
        1. 24.1.6.1 HS I2C Instance Summary
        2. 24.1.6.2 HS I2C Registers
          1. 24.1.6.2.1 HS I2C Register Summary
          2. 24.1.6.2.2 HS I2C Register Description
    2. 24.2  HDQ/1-Wire
      1. 24.2.1 HDQ1W Overview
      2. 24.2.2 HDQ1W Environment
        1. 24.2.2.1 HDQ1W Functional Modes
        2. 24.2.2.2 HDQ and 1-Wire (SDQ) Protocols
          1. 24.2.2.2.1 HDQ Protocol Initialization (Default)
          2. 24.2.2.2.2 1-Wire (SDQ) Protocol Initialization
          3. 24.2.2.2.3 Communication Sequence (HDQ and 1-Wire Protocols)
      3. 24.2.3 HDQ1W Integration
      4. 24.2.4 HDQ1W Functional Description
        1. 24.2.4.1 HDQ1W Block Diagram
        2. 24.2.4.2 HDQ1W Clocking Configuration
          1. 24.2.4.2.1 HDQ1W Clocks
        3. 24.2.4.3 HDQ1W Hardware and Software Reset
        4. 24.2.4.4 HDQ1W Power Management
          1. 24.2.4.4.1 Auto-Idle Mode
          2. 24.2.4.4.2 Power-Down Mode
          3. 24.2.4.4.3 3242
        5. 24.2.4.5 HDQ Interrupt Requests
        6. 24.2.4.6 HDQ Mode (Default)
          1. 24.2.4.6.1 HDQ Mode Features
          2. 24.2.4.6.2 Description
          3. 24.2.4.6.3 Single-Bit Mode
          4. 24.2.4.6.4 Interrupt Conditions
        7. 24.2.4.7 1-Wire Mode
          1. 24.2.4.7.1 1-Wire Mode Features
          2. 24.2.4.7.2 Description
          3. 24.2.4.7.3 1-Wire Single-Bit Mode Operation
          4. 24.2.4.7.4 Interrupt Conditions
          5. 24.2.4.7.5 Status Flags
        8. 24.2.4.8 BITFSM Delay
      5. 24.2.5 HDQ1W Low-Level Programming Model
        1. 24.2.5.1 Global Initialization
          1. 24.2.5.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
          2. 24.2.5.1.2 HDQ1W Module Global Initialization
        2. 24.2.5.2 HDQ Operational Modes Configuration
          1. 24.2.5.2.1 Main Sequence - HDQ Write Operation Mode
          2. 24.2.5.2.2 Main Sequence - HDQ Read Operation Mode
            1. 24.2.5.2.2.1 Sub-sequence - Initialize HDQ Slave
        3. 24.2.5.3 1-Wire Operational Modes Configuration
          1. 24.2.5.3.1 Main Sequence - 1-Wire Write Operation Mode
          2. 24.2.5.3.2 Main Sequence - 1-Wire Read Operation Mode
          3. 24.2.5.3.3 Sub-sequence - Initialize 1-Wire Slave
      6. 24.2.6 HDQ1W Register Manual
        1. 24.2.6.1 HDQ1W Instance Summary
        2. 24.2.6.2 HDQ1W Registers
          1. 24.2.6.2.1 HDQ1W Register Summary
          2. 24.2.6.2.2 HDQ1W Register Description
    3. 24.3  UART/IrDA/CIR
      1. 24.3.1 UART/IrDA/CIR Overview
        1. 24.3.1.1 UART Features
        2. 24.3.1.2 IrDA Features
        3. 24.3.1.3 CIR Features
      2. 24.3.2 UART/IrDA/CIR Environment
        1. 24.3.2.1 UART Interface
          1. 24.3.2.1.1 System Using UART Communication With Hardware Handshake
          2. 24.3.2.1.2 UART Interface Description
          3. 24.3.2.1.3 UART Protocol and Data Format
        2. 24.3.2.2 IrDA Functional Interfaces
          1. 24.3.2.2.1 System Using IrDA Communication Protocol
          2. 24.3.2.2.2 IrDA Interface Description
          3. 24.3.2.2.3 IrDA Protocol and Data Format
            1. 24.3.2.2.3.1 SIR Mode
              1. 24.3.2.2.3.1.1 Frame Format
              2. 24.3.2.2.3.1.2 Asynchronous Transparency
              3. 24.3.2.2.3.1.3 Abort Sequence
              4. 24.3.2.2.3.1.4 Pulse Shaping
              5. 24.3.2.2.3.1.5 Encoder
              6. 24.3.2.2.3.1.6 Decoder
              7. 24.3.2.2.3.1.7 IR Address Checking
            2. 24.3.2.2.3.2 SIR Free-Format Mode
            3. 24.3.2.2.3.3 MIR Mode
              1. 24.3.2.2.3.3.1 MIR Encoder/Decoder
              2. 24.3.2.2.3.3.2 SIP Generation
            4. 24.3.2.2.3.4 FIR Mode
        3. 24.3.2.3 CIR Functional Interfaces
          1. 24.3.2.3.1 System Using CIR Communication Protocol With Remote Control
          2. 24.3.2.3.2 CIR Interface Description
          3. 24.3.2.3.3 CIR Protocol and Data Format
            1. 24.3.2.3.3.1 Carrier Modulation
            2. 24.3.2.3.3.2 Pulse Duty Cycle
            3. 24.3.2.3.3.3 Consumer IR Encoding/Decoding
      3. 24.3.3 UART/IrDA/CIR Integration
        1. 24.3.3.1 3308
      4. 24.3.4 UART/IrDA/CIR Functional Description
        1. 24.3.4.1 Block Diagram
        2. 24.3.4.2 Clock Configuration
        3. 24.3.4.3 Software Reset
        4. 24.3.4.4 Power Management
          1. 24.3.4.4.1 UART Mode Power Management
            1. 24.3.4.4.1.1 Module Power Saving
            2. 24.3.4.4.1.2 System Power Saving
          2. 24.3.4.4.2 IrDA Mode Power Management (UART3 Only)
            1. 24.3.4.4.2.1 Module Power Saving
            2. 24.3.4.4.2.2 System Power Saving
          3. 24.3.4.4.3 CIR Mode Power Management (UART3 Only)
            1. 24.3.4.4.3.1 Module Power Saving
            2. 24.3.4.4.3.2 System Power Saving
          4. 24.3.4.4.4 Local Power Management
        5. 24.3.4.5 Interrupt Requests
          1. 24.3.4.5.1 UART Mode Interrupt Management
            1. 24.3.4.5.1.1 UART Interrupts
            2. 24.3.4.5.1.2 Wake-Up Interrupt
          2. 24.3.4.5.2 IrDA Mode Interrupt Management
            1. 24.3.4.5.2.1 IrDA Interrupts
            2. 24.3.4.5.2.2 Wake-Up Interrupts
          3. 24.3.4.5.3 CIR Mode Interrupt Management
            1. 24.3.4.5.3.1 CIR Interrupts
            2. 24.3.4.5.3.2 Wake-Up Interrupts
        6. 24.3.4.6 FIFO Management
          1. 24.3.4.6.1 FIFO Trigger
            1. 24.3.4.6.1.1 Transmit FIFO Trigger
            2. 24.3.4.6.1.2 Receive FIFO Trigger
          2. 24.3.4.6.2 FIFO Interrupt Mode
          3. 24.3.4.6.3 FIFO Polled Mode Operation
          4. 24.3.4.6.4 FIFO DMA Mode Operation
            1. 24.3.4.6.4.1 DMA sequence to disable TX DMA
            2. 24.3.4.6.4.2 DMA Transfers (DMA Mode 1, 2, or 3)
            3. 24.3.4.6.4.3 DMA Transmission
            4. 24.3.4.6.4.4 DMA Reception
        7. 24.3.4.7 Mode Selection
          1. 24.3.4.7.1 Register Access Modes
            1. 24.3.4.7.1.1 Operational Mode and Configuration Modes
            2. 24.3.4.7.1.2 Register Access Submode
            3. 24.3.4.7.1.3 Registers Available for the Register Access Modes
          2. 24.3.4.7.2 UART/IrDA (SIR, MIR, FIR)/CIR Mode Selection
            1. 24.3.4.7.2.1 Registers Available for the UART Function
            2. 24.3.4.7.2.2 Registers Available for the IrDA Function (UART3 Only)
            3. 24.3.4.7.2.3 Registers Available for the CIR Function (UART3 Only)
        8. 24.3.4.8 Protocol Formatting
          1. 24.3.4.8.1 UART Mode
            1. 24.3.4.8.1.1 UART Clock Generation: Baud Rate Generation
            2. 24.3.4.8.1.2 Choosing the Appropriate Divisor Value
            3. 24.3.4.8.1.3 UART Data Formatting
              1. 24.3.4.8.1.3.1 Frame Formatting
              2. 24.3.4.8.1.3.2 Hardware Flow Control
              3. 24.3.4.8.1.3.3 Software Flow Control
                1. 24.3.4.8.1.3.3.1 Receive (RX)
                2. 24.3.4.8.1.3.3.2 Transmit (TX)
              4. 24.3.4.8.1.3.4 Autobauding Modes
              5. 24.3.4.8.1.3.5 Error Detection
              6. 24.3.4.8.1.3.6 Overrun During Receive
              7. 24.3.4.8.1.3.7 Time-Out and Break Conditions
                1. 24.3.4.8.1.3.7.1 Time-Out Counter
                2. 24.3.4.8.1.3.7.2 Break Condition
          2. 24.3.4.8.2 IrDA Mode (UART3 Only)
            1. 24.3.4.8.2.1 IrDA Clock Generation: Baud Generator
            2. 24.3.4.8.2.2 Choosing the Appropriate Divisor Value
            3. 24.3.4.8.2.3 IrDA Data Formatting
              1. 24.3.4.8.2.3.1 IR RX Polarity Control
              2. 24.3.4.8.2.3.2 IrDA Reception Control
              3. 24.3.4.8.2.3.3 IR Address Checking
              4. 24.3.4.8.2.3.4 Frame Closing
              5. 24.3.4.8.2.3.5 Store and Controlled Transmission
              6. 24.3.4.8.2.3.6 Error Detection
              7. 24.3.4.8.2.3.7 Underrun During Transmission
              8. 24.3.4.8.2.3.8 Overrun During Receive
              9. 24.3.4.8.2.3.9 Status FIFO
            4. 24.3.4.8.2.4 SIR Mode Data Formatting
              1. 24.3.4.8.2.4.1 Abort Sequence
              2. 24.3.4.8.2.4.2 Pulse Shaping
              3. 24.3.4.8.2.4.3 SIR Free Format Programming
            5. 24.3.4.8.2.5 MIR and FIR Mode Data Formatting
          3. 24.3.4.8.3 CIR Mode (UART3 Only)
            1. 24.3.4.8.3.1 CIR Mode Clock Generation
            2. 24.3.4.8.3.2 CIR Data Formatting
              1. 24.3.4.8.3.2.1 IR RX Polarity Control
              2. 24.3.4.8.3.2.2 CIR Transmission
      5. 24.3.5 UART/IrDA/CIR Basic Programming Model
        1. 24.3.5.1 Global Initialization
          1. 24.3.5.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
          2. 24.3.5.1.2 UART/IrDA/CIR Module Global Initialization
        2. 24.3.5.2 Mode selection
        3. 24.3.5.3 Submode selection
        4. 24.3.5.4 Load FIFO trigger and DMA mode settings
          1. 24.3.5.4.1 DMA mode Settings
          2. 24.3.5.4.2 FIFO Trigger Settings
        5. 24.3.5.5 Protocol, Baud rate and interrupt settings
          1. 24.3.5.5.1 Baud rate settings
          2. 24.3.5.5.2 Interrupt settings
          3. 24.3.5.5.3 Protocol settings
          4. 24.3.5.5.4 UART/IrDA(SIR/MIR/FIR)/CIR
        6. 24.3.5.6 Hardware and Software Flow Control Configuration
          1. 24.3.5.6.1 Hardware Flow Control Configuration
          2. 24.3.5.6.2 Software Flow Control Configuration
        7. 24.3.5.7 IrDA Programming Model (UART3 Only)
          1. 24.3.5.7.1 SIR mode
            1. 24.3.5.7.1.1 Receive
            2. 24.3.5.7.1.2 Transmit
          2. 24.3.5.7.2 MIR mode
            1. 24.3.5.7.2.1 Receive
            2. 24.3.5.7.2.2 Transmit
          3. 24.3.5.7.3 FIR mode
            1. 24.3.5.7.3.1 Receive
            2. 24.3.5.7.3.2 Transmit
      6. 24.3.6 UART/IrDA/CIR Register Manual
        1. 24.3.6.1 UART/IrDA/CIR Instance Summary
        2. 24.3.6.2 UART/IrDA/CIR Registers
          1. 24.3.6.2.1 UART/IrDA/CIR Register Summary
          2. 24.3.6.2.2 UART/IrDA/CIR Register Description
    4. 24.4  Multichannel Serial Peripheral Interface
      1. 24.4.1 McSPI Overview
      2. 24.4.2 McSPI Environment
        1. 24.4.2.1 Basic McSPI Pins for Master Mode
        2. 24.4.2.2 Basic McSPI Pins for Slave Mode
        3. 24.4.2.3 Multichannel SPI Protocol and Data Format
          1. 24.4.2.3.1 Transfer Format
        4. 24.4.2.4 SPI in Master Mode
        5. 24.4.2.5 SPI in Slave Mode
      3. 24.4.3 McSPI Integration
      4. 24.4.4 McSPI Functional Description
        1. 24.4.4.1 McSPI Block Diagram
        2. 24.4.4.2 Reset
        3. 24.4.4.3 Master Mode
          1. 24.4.4.3.1 Master Mode Features
          2. 24.4.4.3.2 Master Transmit-and-Receive Mode (Full Duplex)
          3. 24.4.4.3.3 Master Transmit-Only Mode (Half Duplex)
          4. 24.4.4.3.4 Master Receive-Only Mode (Half Duplex)
          5. 24.4.4.3.5 Single-Channel Master Mode
            1. 24.4.4.3.5.1 Programming Tips When Switching to Another Channel
            2. 24.4.4.3.5.2 Force SPIEN[x] Mode
            3. 24.4.4.3.5.3 Turbo Mode
          6. 24.4.4.3.6 Start-Bit Mode
          7. 24.4.4.3.7 Chip-Select Timing Control
          8. 24.4.4.3.8 Programmable SPI Clock
            1. 24.4.4.3.8.1 Clock Ratio Granularity
        4. 24.4.4.4 Slave Mode
          1. 24.4.4.4.1 Dedicated Resources
          2. 24.4.4.4.2 Slave Transmit-and-Receive Mode
          3. 24.4.4.4.3 Slave Transmit-Only Mode
          4. 24.4.4.4.4 Slave Receive-Only Mode
        5. 24.4.4.5 3-Pin or 4-Pin Mode
        6. 24.4.4.6 FIFO Buffer Management
          1. 24.4.4.6.1 Buffer Almost Full
          2. 24.4.4.6.2 Buffer Almost Empty
          3. 24.4.4.6.3 End of Transfer Management
        7. 24.4.4.7 Interrupts
          1. 24.4.4.7.1 Interrupt Events in Master Mode
            1. 24.4.4.7.1.1 TXx_EMPTY
            2. 24.4.4.7.1.2 TXx_UNDERFLOW
            3. 24.4.4.7.1.3 RXx_ FULL
            4. 24.4.4.7.1.4 End Of Word Count
          2. 24.4.4.7.2 Interrupt Events in Slave Mode
            1. 24.4.4.7.2.1 TXx_EMPTY
            2. 24.4.4.7.2.2 TXx_UNDERFLOW
            3. 24.4.4.7.2.3 RXx_FULL
            4. 24.4.4.7.2.4 RX0_OVERFLOW
            5. 24.4.4.7.2.5 End Of Word Count
          3. 24.4.4.7.3 Interrupt-Driven Operation
          4. 24.4.4.7.4 Polling
        8. 24.4.4.8 DMA Requests
        9. 24.4.4.9 Power Saving Management
          1. 24.4.4.9.1 Normal Mode
          2. 24.4.4.9.2 Idle Mode
            1. 24.4.4.9.2.1 Wake-Up Event in Smart-Idle Mode
            2. 24.4.4.9.2.2 Transitions From Smart-Idle Mode to Normal Mode
            3. 24.4.4.9.2.3 Force-Idle Mode
      5. 24.4.5 McSPI Programming Guide
        1. 24.4.5.1 Global Initialization
          1. 24.4.5.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
          2. 24.4.5.1.2 McSPI Global Initialization
            1. 24.4.5.1.2.1 Main Sequence – McSPI Global Initialization
        2. 24.4.5.2 Operational Mode Configuration
          1. 24.4.5.2.1 McSPI Operational Modes
            1. 24.4.5.2.1.1 Common Transfer Sequence
            2. 24.4.5.2.1.2 End of Transfer Sequences
            3. 24.4.5.2.1.3 Transmit-and-Receive (Master and Slave)
            4. 24.4.5.2.1.4 Transmit-Only (Master and Slave)
              1. 24.4.5.2.1.4.1 Based on Interrupt Requests
              2. 24.4.5.2.1.4.2 Based on DMA Write Requests
            5. 24.4.5.2.1.5 Master Normal Receive-Only
              1. 24.4.5.2.1.5.1 Based on Interrupt Requests
              2. 24.4.5.2.1.5.2 Based on DMA Read Requests
            6. 24.4.5.2.1.6 Master Turbo Receive-Only
              1. 24.4.5.2.1.6.1 Based on Interrupt Requests
              2. 24.4.5.2.1.6.2 Based on DMA Read Requests
            7. 24.4.5.2.1.7 Slave Receive-Only
            8. 24.4.5.2.1.8 Transfer Procedures With FIFO
              1. 24.4.5.2.1.8.1 Common Transfer Sequence in FIFO Mode
              2. 24.4.5.2.1.8.2 End of Transfer Sequences in FIFO Mode
              3. 24.4.5.2.1.8.3 Transmit-and-Receive With Word Count
              4. 24.4.5.2.1.8.4 Transmit-and-Receive Without Word Count
              5. 24.4.5.2.1.8.5 Transmit-Only
              6. 24.4.5.2.1.8.6 Receive-Only With Word Count
              7. 24.4.5.2.1.8.7 Receive-Only Without Word Count
        3. 24.4.5.3 Common Transfer Procedures Without FIFO – Polling Method
          1. 24.4.5.3.1 Receive-Only Procedure – Polling Method
          2. 24.4.5.3.2 Receive-Only Procedure – Interrupt Method
          3. 24.4.5.3.3 Transmit-Only Procedure – Polling Method
          4. 24.4.5.3.4 Transmit-and-Receive Procedure – Polling Method
      6. 24.4.6 McSPI Register Manual
        1. 24.4.6.1 McSPI Instance Summary
        2. 24.4.6.2 McSPI Registers
          1. 24.4.6.2.1 McSPI Register Summary
          2. 24.4.6.2.2 McSPI Register Description
    5. 24.5  Quad Serial Peripheral Interface
      1. 24.5.1 Quad Serial Peripheral Interface Overview
      2. 24.5.2 QSPI Environment
      3. 24.5.3 QSPI Integration
      4. 24.5.4 QSPI Functional Description
        1. 24.5.4.1 QSPI Block Diagram
          1. 24.5.4.1.1 SFI Register Control
          2. 24.5.4.1.2 SFI Translator
          3. 24.5.4.1.3 SPI Control Interface
          4. 24.5.4.1.4 SPI Clock Generator
          5. 24.5.4.1.5 SPI Control State-Machine
          6. 24.5.4.1.6 SPI Data Shifter
        2. 24.5.4.2 QSPI Clock Configuration
        3. 24.5.4.3 QSPI Interrupt Requests
        4. 24.5.4.4 QSPI Memory Regions
      5. 24.5.5 QSPI Register Manual
        1. 24.5.5.1 QSPI Instance Summary
        2. 24.5.5.2 QSPI registers
          1. 24.5.5.2.1 QSPI Register Summary
          2. 24.5.5.2.2 QSPI Register Description
    6. 24.6  Multichannel Audio Serial Port
      1. 24.6.1 McASP Overview
      2. 24.6.2 McASP Environment
        1. 24.6.2.1 McASP Signals
        2. 24.6.2.2 Protocols and Data Formats
          1. 24.6.2.2.1 Protocols Supported
          2. 24.6.2.2.2 Definition of Terms
          3. 24.6.2.2.3 TDM Format
          4. 24.6.2.2.4 I2S Format
          5. 24.6.2.2.5 S/PDIF Coding Format
            1. 24.6.2.2.5.1 Biphase-Mark Code
            2. 24.6.2.2.5.2 S/PDIF Subframe Format
            3. 24.6.2.2.5.3 Frame Format
      3. 24.6.3 McASP Integration
      4. 24.6.4 McASP Functional Description
        1. 24.6.4.1  McASP Block Diagram
        2. 24.6.4.2  McASP Clock and Frame-Sync Configurations
          1. 24.6.4.2.1 McASP Transmit Clock
          2. 24.6.4.2.2 McASP Receive Clock
          3. 24.6.4.2.3 Frame-Sync Generator
          4. 24.6.4.2.4 Synchronous and Asynchronous Transmit and Receive Operations
        3. 24.6.4.3  Serializers
        4. 24.6.4.4  Format Units
          1. 24.6.4.4.1 Transmit Format Unit
            1. 24.6.4.4.1.1 TDM Mode Transmission Data Alignment Settings
            2. 24.6.4.4.1.2 DIT Mode Transmission Data Alignment Settings
          2. 24.6.4.4.2 Receive Format Unit
            1. 24.6.4.4.2.1 TDM Mode Reception Data Alignment Settings
        5. 24.6.4.5  State-Machines
        6. 24.6.4.6  TDM Sequencers
        7. 24.6.4.7  McASP Software Reset
        8. 24.6.4.8  McASP Power Management
        9. 24.6.4.9  Transfer Modes
          1. 24.6.4.9.1 Burst Transfer Mode
          2. 24.6.4.9.2 Time-Division Multiplexed (TDM) Transfer Mode
            1. 24.6.4.9.2.1 TDM Time Slots Generation and Processing
            2. 24.6.4.9.2.2 Special 384-Slot TDM Mode for Connection to External DIR
          3. 24.6.4.9.3 DIT Transfer Mode
            1. 24.6.4.9.3.1 Transmit DIT Encoding
            2. 24.6.4.9.3.2 Transmit DIT Clock and Frame-Sync Generation
            3. 24.6.4.9.3.3 DIT Channel Status and User Data Register Files
        10. 24.6.4.10 Data Transmission and Reception
          1. 24.6.4.10.1 Data Ready Status and Event/Interrupt Generation
            1. 24.6.4.10.1.1 Transmit Data Ready
            2. 24.6.4.10.1.2 Receive Data Ready
            3. 24.6.4.10.1.3 Transfers Through the Data Port (DATA)
            4. 24.6.4.10.1.4 Transfers Through the Configuration Bus (CFG)
            5. 24.6.4.10.1.5 Using a Device CPU for McASP Servicing
            6. 24.6.4.10.1.6 Using the DMA for McASP Servicing
        11. 24.6.4.11 McASP Audio FIFO (AFIFO)
          1. 24.6.4.11.1 AFIFO Data Transmission
            1. 24.6.4.11.1.1 Transmit DMA Event Pacer
          2. 24.6.4.11.2 AFIFO Data Reception
            1. 24.6.4.11.2.1 Receive DMA Event Pacer
          3. 24.6.4.11.3 Arbitration Between Transmit and Receive DMA Requests
        12. 24.6.4.12 McASP Events and Interrupt Requests
          1. 24.6.4.12.1 Transmit Data Ready Event and Interrupt
          2. 24.6.4.12.2 Receive Data Ready Event and Interrupt
          3. 24.6.4.12.3 Error Interrupt
          4. 24.6.4.12.4 Multiple Interrupts
        13. 24.6.4.13 DMA Requests
        14. 24.6.4.14 Loopback Modes
          1. 24.6.4.14.1 Loopback Mode Configurations
        15. 24.6.4.15 Error Reporting
          1. 24.6.4.15.1 Buffer Underrun Error -Transmitter
          2. 24.6.4.15.2 Buffer Overrun Error-Receiver
          3. 24.6.4.15.3 DATA Port Error - Transmitter
          4. 24.6.4.15.4 DATA Port Error - Receiver
          5. 24.6.4.15.5 Unexpected Frame Sync Error
          6. 24.6.4.15.6 Clock Failure Detection
            1. 24.6.4.15.6.1 Clock Failure Check Startup
            2. 24.6.4.15.6.2 Transmit Clock Failure Check and Recovery
            3. 24.6.4.15.6.3 Receive Clock Failure Check and Recovery
      5. 24.6.5 McASP Low-Level Programming Model
        1. 24.6.5.1 Global Initialization
          1. 24.6.5.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
          2. 24.6.5.1.2 McASP Global Initialization
            1. 24.6.5.1.2.1 Main Sequence – McASP Global Initialization for DIT-Transmission
              1. 24.6.5.1.2.1.1 Subsequence – Transmit Format Unit Configuration for DIT-Transmission
              2. 24.6.5.1.2.1.2 Subsequence – Transmit Frame Synchronization Generator Configuration for DIT-Transmission
              3. 24.6.5.1.2.1.3 Subsequence – Transmit Clock Generator Configuration for DIT-Transmission
              4. 24.6.5.1.2.1.4 Subsequence - McASP Pins Functional Configuration
              5. 24.6.5.1.2.1.5 Subsequence – DIT-specific Subframe Fields Configuration
            2. 24.6.5.1.2.2 Main Sequence – McASP Global Initialization for TDM-Reception
              1. 24.6.5.1.2.2.1 Subsequence – Receive Format Unit Configuration in TDM Mode
              2. 24.6.5.1.2.2.2 Subsequence – Receive Frame Synchronization Generator Configuration in TDM Mode
              3. 24.6.5.1.2.2.3 Subsequence – Receive Clock Generator Configuration
              4. 24.6.5.1.2.2.4 Subsequence—McASP Receiver Pins Functional Configuration
            3. 24.6.5.1.2.3 Main Sequence – McASP Global Initialization for TDM -Transmission
              1. 24.6.5.1.2.3.1 Subsequence – Transmit Format Unit Configuration in TDM Mode
              2. 24.6.5.1.2.3.2 Subsequence – Transmit Frame Synchronization Generator Configuration in TDM Mode
              3. 24.6.5.1.2.3.3 Subsequence – Transmit Clock Generator Configuration for TDM Cases
              4. 24.6.5.1.2.3.4 Subsequence—McASP Transmit Pins Functional Configuration
        2. 24.6.5.2 Operational Modes Configuration
          1. 24.6.5.2.1 McASP Transmission Modes
            1. 24.6.5.2.1.1 Main Sequence – McASP DIT- /TDM- Polling Transmission Method
            2. 24.6.5.2.1.2 Main Sequence – McASP DIT- /TDM - Interrupt Transmission Method
            3. 24.6.5.2.1.3 Main Sequence –McASP DIT- /TDM - Mode DMA Transmission Method
          2. 24.6.5.2.2 McASP Reception Modes
            1. 24.6.5.2.2.1 Main Sequence – McASP Polling Reception Method
            2. 24.6.5.2.2.2 Main Sequence – McASP TDM - Interrupt Reception Method
            3. 24.6.5.2.2.3 Main Sequence – McASP TDM - Mode DMA Reception Method
          3. 24.6.5.2.3 McASP Event Servicing
            1. 24.6.5.2.3.1 McASP DIT-/TDM- Transmit Interrupt Events Servicing
            2. 24.6.5.2.3.2 McASP TDM- Receive Interrupt Events Servicing
            3. 24.6.5.2.3.3 3645
            4. 24.6.5.2.3.4 Subsequence – McASP DIT-/TDM -Modes Transmit Error Handling
            5. 24.6.5.2.3.5 Subsequence – McASP Receive Error Handling
      6. 24.6.6 McASP Register Manual
        1. 24.6.6.1 McASP Instance Summary
        2. 24.6.6.2 McASP Registers
          1. 24.6.6.2.1 MCASP_CFG Register Summary
          2. 24.6.6.2.2 MCASP_CFG Register Description
          3. 24.6.6.2.3 MCASP_AFIFO Register Summary
          4. 24.6.6.2.4 MCASP_AFIFO Register Description
          5. 24.6.6.2.5 MCASP_DAT Register Summary
          6. 24.6.6.2.6 MCASP_DAT Register Description
    7. 24.7  SuperSpeed USB DRD
      1. 24.7.1 SuperSpeed USB DRD Subsystem Overview
        1. 24.7.1.1 Main Features
      2. 24.7.2 SuperSpeed USB DRD Subsystem Environment
        1. 24.7.2.1 SuperSpeed USB DRD Subsystem I/O Interfaces
        2. 24.7.2.2 SuperSpeed USB Subsystem Application
          1. 24.7.2.2.1 USB3.0 DRD Application
          2. 24.7.2.2.2 USB2.0 DRD Internal PHY
          3. 24.7.2.2.3 USB2.0 DRD External PHY
          4. 24.7.2.2.4 3666
          5. 24.7.2.2.5 Host Mode
          6. 24.7.2.2.6 Device Mode
      3. 24.7.3 SuperSpeed USB Subsystem Integration
    8. 24.8  SATA Controller
      1. 24.8.1 SATA Controller Overview
        1. 24.8.1.1 SATA Controller
          1. 24.8.1.1.1 AHCI Mode Overview
          2. 24.8.1.1.2 Native Command Queuing
          3. 24.8.1.1.3 SATA Transport Layer Functionalities
          4. 24.8.1.1.4 SATA Link Layer Functionalities
        2. 24.8.1.2 SATA Controller Features
      2. 24.8.2 SATA Controller Environment
      3. 24.8.3 SATA Controller Integration
      4. 24.8.4 SATA Controller Functional Description
        1. 24.8.4.1  SATA Controller Block Diagram
        2. 24.8.4.2  SATA Controller Link Layer Protocol and Data Format
          1. 24.8.4.2.1 SATA 8b/10b Parallel Encoding/Decoding
          2. 24.8.4.2.2 SATA Stream Dword Components
          3. 24.8.4.2.3 Scrambling/Descrambling Processing
        3. 24.8.4.3  Resets
          1. 24.8.4.3.1 Hardware Reset
          2. 24.8.4.3.2 Software Initiated Resets
            1. 24.8.4.3.2.1 Software Reset
            2. 24.8.4.3.2.2 Port Reset
            3. 24.8.4.3.2.3 HBA Reset
        4. 24.8.4.4  Power Management
          1. 24.8.4.4.1 SATA Specific Power Management
            1. 24.8.4.4.1.1 PARTIAL Power Mode
            2. 24.8.4.4.1.2 Slumber Power Mode
            3. 24.8.4.4.1.3 Software Control over Low Power States
            4. 24.8.4.4.1.4 Aggressive Power Management
          2. 24.8.4.4.2 Master Standby and Slave Idle Management Protocols
          3. 24.8.4.4.3 Clock Gating Synchronization
          4. 24.8.4.4.4 3700
        5. 24.8.4.5  Interrupt Requests
          1. 24.8.4.5.1 Interrupt Generation
          2. 24.8.4.5.2 Levels of Interrupt Control
          3. 24.8.4.5.3 Interrupt Events Description
            1. 24.8.4.5.3.1  Task File Error Status
            2. 24.8.4.5.3.2  Host Bus Fatal Error
            3. 24.8.4.5.3.3  Interface Fatal Error Status
            4. 24.8.4.5.3.4  Interface Non-Fatal Error Status
            5. 24.8.4.5.3.5  Overflow Status
            6. 24.8.4.5.3.6  Incorrect Port Multiplier Status
            7. 24.8.4.5.3.7  PHYReady Change Status
            8. 24.8.4.5.3.8  Port Connect Change Status
            9. 24.8.4.5.3.9  Descriptor Processed
            10. 24.8.4.5.3.10 Unknown FIS Interrupt
            11. 24.8.4.5.3.11 Set Device Bits Interrupt
            12. 24.8.4.5.3.12 DMA Setup FIS Interrupt
            13. 24.8.4.5.3.13 PIO Setup FIS Interrupt
            14. 24.8.4.5.3.14 Device to Host Register FIS Interrupt
          4. 24.8.4.5.4 Interrupt Condition Control
          5. 24.8.4.5.5 Command Completion Coalescing Interrupts
            1. 24.8.4.5.5.1 CCC Interrupt Based on Expired Timeout Value
            2. 24.8.4.5.5.2 CCC Interrupt Based on Completion Count
        6. 24.8.4.6  System Memory FIS Descriptors
          1. 24.8.4.6.1 Command List Structure Basics
          2. 24.8.4.6.2 Supported Types of Commands
          3. 24.8.4.6.3 Received FIS Structures
          4. 24.8.4.6.4 FIS Descriptors Summary
        7. 24.8.4.7  Transport Layer FIS-Based Interactions
          1. 24.8.4.7.1 Software Processing of the Port Command List
          2. 24.8.4.7.2 Handling the Received FIS Descriptors
        8. 24.8.4.8  DMA Port Configuration
        9. 24.8.4.9  Port Multiplier Operation
          1. 24.8.4.9.1 Command-Based Switching Mode
            1. 24.8.4.9.1.1 Port Multiplier NCQ and Non-NCQ Commands Generation
          2. 24.8.4.9.2 Port Multiplier Enumeration
        10. 24.8.4.10 Activity LED Generation Functionality
        11. 24.8.4.11 Supported Types of SATA Transfers
          1. 24.8.4.11.1 Supported Higher Level Protocols
        12. 24.8.4.12 SATA Controller AHCI Hardware Register Interface
      5. 24.8.5 SATA Controller Low Level Programming Model
        1. 24.8.5.1 Global Initialization
          1. 24.8.5.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
          2. 24.8.5.1.2 SATA Controller Global Initialization
            1. 24.8.5.1.2.1 Main Sequence SATA Controller Global Initialization
            2. 24.8.5.1.2.2 SubSequence – Firmware Capability Writes
          3. 24.8.5.1.3 Issue Command - Main Sequence
          4. 24.8.5.1.4 Receive FIS—Main Sequence
      6. 24.8.6 SATA Controller Register Manual
        1. 24.8.6.1 SATA Controller Instance Summary
        2. 24.8.6.2 DWC_ahsata Registers
          1. 24.8.6.2.1 DWC_ahsata Register Summary
          2. 24.8.6.2.2 DWC_ahsata Register Description
        3. 24.8.6.3 SATAMAC_wrapper Registers
          1. 24.8.6.3.1 SATAMAC_wrapper Register Summary
          2. 24.8.6.3.2 SATAMAC_wrapper Register Description
    9. 24.9  PCIe Controller
      1. 24.9.1 PCIe Controller Subsystem Overview
        1. 24.9.1.1 PCIe Controllers Key Features
      2. 24.9.2 PCIe Controller Environment
      3. 24.9.3 PCIe Controllers Integration
      4. 24.9.4 PCIe SS Controller Functional Description
        1. 24.9.4.1 PCIe Controller Functional Block Diagram
        2. 24.9.4.2 PCIe Traffics
        3. 24.9.4.3 PCIe Controller Ports on L3_MAIN Interconnect
          1. 24.9.4.3.1 PCIe Controller Master Port
            1. 24.9.4.3.1.1 PCIe Controller Master Port to MMU Routing
          2. 24.9.4.3.2 PCIe Controller Slave Port
          3. 24.9.4.3.3 3768
        4. 24.9.4.4 PCIe Controller Reset Management
          1. 24.9.4.4.1 PCIe Reset Types and Stickiness
          2. 24.9.4.4.2 PCIe Reset Conditions
            1. 24.9.4.4.2.1 PCIe Main Reset
              1. 24.9.4.4.2.1.1 PCIe Subsystem Cold Main Reset Source
              2. 24.9.4.4.2.1.2 PCIe Subsystem Warm Main Reset Sources
            2. 24.9.4.4.2.2 PCIe Standard Specific Resets to the PCIe Core Logic
        5. 24.9.4.5 PCIe Controller Power Management
          1. 24.9.4.5.1 PCIe Protocol Power Management
            1. 24.9.4.5.1.1 PCIe Device/function power state (D-state)
            2. 24.9.4.5.1.2 PCIe Controller PIPE Powerstate (Powerdown Control)
          2. 24.9.4.5.2 PCIE Controller Clocks Management
            1. 24.9.4.5.2.1 PCIe Clock Domains
            2. 24.9.4.5.2.2 PCIe Controller Idle/Standby Clock Management Interfaces
              1. 24.9.4.5.2.2.1 PCIe Controller Master Standby Behavior
              2. 24.9.4.5.2.2.2 PCIe Controller Slave Idle/Disconnect Behavior
                1. 24.9.4.5.2.2.2.1 PCIe Controller Idle Sequence During D3cold/L3 State
        6. 24.9.4.6 PCIe Controller Interrupt Requests
          1. 24.9.4.6.1 PCIe Controller Main Hardware Management
            1. 24.9.4.6.1.1 PCIe Management Interrupt Events
            2. 24.9.4.6.1.2 PCIe Error Interrupt Events
            3. 24.9.4.6.1.3 Summary of PCIe Controller Main Hardware Interrupt Events
          2. 24.9.4.6.2 PCIe Controller Legacy and MSI Virtual Interrupts Management
            1. 24.9.4.6.2.1 Legacy PCI Interrupts (INTx)
              1. 24.9.4.6.2.1.1 Legacy PCI Interrupt Events Overview
              2. 24.9.4.6.2.1.2 Legacy PCI Interrupt Transmission (EP mode only)
              3. 24.9.4.6.2.1.3 Legacy PCI Interrupt Reception (RC mode only)
            2. 24.9.4.6.2.2 PCIe Controller Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI)
              1. 24.9.4.6.2.2.1 PCIe Specific MSI Interrupt Event Overview
              2. 24.9.4.6.2.2.2 PCIe Controller MSI Transmission Methods (EP mode)
                1. 24.9.4.6.2.2.2.1 PCIe Controller MSI transmission, hardware method
                2. 24.9.4.6.2.2.2.2 PCIe Controller MSI transmission, software method
              3. 24.9.4.6.2.2.3 PCIe Controller MSI Reception (RC mode)
          3. 24.9.4.6.3 PCIe Controller MSI Hardware Interrupt Events
        7. 24.9.4.7 PCIe Controller Address Spaces and Address Translation
        8. 24.9.4.8 PCIe Traffic Requesting and Responding
          1. 24.9.4.8.1 PCIe Memory-type (Mem) Traffic Management
            1. 24.9.4.8.1.1 PCIe Memory Requesting
            2. 24.9.4.8.1.2 PCIe Memory Responding
          2. 24.9.4.8.2 PCIe Configuration Type (Cfg) Traffic Management
            1. 24.9.4.8.2.1 RC Self-configuration (RC Only)
            2. 24.9.4.8.2.2 Configuration Requests over PCIe (RC Only)
            3. 24.9.4.8.2.3 Configuration Responding over PCIe (EP Only)
          3. 24.9.4.8.3 PCIe I/O-type (IO) traffic management
            1. 24.9.4.8.3.1 PCIe I/O requesting (RC only)
            2. 24.9.4.8.3.2 PCIe IO BAR initialization before enumeration (EP only)
            3. 24.9.4.8.3.3 PCIe I/O responding (PCI legacy EP only)
          4. 24.9.4.8.4 PCIe Message-type (Msg) traffic management
        9. 24.9.4.9 PCIe Programming Register Interface
          1. 24.9.4.9.1 PCIe Register Access
          2. 24.9.4.9.2 Double Mapping of the PCIe Local Control Registers
          3. 24.9.4.9.3 Base Address Registers (BAR) Initialization
      5. 24.9.5 PCIe Controller Low Level Programming Model
        1. 24.9.5.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
        2. 24.9.5.2 Main Sequence of PCIe Controllers Initalization
      6. 24.9.6 PCIe Standard Registers vs PCIe Subsystem Hardware Registers Mapping
      7. 24.9.7 PCIe Controller Register Manual
        1. 24.9.7.1 PCIe Controller Instance Summary
        2. 24.9.7.2 PCIe_SS_EP_CFG_PCIe Registers
          1. 24.9.7.2.1 PCIe_SS_EP_CFG_PCIe Register Summary
          2. 24.9.7.2.2 PCIe_SS_EP_CFG_PCIe Register Description
          3. 24.9.7.2.3 3830
        3. 24.9.7.3 PCIe_SS_EP_CFG_DBICS Registers
          1. 24.9.7.3.1 PCIe_SS_EP_CFG_DBICS Register Summary
          2. 24.9.7.3.2 PCIe_SS_EP_CFG_DBICS Register Description
        4. 24.9.7.4 PCIe_SS_RC_CFG_DBICS Registers
          1. 24.9.7.4.1 PCIe_SS_RC_CFG_DBICS Register Summary
          2. 24.9.7.4.2 PCIe_SS_RC_CFG_DBICS Register Description
        5. 24.9.7.5 PCIe_SS_PL_CONF Registers
          1. 24.9.7.5.1 PCIe_SS_PL_CONF Register Summary
          2. 24.9.7.5.2 PCIe_SS_PL_CONF Register Description
        6. 24.9.7.6 PCIe_SS_EP_CFG_DBICS2 Registers
          1. 24.9.7.6.1 PCIe_SS_EP_CFG_DBICS2 Register Summary
          2. 24.9.7.6.2 PCIe_SS_EP_CFG_DBICS2 Register Description
        7. 24.9.7.7 PCIe_SS_RC_CFG_DBICS2 Registers
          1. 24.9.7.7.1 PCIe_SS_RC_CFG_DBICS2 Register Summary
          2. 24.9.7.7.2 PCIe_SS_RC_CFG_DBICS2 Register Description
        8. 24.9.7.8 PCIe_SS_TI_CONF Registers
          1. 24.9.7.8.1 PCIe_SS_TI_CONF Register Summary
          2. 24.9.7.8.2 PCIe_SS_TI_CONF Register Description
    10. 24.10 DCAN
      1. 24.10.1 DCAN Overview
        1. 24.10.1.1 Features
      2. 24.10.2 DCAN Environment
        1. 24.10.2.1 CAN Network Basics
      3. 24.10.3 DCAN Integration
      4. 24.10.4 DCAN Functional Description
        1. 24.10.4.1  Module Clocking Requirements
        2. 24.10.4.2  Interrupt Functionality
          1. 24.10.4.2.1 Message Object Interrupts
          2. 24.10.4.2.2 Status Change Interrupts
          3. 24.10.4.2.3 Error Interrupts
        3. 24.10.4.3  DMA Functionality
        4. 24.10.4.4  Local Power-Down Mode
          1. 24.10.4.4.1 Entering Local Power-Down Mode
          2. 24.10.4.4.2 Wakeup From Local Power Down
        5. 24.10.4.5  Parity Check Mechanism
          1. 24.10.4.5.1 Behavior on Parity Error
          2. 24.10.4.5.2 Parity Testing
        6. 24.10.4.6  Debug/Suspend Mode
        7. 24.10.4.7  Configuration of Message Objects Description
          1. 24.10.4.7.1 Configuration of a Transmit Object for Data Frames
          2. 24.10.4.7.2 Configuration of a Transmit Object for Remote Frames
          3. 24.10.4.7.3 Configuration of a Single Receive Object for Data Frames
          4. 24.10.4.7.4 Configuration of a Single Receive Object for Remote Frames
          5. 24.10.4.7.5 Configuration of a FIFO Buffer
        8. 24.10.4.8  Message Handling
          1. 24.10.4.8.1  Message Handler Overview
          2. 24.10.4.8.2  Receive/Transmit Priority
          3. 24.10.4.8.3  Transmission of Messages in Event Driven CAN Communication
          4. 24.10.4.8.4  Updating a Transmit Object
          5. 24.10.4.8.5  Changing a Transmit Object
          6. 24.10.4.8.6  Acceptance Filtering of Received Messages
          7. 24.10.4.8.7  Reception of Data Frames
          8. 24.10.4.8.8  Reception of Remote Frames
          9. 24.10.4.8.9  Reading Received Messages
          10. 24.10.4.8.10 Requesting New Data for a Receive Object
          11. 24.10.4.8.11 Storing Received Messages in FIFO Buffers
          12. 24.10.4.8.12 Reading From a FIFO Buffer
        9. 24.10.4.9  CAN Bit Timing
          1. 24.10.4.9.1 Bit Time and Bit Rate
            1. 24.10.4.9.1.1 Synchronization Segment
            2. 24.10.4.9.1.2 Propagation Time Segment
            3. 24.10.4.9.1.3 Phase Buffer Segments and Synchronization
            4. 24.10.4.9.1.4 Oscillator Tolerance Range
          2. 24.10.4.9.2 DCAN Bit Timing Registers
            1. 24.10.4.9.2.1 Calculation of the Bit Timing Parameters
            2. 24.10.4.9.2.2 Example for Bit Timing Calculation
        10. 24.10.4.10 Message Interface Register Sets
          1. 24.10.4.10.1 Message Interface Register Sets 1 and 2
          2. 24.10.4.10.2 IF3 Register Set
        11. 24.10.4.11 Message RAM
          1. 24.10.4.11.1 Structure of Message Objects
          2. 24.10.4.11.2 Addressing Message Objects in RAM
          3. 24.10.4.11.3 Message RAM Representation in Debug/Suspend Mode
          4. 24.10.4.11.4 Message RAM Representation in Direct Access Mode
        12. 24.10.4.12 CAN Operation
          1. 24.10.4.12.1 CAN Module Initialization
            1. 24.10.4.12.1.1 Configuration of CAN Bit Timing
            2. 24.10.4.12.1.2 Configuration of Message Objects
            3. 24.10.4.12.1.3 DCAN RAM Hardware Initialization
          2. 24.10.4.12.2 CAN Message Transfer (Normal Operation)
            1. 24.10.4.12.2.1 Automatic Retransmission
            2. 24.10.4.12.2.2 Auto-Bus-On
          3. 24.10.4.12.3 Test Modes
            1. 24.10.4.12.3.1 Silent Mode
            2. 24.10.4.12.3.2 Loopback Mode
            3. 24.10.4.12.3.3 External Loopback Mode
            4. 24.10.4.12.3.4 Loopback Mode Combined With Silent Mode
            5. 24.10.4.12.3.5 Software Control of CAN_TX Pin
        13. 24.10.4.13 GPIO Support
      5. 24.10.5 DCAN Register Manual
        1. 24.10.5.1 DCAN Instance Summary
        2. 24.10.5.2 DCAN Registers
          1. 24.10.5.2.1 DCAN Register Summary
          2. 24.10.5.2.2 DCAN Register Description
    11. 24.11 Gigabit Ethernet Switch (GMAC_SW)
      1. 24.11.1 GMAC_SW Overview
        1. 24.11.1.1 Features
        2. 24.11.1.2 3928
      2. 24.11.2 GMAC_SW Environment
        1. 24.11.2.1 G/MII Interface
        2. 24.11.2.2 RMII Interface
        3. 24.11.2.3 RGMII Interface
      3. 24.11.3 GMAC_SW Integration
      4. 24.11.4 GMAC_SW Functional Description
        1. 24.11.4.1  Functional Block Diagram
        2. 24.11.4.2  GMAC_SW Ports
          1. 24.11.4.2.1 Interface Mode Selection
        3. 24.11.4.3  Clocking
          1. 24.11.4.3.1 Subsystem Clocking
          2. 24.11.4.3.2 Interface Clocking
            1. 24.11.4.3.2.1 G/MII Interface Clocking
            2. 24.11.4.3.2.2 RGMII Interface Clocking
            3. 24.11.4.3.2.3 RMII Interface Clocking
            4. 24.11.4.3.2.4 MDIO Clocking
        4. 24.11.4.4  Software IDLE
        5. 24.11.4.5  Interrupt Functionality
          1. 24.11.4.5.1 Receive Packet Completion Pulse Interrupt (RX_PULSE)
          2. 24.11.4.5.2 Transmit Packet Completion Pulse Interrupt (TX_PULSE)
          3. 24.11.4.5.3 Receive Threshold Pulse Interrupt (RX_THRESH_PULSE)
          4. 24.11.4.5.4 Miscellaneous Pulse Interrupt (MISC_PULSE)
            1. 24.11.4.5.4.1 EVNT_PEND( CPTS_PEND) Interrupt
            2. 24.11.4.5.4.2 Statistics Interrupt
            3. 24.11.4.5.4.3 Host Error interrupt
            4. 24.11.4.5.4.4 MDIO Interrupts
          5. 24.11.4.5.5 Interrupt Pacing
        6. 24.11.4.6  Reset Isolation
          1. 24.11.4.6.1 Reset Isolation Functional Description
        7. 24.11.4.7  Software Reset
        8. 24.11.4.8  CPSW_3G
          1. 24.11.4.8.1  CPDMA RX and TX Interfaces
            1. 24.11.4.8.1.1 Functional Operation
            2. 24.11.4.8.1.2 Receive DMA Interface
              1. 24.11.4.8.1.2.1 Receive DMA Host Configuration
              2. 24.11.4.8.1.2.2 Receive Channel Teardown
            3. 24.11.4.8.1.3 Transmit DMA Interface
              1. 24.11.4.8.1.3.1 Transmit DMA Host Configuration
              2. 24.11.4.8.1.3.2 Transmit Channel Teardown
            4. 24.11.4.8.1.4 Transmit Rate Limiting
            5. 24.11.4.8.1.5 Command IDLE
          2. 24.11.4.8.2  Address Lookup Engine (ALE)
            1. 24.11.4.8.2.1 Address Table Entry
              1. 24.11.4.8.2.1.1 Free Table Entry
              2. 24.11.4.8.2.1.2 Multicast Address Table Entry
              3. 24.11.4.8.2.1.3 VLAN/Multicast Address Table Entry
              4. 24.11.4.8.2.1.4 Unicast Address Table Entry
              5. 24.11.4.8.2.1.5 OUI Unicast Address Table Entry
              6. 24.11.4.8.2.1.6 VLAN/Unicast Address Table Entry
              7. 24.11.4.8.2.1.7 VLAN Table Entry
            2. 24.11.4.8.2.2 Packet Forwarding Processes
            3. 24.11.4.8.2.3 Learning Process
            4. 24.11.4.8.2.4 VLAN Aware Mode
            5. 24.11.4.8.2.5 VLAN Unaware Mode
          3. 24.11.4.8.3  Packet Priority Handling
          4. 24.11.4.8.4  FIFO Memory Control
          5. 24.11.4.8.5  FIFO Transmit Queue Control
            1. 24.11.4.8.5.1 Normal Priority Mode
            2. 24.11.4.8.5.2 Dual MAC Mode
            3. 24.11.4.8.5.3 Rate Limit Mode
          6. 24.11.4.8.6  Audio Video Bridging
            1. 24.11.4.8.6.1 IEEE 802.1AS: Timing and Synchronization for Time-Sensitive Applications in Bridged Local Area Networks (Precision Time Protocol (PTP))
              1. 24.11.4.8.6.1.1 IEEE 1722: "Layer 2 Transport Protocol for Time-Sensitive Streams"
              2. 24.11.4.8.6.1.2 IEEE 1733: Extends RTCP for RTP Streaming over AVB-supported Networks
            2. 24.11.4.8.6.2 IEEE 802.1Qav: "Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks: Forwarding and Queuing for Time-Sensitive Streams"
              1. 24.11.4.8.6.2.1 Configuring the Device for 802.1Qav Operation:
          7. 24.11.4.8.7  Ethernet MAC Sliver (CPGMAC_SL)
            1. 24.11.4.8.7.1 G/MII Media Independent Interface
              1. 24.11.4.8.7.1.1 Data Reception
                1. 24.11.4.8.7.1.1.1 Receive Control
                2. 24.11.4.8.7.1.1.2 Receive Inter-Frame Interval
              2. 24.11.4.8.7.1.2 Data Transmission
                1. 24.11.4.8.7.1.2.1 Transmit Control
                2. 24.11.4.8.7.1.2.2 CRC Insertion
                3. 24.11.4.8.7.1.2.3 MTXER
                4. 24.11.4.8.7.1.2.4 Adaptive Performance Optimization (APO)
                5. 24.11.4.8.7.1.2.5 Inter-Packet-Gap Enforcement
                6. 24.11.4.8.7.1.2.6 Back Off
                7. 24.11.4.8.7.1.2.7 Programmable Transmit Inter-Packet Gap
                8. 24.11.4.8.7.1.2.8 Speed, Duplex and Pause Frame Support Negotiation
            2. 24.11.4.8.7.2 RMII Interface
              1. 24.11.4.8.7.2.1 Features
              2. 24.11.4.8.7.2.2 RMII Receive (RX)
              3. 24.11.4.8.7.2.3 RMII Transmit (TX)
            3. 24.11.4.8.7.3 RGMII Interface
              1. 24.11.4.8.7.3.1 RGMII Features
              2. 24.11.4.8.7.3.2 RGMII Receive (RX)
              3. 24.11.4.8.7.3.3 In-Band Mode of Operation
              4. 24.11.4.8.7.3.4 Forced Mode of Operation
              5. 24.11.4.8.7.3.5 RGMII Transmit (TX)
            4. 24.11.4.8.7.4 Frame Classification
          8. 24.11.4.8.8  Embedded Memories
          9. 24.11.4.8.9  Flow Control
            1. 24.11.4.8.9.1 CPPI Port Flow Control
            2. 24.11.4.8.9.2 Ethernet Port Flow Control
              1. 24.11.4.8.9.2.1 Receive Flow Control
                1. 24.11.4.8.9.2.1.1 Collision Based Receive Buffer Flow Control
                2. 24.11.4.8.9.2.1.2 IEEE 802.3X Based Receive Flow Control
              2. 24.11.4.8.9.2.2 Transmit Flow Control
          10. 24.11.4.8.10 Short Gap
          11. 24.11.4.8.11 Switch Latency
          12. 24.11.4.8.12 Emulation Control
          13. 24.11.4.8.13 FIFO Loopback
          14. 24.11.4.8.14 Device Level Ring (DLR) Support
          15. 24.11.4.8.15 Energy Efficient Ethernet Support (802.3az)
          16. 24.11.4.8.16 CPSW_3G Network Statistics
            1. 24.11.4.8.16.1 4035
        9. 24.11.4.9  Static Packet Filter (SPF)
          1. 24.11.4.9.1 SPF Overview
          2. 24.11.4.9.2 SPF Functional Description
            1. 24.11.4.9.2.1 SPF Block Diagram
            2. 24.11.4.9.2.2 Interrupts
            3. 24.11.4.9.2.3 Protocol Header Extractor
            4. 24.11.4.9.2.4 Programmable Rule Engine
              1. 24.11.4.9.2.4.1 Internal Registers
              2. 24.11.4.9.2.4.2 Packet Buffer
            5. 24.11.4.9.2.5 Intrusion Event Logger
            6. 24.11.4.9.2.6 Rate Limiter
            7. 24.11.4.9.2.7 Rule Engine Instruction Set Architecture
              1. 24.11.4.9.2.7.1 Instruction Format
              2. 24.11.4.9.2.7.2 Operand Field
              3. 24.11.4.9.2.7.3 Arithmetic/Logical Function Field
              4. 24.11.4.9.2.7.4 Operation Field
          3. 24.11.4.9.3 Programming Guide
            1. 24.11.4.9.3.1 Initialization Routine
            2. 24.11.4.9.3.2 Interrupt Service Routine
            3. 24.11.4.9.3.3 Rule Engine Example Program
        10. 24.11.4.10 Common Platform Time Sync (CPTS)
          1. 24.11.4.10.1 CPTS Architecture
          2. 24.11.4.10.2 CPTS Initialization
          3. 24.11.4.10.3 Time Stamp Value
          4. 24.11.4.10.4 Event FIFO
          5. 24.11.4.10.5 Time Sync Events
            1. 24.11.4.10.5.1 Time Stamp Push Event
            2. 24.11.4.10.5.2 Time Stamp Counter Rollover Event
            3. 24.11.4.10.5.3 Time Stamp Counter Half-rollover Event
            4. 24.11.4.10.5.4 Hardware Time Stamp Push Event
            5. 24.11.4.10.5.5 Ethernet Port Events
          6. 24.11.4.10.6 CPTS Interrupt Handling
        11. 24.11.4.11 CPPI Buffer Descriptors
          1. 24.11.4.11.1 TX Buffer Descriptors
            1. 24.11.4.11.1.1 CPPI TX Data Word 0
            2. 24.11.4.11.1.2 CPPI TX Data Word 1
            3. 24.11.4.11.1.3 CPPI TX Data Word 2
            4. 24.11.4.11.1.4 CPPI TX Data Word 3
          2. 24.11.4.11.2 RX Buffer Descriptors
            1. 24.11.4.11.2.1 CPPI RX Data Word 0
            2. 24.11.4.11.2.2 CPPI RX Data Word 1
            3. 24.11.4.11.2.3 CPPI RX Data Word 2
            4. 24.11.4.11.2.4 CPPI RX Data Word 3
        12. 24.11.4.12 MDIO
          1. 24.11.4.12.1 MDIO Frame Formats
          2. 24.11.4.12.2 MDIO Functional Description
      5. 24.11.5 GMAC_SW Programming Guide
        1. 24.11.5.1 Transmit Operation
        2. 24.11.5.2 Receive Operation
        3. 24.11.5.3 MDIO Software Interface
          1. 24.11.5.3.1 Initializing the MDIO Module
          2. 24.11.5.3.2 Writing Data To a PHY Register
          3. 24.11.5.3.3 Reading Data From a PHY Register
        4. 24.11.5.4 Initialization and Configuration of CPSW
      6. 24.11.6 GMAC_SW Register Manual
        1. 24.11.6.1  GMAC_SW Instance Summary
        2. 24.11.6.2  SS Registers
          1. 24.11.6.2.1 SS Register Summary
          2. 24.11.6.2.2 SS Register Description
        3. 24.11.6.3  PORT Registers
          1. 24.11.6.3.1 PORT Register Summary
          2. 24.11.6.3.2 PORT Register Description
        4. 24.11.6.4  CPDMA registers
          1. 24.11.6.4.1 CPDMA Register Summary
          2. 24.11.6.4.2 CPDMA Register Description
        5. 24.11.6.5  STATS Registers
          1. 24.11.6.5.1 STATS Register Summary
          2. 24.11.6.5.2 STATS Register Description
        6. 24.11.6.6  STATERAM Registers
          1. 24.11.6.6.1 STATERAM Register Summary
          2. 24.11.6.6.2 STATERAM Register Description
        7. 24.11.6.7  CPTS registers
          1. 24.11.6.7.1 CPTS Register Summary
          2. 24.11.6.7.2 CPTS Register Description
        8. 24.11.6.8  ALE registers
          1. 24.11.6.8.1 ALE Register Summary
          2. 24.11.6.8.2 ALE Register Description
        9. 24.11.6.9  SL registers
          1. 24.11.6.9.1 SL Register Summary
          2. 24.11.6.9.2 SL Register Description
        10. 24.11.6.10 MDIO registers
          1. 24.11.6.10.1 MDIO Register Summary
          2. 24.11.6.10.2 MDIO Register Description
        11. 24.11.6.11 WR registers
          1. 24.11.6.11.1 WR Register Summary
          2. 24.11.6.11.2 WR Register Description
        12. 24.11.6.12 SPF Registers
          1. 24.11.6.12.1 SPF Register Summary
          2. 24.11.6.12.2 SPF Register Description
    12. 24.12 Media Local Bus (MLB)
      1. 24.12.1 MLB Overview
      2. 24.12.2 MLB Environment
        1. 24.12.2.1 MLB IO Cell Controls
      3. 24.12.3 MLB Integration
      4. 24.12.4 MLB Functional Description
        1. 24.12.4.1 Block Diagram
          1. 24.12.4.1.1 MediaLB Core Block
          2. 24.12.4.1.2 Routing Fabric Block
          3. 24.12.4.1.3 Data Buffer RAM
          4. 24.12.4.1.4 Channel Table RAM
            1. 24.12.4.1.4.1 Channel Allocation Table
            2. 24.12.4.1.4.2 Channel Descriptor Table
          5. 24.12.4.1.5 DMA Block
            1. 24.12.4.1.5.1 Synchronous Channel Descriptor
            2. 24.12.4.1.5.2 Isochronous Channel Descriptors
            3. 24.12.4.1.5.3 Asynchronous and Control Channel Descriptors
              1. 24.12.4.1.5.3.1 Single-Packet Mode
              2. 24.12.4.1.5.3.2 Multiple-Packet Mode
        2. 24.12.4.2 Software and Data Flow for MLBSS
          1. 24.12.4.2.1 Data Flow For Receive Channels
          2. 24.12.4.2.2 Data Flow for Transmit Channels
        3. 24.12.4.3 MLB Priority On The L3_MAIN Interconnect
      5. 24.12.5 MLB Programming Guide
        1. 24.12.5.1 Global Initialization
          1. 24.12.5.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
          2. 24.12.5.1.2 MLBSS Global Initialization
            1. 24.12.5.1.2.1 Channel Initialization
        2. 24.12.5.2 MLBSS Operational Modes Configuration
          1. 24.12.5.2.1 Channel Servicing
          2. 24.12.5.2.2 Channel Table RAM Access
      6. 24.12.6 MLB Register Manual
        1. 24.12.6.1 MLB Instance Summary
        2. 24.12.6.2 MLB registers
          1. 24.12.6.2.1 MLB Register Summary
          2. 24.12.6.2.2 MLB Register Description
  27. 25eMMC/SD/SDIO
    1. 25.1 eMMC/SD/SDIO Overview
      1. 25.1.1 eMMC/SD/SDIO Features
    2. 25.2 eMMC/SD/SDIO Environment
      1. 25.2.1 eMMC/SD/SDIO Functional Modes
        1. 25.2.1.1 eMMC/SD/SDIO Connected to an eMMC, SD, or SDIO Card
      2. 25.2.2 Protocol and Data Format
        1. 25.2.2.1 Protocol
        2. 25.2.2.2 Data Format
    3. 25.3 eMMC/SD/SDIO Integration
    4. 25.4 eMMC/SD/SDIO Functional Description
      1. 25.4.1  Block Diagram
      2. 25.4.2  Resets
        1. 25.4.2.1 Hardware Reset
        2. 25.4.2.2 Software Reset
      3. 25.4.3  Power Management
      4. 25.4.4  Interrupt Requests
        1. 25.4.4.1 Interrupt-Driven Operation
        2. 25.4.4.2 Polling
        3. 25.4.4.3 Asynchronous Interrupt
      5. 25.4.5  DMA Modes
        1. 25.4.5.1 Master DMA Operations
          1. 25.4.5.1.1 Descriptor Table Description
          2. 25.4.5.1.2 Requirements for Descriptors
            1. 25.4.5.1.2.1 Data Length
            2. 25.4.5.1.2.2 Supported Features
            3. 25.4.5.1.2.3 Error Generation
          3. 25.4.5.1.3 Advanced DMA Description
        2. 25.4.5.2 Slave DMA Operations
          1. 25.4.5.2.1 DMA Receive Mode
          2. 25.4.5.2.2 DMA Transmit Mode
      6. 25.4.6  Mode Selection
      7. 25.4.7  Buffer Management
        1. 25.4.7.1 Data Buffer
          1. 25.4.7.1.1 Memory Size, Block Length, and Buffer-Management Relationship
          2. 25.4.7.1.2 Data Buffer Status
      8. 25.4.8  Transfer Process
        1. 25.4.8.1 Different Types of Commands
        2. 25.4.8.2 Different Types of Responses
      9. 25.4.9  Transfer or Command Status and Errors Reporting
        1. 25.4.9.1 Busy Time-Out for R1b, R5b Response Type
        2. 25.4.9.2 Busy Time-Out After Write CRC Status
        3. 25.4.9.3 Write CRC Status Time-Out
        4. 25.4.9.4 Read Data Time-Out
        5. 25.4.9.5 Boot Acknowledge Time-Out
      10. 25.4.10 Auto Command 12 Timings
        1. 25.4.10.1 Auto CMD12 Timings During Write Transfer
        2. 25.4.10.2 Auto CMD12 Timings During Read Transfer
      11. 25.4.11 Transfer Stop
      12. 25.4.12 Output Signals Generation
        1. 25.4.12.1 Generation on Falling Edge of MMC Clock
        2. 25.4.12.2 Generation on Rising Edge of MMC Clock
      13. 25.4.13 Sampling Clock Tuning
      14. 25.4.14 Card Boot Mode Management
        1. 25.4.14.1 Boot Mode Using CMD0
        2. 25.4.14.2 Boot Mode With CMD Line Tied to 0
      15. 25.4.15 MMC CE-ATA Command Completion Disable Management
      16. 25.4.16 Test Registers
      17. 25.4.17 eMMC/SD/SDIO Hardware Status Features
    5. 25.5 eMMC/SD/SDIO Programming Guide
      1. 25.5.1 Low-Level Programming Models
        1. 25.5.1.1 Global Initialization
          1. 25.5.1.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
          2. 25.5.1.1.2 eMMC/SD/SDIO Host Controller Initialization Flow
            1. 25.5.1.1.2.1 Enable Interface and Functional Clock for MMC Controller
            2. 25.5.1.1.2.2 MMCHS Soft Reset Flow
            3. 25.5.1.1.2.3 Set MMCHS Default Capabilities
            4. 25.5.1.1.2.4 Wake-Up Configuration
            5. 25.5.1.1.2.5 MMC Host and Bus Configuration
        2. 25.5.1.2 Operational Modes Configuration
          1. 25.5.1.2.1 Basic Operations for eMMC/SD/SDIO Host Controller
            1. 25.5.1.2.1.1 Card Detection, Identification, and Selection
              1. 25.5.1.2.1.1.1 CMD Line Reset Procedure
            2. 25.5.1.2.1.2 Read/Write Transfer Flow in DMA Mode With Interrupt
              1. 25.5.1.2.1.2.1 DATA Lines Reset Procedure
            3. 25.5.1.2.1.3 Read/Write Transfer Flow in DMA Mode With Polling
            4. 25.5.1.2.1.4 Read/Write Transfer Flow Without DMA With Polling
            5. 25.5.1.2.1.5 Read/Write Transfer Flow in CE-ATA Mode
            6. 25.5.1.2.1.6 Suspend-Resume Flow
              1. 25.5.1.2.1.6.1 Suspend Flow
              2. 25.5.1.2.1.6.2 Resume Flow
            7. 25.5.1.2.1.7 Basic Operations – Steps Detailed
              1. 25.5.1.2.1.7.1 Command Transfer Flow
              2. 25.5.1.2.1.7.2 MMCHS Clock Frequency Change
              3. 25.5.1.2.1.7.3 Bus Width Selection
          2. 25.5.1.2.2 Bus Voltage Selection
          3. 25.5.1.2.3 Boot Mode Configuration
            1. 25.5.1.2.3.1 Boot Using CMD0
            2. 25.5.1.2.3.2 Boot With CMD Line Tied to 0
          4. 25.5.1.2.4 SDR104/HS200 DLL Tuning Procedure
    6. 25.6 eMMC/SD/SDIO Register Manual
      1. 25.6.1 eMMC/SD/SDIO Instance Summary
      2. 25.6.2 eMMC/SD/SDIO Registers
        1. 25.6.2.1 eMMC/SD/SDIO Register Summary
        2. 25.6.2.2 eMMC/SD/SDIO Register Description
  28. 26Shared PHY Component Subsystem
    1. 26.1 SATA PHY Subsystem
      1. 26.1.1 SATA PHY Subsystem Overview
      2. 26.1.2 SATA PHY Subsystem Environment
        1. 26.1.2.1 SATA PHY I/O Signals
      3. 26.1.3 SATA PHY Subsystem Integration
      4. 26.1.4 SATA PHY Subsystem Functional Description
        1. 26.1.4.1 SATA PLL Controller L4 Interface Adapter Functional Description
        2. 26.1.4.2 SATA PHY Serializer and Deserializer Functional Descriptions
          1. 26.1.4.2.1 SATA PHY Reset
          2. 26.1.4.2.2 SATA_PHY Clocking
            1. 26.1.4.2.2.1 SATA_PHY Input Clocks
            2. 26.1.4.2.2.2 SATA_PHY Output Clocks
          3. 26.1.4.2.3 SATA_PHY Power Management
            1. 26.1.4.2.3.1 SATA_PHY Power-Up/-Down Sequences
            2. 26.1.4.2.3.2 SATA_PHY Low-Power Modes
          4. 26.1.4.2.4 SATA_PHY Hardware Requests
        3. 26.1.4.3 SATA Clock Generator Subsystem Functional Description
          1. 26.1.4.3.1 SATA DPLL Clock Generator Overview
          2. 26.1.4.3.2 SATA DPLL Clock Generator Reset
          3. 26.1.4.3.3 SATA DPLL Low-Power Modes
          4. 26.1.4.3.4 SATA DPLL Clocks Configuration
            1. 26.1.4.3.4.1 SATA DPLL Input Clock Control
            2. 26.1.4.3.4.2 SATA DPLL Output Clock Configuration
              1. 26.1.4.3.4.2.1 SATA DPLL Output Clock Gating
          5. 26.1.4.3.5 SATA DPLL Subsystem Architecture
          6. 26.1.4.3.6 SATA DPLL Clock Generator Modes and State Transitions
            1. 26.1.4.3.6.1 SATA Clock Generator Power Up
            2. 26.1.4.3.6.2 SATA DPLL Sequences
            3. 26.1.4.3.6.3 SATA DPLL Locked Mode
            4. 26.1.4.3.6.4 SATA DPLL Idle-Bypass Mode
            5. 26.1.4.3.6.5 SATA DPLL MN-Bypass Mode
            6. 26.1.4.3.6.6 SATA DPLL Error Conditions
          7. 26.1.4.3.7 SATA PLL Controller Functions
            1. 26.1.4.3.7.1 SATA PLL Controller Register Access
            2. 26.1.4.3.7.2 SATA DPLL Clock Programming Sequence
            3. 26.1.4.3.7.3 SATA DPLL Recommended Values
      5. 26.1.5 SATA PHY Subsystem Low-Level Programming Model
    2. 26.2 USB3_PHY Subsystem
      1. 26.2.1 USB3_PHY Subsystem Overview
      2. 26.2.2 USB3_PHY Subsystem Environment
        1. 26.2.2.1 USB3_PHY I/O Signals
      3. 26.2.3 USB3_PHY Subsystem Integration
      4. 26.2.4 USB3_PHY Subsystem Functional Description
        1. 26.2.4.1 Super-Speed USB PLL Controller L4 Interface Adapter Functional Description
        2. 26.2.4.2 USB3_PHY Serializer and Deserializer Functional Descriptions
          1. 26.2.4.2.1 USB3_PHY Module Resets
            1. 26.2.4.2.1.1 Hardware Reset
            2. 26.2.4.2.1.2 Software Reset
          2. 26.2.4.2.2 USB3_PHY Subsystem Clocking
            1. 26.2.4.2.2.1 USB3_PHY Subsystem Input Clocks
            2. 26.2.4.2.2.2 USB3_PHY Subsystem Output Clocks
          3. 26.2.4.2.3 USB3_PHY Power Management
            1. 26.2.4.2.3.1 USB3_PHY Power-Up/-Down Sequences
            2. 26.2.4.2.3.2 USB3_PHY Low-Power Modes
            3. 26.2.4.2.3.3 Clock Gating
          4. 26.2.4.2.4 USB3_PHY Hardware Requests
        3. 26.2.4.3 USB3_PHY Clock Generator Subsystem Functional Description
          1. 26.2.4.3.1 USB3_PHY DPLL Clock Generator Overview
          2. 26.2.4.3.2 USB3_PHY DPLL Clock Generator Reset
          3. 26.2.4.3.3 USB3_PHY DPLL Low-Power Modes
          4. 26.2.4.3.4 USB3_PHY DPLL Clocks Configuration
            1. 26.2.4.3.4.1 USB3_PHY DPLL Input Clock Control
            2. 26.2.4.3.4.2 USB3_PHY DPLL Output Clock Configuration
              1. 26.2.4.3.4.2.1 USB3_PHY DPLL Output Clock Gating
          5. 26.2.4.3.5 USB3_PHY DPLL Subsystem Architecture
          6. 26.2.4.3.6 USB3_PHY DPLL Clock Generator Modes and State Transitions
            1. 26.2.4.3.6.1 USB3_PHY Clock Generator Power Up
            2. 26.2.4.3.6.2 USB3_PHY DPLL Sequences
            3. 26.2.4.3.6.3 USB3_PHY DPLL Locked Mode
            4. 26.2.4.3.6.4 USB3_PHY DPLL Idle-Bypass Mode
            5. 26.2.4.3.6.5 USB3_PHY DPLL MN-Bypass Mode
            6. 26.2.4.3.6.6 USB3_PHY DPLL Error Conditions
          7. 26.2.4.3.7 USB3_PHY PLL Controller Functions
            1. 26.2.4.3.7.1 USB3_PHY PLL Controller Register Access
            2. 26.2.4.3.7.2 4331
            3. 26.2.4.3.7.3 USB3_PHY DPLL Clock Programming Sequence
            4. 26.2.4.3.7.4 USB3_PHY DPLL Recommended Values
      5. 26.2.5 USB3_PHY Subsystem Low-Level Programming Model
    3. 26.3 USB3 PHY and SATA PHY Register Manual
      1. 26.3.1 USB3 PHY and SATA PHY Instance Summary
      2. 26.3.2 USB3_PHY_RX Registers
        1. 26.3.2.1 USB3_PHY_RX Register Summary
        2. 26.3.2.2 USB3_PHY_RX Register Description
      3. 26.3.3 USB3_PHY_TX Registers
        1. 26.3.3.1 USB3_PHY_TX Register Summary
        2. 26.3.3.2 USB3_PHY_TX Register Description
      4. 26.3.4 SATA_PHY_RX Registers
        1. 26.3.4.1 SATA_PHY_RX Register Summary
        2. 26.3.4.2 SATA_PHY_RX Register Description
      5. 26.3.5 SATA_PHY_TX Registers
        1. 26.3.5.1 SATA_PHY_TX Register Summary
        2. 26.3.5.2 SATA_PHY_TX Register Description
      6. 26.3.6 DPLLCTRL Registers
        1. 26.3.6.1 DPLLCTRL Register Summary
        2. 26.3.6.2 DPLLCTRL Register Description
    4. 26.4 PCIe PHY Subsystem
      1. 26.4.1 PCIe PHY Subsystem Overview
        1. 26.4.1.1 PCIe PHY Subsystem Key Features
      2. 26.4.2 PCIe PHY Subsystem Environment
        1. 26.4.2.1 PCIe PHY I/O Signals
      3. 26.4.3 PCIe Shared PHY Subsystem Integration
      4. 26.4.4 PCIe PHY Subsystem Functional Description
        1. 26.4.4.1 PCIe PHY Subsystem Block Diagram
        2. 26.4.4.2 OCP2SCP Functional Description
          1. 26.4.4.2.1 OCP2SCP Reset
            1. 26.4.4.2.1.1 Hardware Reset
            2. 26.4.4.2.1.2 Software Reset
          2. 26.4.4.2.2 OCP2SCP Power Management
            1. 26.4.4.2.2.1 Idle Mode
            2. 26.4.4.2.2.2 Clock Gating
          3. 26.4.4.2.3 OCP2SCP Timing Registers
        3. 26.4.4.3 PCIe PHY Serializer and Deserializer Functional Descriptions
          1. 26.4.4.3.1 PCIe PHY Module Resets
            1. 26.4.4.3.1.1 Hardware Reset
            2. 26.4.4.3.1.2 Software Reset
          2. 26.4.4.3.2 PCIe PHY Subsystem Clocking
            1. 26.4.4.3.2.1 PCIe PHY Subsystem Input Clocks
            2. 26.4.4.3.2.2 PCIe PHY Subsystem Output Clocks
          3. 26.4.4.3.3 PCIe PHY Power Management
            1. 26.4.4.3.3.1 PCIe PHY Power-Up/-Down Sequences
            2. 26.4.4.3.3.2 PCIe PHY Low-Power Modes
            3. 26.4.4.3.3.3 Clock Gating
          4. 26.4.4.3.4 PCIe PHY Hardware Requests
        4. 26.4.4.4 PCIe PHY Clock Generator Subsystem Functional Description
          1. 26.4.4.4.1 PCIe PHY DPLL Clock Generator
            1. 26.4.4.4.1.1 PCIe PHY DPLL Clock Generator Overview
            2. 26.4.4.4.1.2 PCIe PHY DPLL Clock Generator Reset
            3. 26.4.4.4.1.3 PCIe PHY DPLL Low-Power Modes
            4. 26.4.4.4.1.4 PCIe PHY DPLL Clocks Configuration
              1. 26.4.4.4.1.4.1 PCIe PHY DPLL Input Clock Control
              2. 26.4.4.4.1.4.2 PCIe PHY DPLL Output Clock Configuration
                1. 26.4.4.4.1.4.2.1 PCIe PHY DPLL Output Clock Gating
            5. 26.4.4.4.1.5 PCIe PHY DPLL Subsystem Architecture
            6. 26.4.4.4.1.6 PCIe PHY DPLL Clock Generator Modes and State Transitions
              1. 26.4.4.4.1.6.1 PCIe PHY Clock Generator Power Up
              2. 26.4.4.4.1.6.2 PCIe PHY DPLL Sequences
              3. 26.4.4.4.1.6.3 PCIe PHY DPLL Locked Mode
              4. 26.4.4.4.1.6.4 PCIe PHY DPLL Idle-Bypass Mode
              5. 26.4.4.4.1.6.5 PCIe PHY DPLL Low Power Stop Mode
              6. 26.4.4.4.1.6.6 PCIe PHY DPLL Clock Programming Sequence
              7. 26.4.4.4.1.6.7 PCIe PHY DPLL Recommended Values
          2. 26.4.4.4.2 PCIe PHY APLL Clock Generator
            1. 26.4.4.4.2.1 PCIe PHY APLL Clock Generator Overview
            2. 26.4.4.4.2.2 PCIe PHY APLL Clock Generator Reset
            3. 26.4.4.4.2.3 PCIe PHY APLL Low-Power Mode
            4. 26.4.4.4.2.4 PCIe PHY APLL Clocks Configuration
              1. 26.4.4.4.2.4.1 PCIe PHY APLL Input Clock Control
              2. 26.4.4.4.2.4.2 PCIe PHY APLL Output Clock Configuration
                1. 26.4.4.4.2.4.2.1 PCIe PHY APLL Output Clock Gating
            5. 26.4.4.4.2.5 PCIe PHY APLL Subsystem Architecture
            6. 26.4.4.4.2.6 PCIe PHY APLL Clock Generator Modes and State Transitions
              1. 26.4.4.4.2.6.1 PCIe PHY APLL Clock Generator Power Up
              2. 26.4.4.4.2.6.2 PCIe PHY APLL Sequences
              3. 26.4.4.4.2.6.3 PCIe PHY APLL Locked Mode
          3. 26.4.4.4.3 ACSPCIE reference clock buffer
      5. 26.4.5 PCIePHY Subsystem Low-Level Programming Model
      6. 26.4.6 PCIe PHY Subsystem Register Manual
        1. 26.4.6.1 PCIe PHY Instance Summary
          1. 26.4.6.1.1 PCIe_PHY_RX Registers
            1. 26.4.6.1.1.1 PCIe_PHY_RX Register Summary
            2. 26.4.6.1.1.2 PCIe_PHY_RX Register Description
          2. 26.4.6.1.2 PCIe_PHY_TX Registers
            1. 26.4.6.1.2.1 PCIe_PHY_TX Register Summary
            2. 26.4.6.1.2.2 PCIe_PHY_TX Register Description
          3. 26.4.6.1.3 OCP2SCP Registers
            1. 26.4.6.1.3.1 OCP2SCP Register Summary
            2. 26.4.6.1.3.2 OCP2SCP Register Description
  29. 27General-Purpose Interface
    1. 27.1 General-Purpose Interface Overview
    2. 27.2 General-Purpose Interface Environment
      1. 27.2.1 General-Purpose Interface as a Keyboard Interface
      2. 27.2.2 General-Purpose Interface Signals
    3. 27.3 General-Purpose Interface Integration
    4. 27.4 General-Purpose Interface Functional Description
      1. 27.4.1 General-Purpose Interface Block Diagram
      2. 27.4.2 General-Purpose Interface Interrupt and Wake-Up Features
        1. 27.4.2.1 Synchronous Path: Interrupt Request Generation
        2. 27.4.2.2 Asynchronous Path: Wake-Up Request Generation
        3. 27.4.2.3 Wake-Up Event Conditions During Transition To/From IDLE State
        4. 27.4.2.4 Interrupt (or Wake-Up) Line Release
      3. 27.4.3 General-Purpose Interface Clock Configuration
        1. 27.4.3.1 Clocking
      4. 27.4.4 General-Purpose Interface Hardware and Software Reset
      5. 27.4.5 General-Purpose Interface Power Management
        1. 27.4.5.1 Power Domain
        2. 27.4.5.2 Power Management
          1. 27.4.5.2.1 Idle Scheme
          2. 27.4.5.2.2 Operating Modes
          3. 27.4.5.2.3 System Power Management and Wakeup
          4. 27.4.5.2.4 Module Power Saving
      6. 27.4.6 General-Purpose Interface Interrupt and Wake-Up Requests
        1. 27.4.6.1 Interrupt Requests Generation
        2. 27.4.6.2 Wake-Up Requests Generation
      7. 27.4.7 General-Purpose Interface Channels Description
      8. 27.4.8 General-Purpose Interface Data Input/Output Capabilities
      9. 27.4.9 General-Purpose Interface Set-and-Clear Protocol
        1. 27.4.9.1 Description
        2. 27.4.9.2 Clear Instruction
          1. 27.4.9.2.1 Clear Register Addresses
          2. 27.4.9.2.2 Clear Instruction Example
        3. 27.4.9.3 Set Instruction
          1. 27.4.9.3.1 Set Register Addresses
          2. 27.4.9.3.2 Set Instruction Example
    5. 27.5 General-Purpose Interface Programming Guide
      1. 27.5.1 General-Purpose Interface Low-Level Programming Models
        1. 27.5.1.1 Global Initialization
          1. 27.5.1.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
          2. 27.5.1.1.2 General-Purpose Interface Module Global Initialization
        2. 27.5.1.2 General-Purpose Interface Operational Modes Configuration
          1. 27.5.1.2.1 General-Purpose Interface Read Input Register
          2. 27.5.1.2.2 General-Purpose Interface Set Bit Function
          3. 27.5.1.2.3 General-Purpose Interface Clear Bit Function
    6. 27.6 General-Purpose Interface Register Manual
      1. 27.6.1 General-Purpose Interface Instance Summary
      2. 27.6.2 General-Purpose Interface Registers
        1. 27.6.2.1 General-Purpose Interface Register Summary
        2. 27.6.2.2 General-Purpose Interface Register Description
  30. 28Keyboard Controller
    1. 28.1 Keyboard Controller Overview
    2. 28.2 Keyboard Controller Environment
      1. 28.2.1 Keyboard Controller Functions/Modes
      2. 28.2.2 Keyboard Controller Signals
      3. 28.2.3 Protocols and Data Formats
    3. 28.3 Keyboard Controller Integration
    4. 28.4 Keyboard Controller Functional Description
      1. 28.4.1 Keyboard Controller Block Diagram
      2. 28.4.2 Keyboard Controller Software Reset
      3. 28.4.3 Keyboard Controller Power Management
      4. 28.4.4 Keyboard Controller Interrupt Requests
      5. 28.4.5 Keyboard Controller Software Mode
      6. 28.4.6 Keyboard Controller Hardware Decoding Modes
        1. 28.4.6.1 Functional Modes
        2. 28.4.6.2 Keyboard Controller Timer
        3. 28.4.6.3 State-Machine Status
        4. 28.4.6.4 Keyboard Controller Interrupt Generation
          1. 28.4.6.4.1 Interrupt-Generation Scheme
          2. 28.4.6.4.2 Keyboard Buffer and Missed Events (Overrun Feature)
      7. 28.4.7 Keyboard Controller Key Coding Registers
      8. 28.4.8 Keyboard Controller Register Access
        1. 28.4.8.1 Write Registers Access
        2. 28.4.8.2 Read Registers Access
    5. 28.5 Keyboard Controller Programming Guide
      1. 28.5.1 Keyboard Controller Low-Level Programming Models
        1. 28.5.1.1 Global Initialization
          1. 28.5.1.1.1 Surrounding Modules Global Initialization
          2. 28.5.1.1.2 Keyboard Controller Global Initialization
            1. 28.5.1.1.2.1 Main Sequence – Keyboard Controller Global Initialization
        2. 28.5.1.2 Operational Modes Configuration
          1. 28.5.1.2.1 Keyboard Controller in Hardware Decoding Mode (Default Mode)
            1. 28.5.1.2.1.1 Main Sequence – Keyboard Controller Hardware Mode
          2. 28.5.1.2.2 Keyboard Controller Software Scanning Mode
            1. 28.5.1.2.2.1 Main Sequence – Keyboard Controller Software Mode
          3. 28.5.1.2.3 Using the Timer
          4. 28.5.1.2.4 State-Machine Status Register
        3. 28.5.1.3 Keyboard Controller Events Servicing
    6. 28.6 Keyboard Controller Register Manual
      1. 28.6.1 Keyboard Controller Instance Summary
      2. 28.6.2 Keyboard Controller Registers
        1. 28.6.2.1 Keyboard Controller Register Summary
        2. 28.6.2.2 Keyboard Controller Register Description
  31. 29Pulse-Width Modulation Subsystem
    1. 29.1 PWM Subsystem Resources
      1. 29.1.1 PWMSS Overview
        1. 29.1.1.1 PWMSS Key Features
        2. 29.1.1.2 PWMSS Unsupported Fetaures
      2. 29.1.2 PWMSS Environment
        1. 29.1.2.1 PWMSS I/O Interface
      3. 29.1.3 PWMSS Integration
        1. 29.1.3.1 PWMSS Module Interfaces Implementation
          1. 29.1.3.1.1 Device Specific PWMSS Features
          2. 29.1.3.1.2 Daisy-Chain Connectivity between PWMSS Modules
          3. 29.1.3.1.3 eHRPWM Modules Time Base Clock Gating
      4. 29.1.4 PWMSS Subsystem Power, Reset and Clock Configuration
        1. 29.1.4.1 PWMSS Local Clock Management
        2. 29.1.4.2 PWMSS Modules Local Clock Gating
        3. 29.1.4.3 PWMSS Software Reset
      5. 29.1.5 PWMSS_CFG Register Manual
        1. 29.1.5.1 PWMSS_CFG Instance Summary
        2. 29.1.5.2 PWMSS_CFG Registers
          1. 29.1.5.2.1 PWMSS_CFG Register Summary
          2. 29.1.5.2.2 PWMSS_CFG Register Description
    2. 29.2 Enhanced PWM (ePWM) Module
    3. 29.3 Enhanced Capture (eCAP) Module
    4. 29.4 Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse (eQEP) Module
  32. 30Viterbi-Decoder Coprocessor
    1. 30.1 VCP Overview
      1. 30.1.1 VCP Features
    2. 30.2 VCP Integration
    3. 30.3 VCP Functional Description
      1. 30.3.1  VCP Block Diagram
      2. 30.3.2  VCP Internal Interfaces
        1. 30.3.2.1 VCP Power Management
          1. 30.3.2.1.1 Idle Mode
        2. 30.3.2.2 VCP Clocks
        3. 30.3.2.3 VCP Resets
        4. 30.3.2.4 Interrupt Requests
        5. 30.3.2.5 EDMA Requests
      3. 30.3.3  Functional Overview
        1. 30.3.3.1 Theoretical Basics of the Convolutional Code.
        2. 30.3.3.2 4556
      4. 30.3.4  VCP Architecture
        1. 30.3.4.1 Sliding Windows Processing
          1. 30.3.4.1.1 Tailed Traceback Mode
          2. 30.3.4.1.2 Mixed Traceback Mode
          3. 30.3.4.1.3 Convergent Traceback Mode
          4. 30.3.4.1.4 F, R, and C Limitations
          5. 30.3.4.1.5 Yamamoto Parameters
          6. 30.3.4.1.6 Input FIFO (Branch Metrics)
          7. 30.3.4.1.7 Output FIFO (Decisions)
      5. 30.3.5  VCP Input Data
        1. 30.3.5.1 Branch Metrics Calculations
      6. 30.3.6  Soft Input Dynamic Ranges
      7. 30.3.7  VCP Memory Sleep Mode
      8. 30.3.8  Decision Data
      9. 30.3.9  Endianness
        1. 30.3.9.1 Branch Metrics
          1. 30.3.9.1.1 Hard Decisions
          2. 30.3.9.1.2 Soft Decisions
      10. 30.3.10 VCP Output Parameters
      11. 30.3.11 Event Generation
        1. 30.3.11.1 VCPnXEVT Generation
        2. 30.3.11.2 VCPnREVT Generation
      12. 30.3.12 Operational Modes
        1. 30.3.12.1 Debugging Features
      13. 30.3.13 Errors and Status
    4. 30.4 VCP Modules Programming Guide
      1. 30.4.1 EDMA Resources
        1. 30.4.1.1 VCP1 and VCP2 Dedicated EDMA Resources
        2. 30.4.1.2 Special VCP EDMA Programming Considerations
          1. 30.4.1.2.1 Input Configuration Parameters Transfer
          2. 30.4.1.2.2 Branch Metrics Transfer
          3. 30.4.1.2.3 Decisions Transfer
          4. 30.4.1.2.4 Hard-Decisions Mode
          5. 30.4.1.2.5 Soft-Decisions Mode
          6. 30.4.1.2.6 Output Parameters Transfer
      2. 30.4.2 Input Configuration Words
    5. 30.5 VCP Register Manual
      1. 30.5.1 VCP1 and VCP2 Instance Summary
      2. 30.5.2 VCP Registers
        1. 30.5.2.1 VCP Register Summary
        2. 30.5.2.2 VCP1 and VCP2 Data Registers Description
        3. 30.5.2.3 VCP1 and VCP2 Configuration Registers Description
  33. 31Audio Tracking Logic
    1. 31.1 ATL Overview
    2. 31.2 ATL Environment
      1. 31.2.1 ATL Functions
      2. 31.2.2 ATL Signals Descriptions
    3. 31.3 ATL Integration
      1. 31.3.1 ATL Distribution on Interconnects
      2. 31.3.2 ATL Regions Allocations
    4. 31.4 ATL Functional Description
      1. 31.4.1 Block Diagram
      2. 31.4.2 Source Signal Control
      3. 31.4.3 ATL Clock and Reset Configuration
    5. 31.5 ATL Register Manual
      1. 31.5.1 ATL Instance Summary
      2. 31.5.2 ATL Register Summary
      3. 31.5.3 ATL Register Description
  34. 32Initialization
    1. 32.1 Initialization Overview
      1. 32.1.1 Terminology
      2. 32.1.2 Initialization Process
    2. 32.2 Preinitialization
      1. 32.2.1 Power Requirements
      2. 32.2.2 Interaction With the PMIC Companion
      3. 32.2.3 Clock, Reset, and Control
        1. 32.2.3.1 Overview
        2. 32.2.3.2 Clocking Scheme
        3. 32.2.3.3 Reset Configuration
          1. 32.2.3.3.1 ON/OFF Interconnect and Power-On-Reset
          2. 32.2.3.3.2 Warm Reset
          3. 32.2.3.3.3 Peripheral Reset by GPIO
          4. 32.2.3.3.4 Warm Reset Impact on GPIOs
        4. 32.2.3.4 PMIC Control
        5. 32.2.3.5 PMIC Request Signals
      4. 32.2.4 Sysboot Configuration
        1. 32.2.4.1 GPMC Configuration for XIP/NAND
        2. 32.2.4.2 System Clock Speed Selection
        3. 32.2.4.3 QSPI Redundant SBL Images Offset
        4. 32.2.4.4 Booting Device Order Selection
        5. 32.2.4.5 4637
        6. 32.2.4.6 Boot Peripheral Pin Multiplexing
    3. 32.3 Device Initialization by ROM Code
      1. 32.3.1 Booting Overview
        1. 32.3.1.1 Booting Types
        2. 32.3.1.2 ROM Code Architecture
      2. 32.3.2 Memory Maps
        1. 32.3.2.1 ROM Memory Map
        2. 32.3.2.2 RAM Memory Map
      3. 32.3.3 Overall Booting Sequence
      4. 32.3.4 Startup and Configuration
        1. 32.3.4.1 Startup
        2. 32.3.4.2 Control Module Configuration
        3. 32.3.4.3 PRCM Module Mode Configuration
        4. 32.3.4.4 Clocking Configuration
        5. 32.3.4.5 Booting Device List Setup
      5. 32.3.5 Peripheral Booting
        1. 32.3.5.1 Description
        2. 32.3.5.2 Initialization Phase for UART Boot
        3. 32.3.5.3 Initialization Phase for USB Boot
          1. 32.3.5.3.1 Initialization Procedure
          2. 32.3.5.3.2 SATA Peripheral Device Flashing over USB Interface
          3. 32.3.5.3.3 USB Driver Descriptors
          4. 32.3.5.3.4 4660
          5. 32.3.5.3.5 USB Customized Vendor and Product IDs
          6. 32.3.5.3.6 USB Driver Functionality
      6. 32.3.6 Fast External Booting
        1. 32.3.6.1 Overview
        2. 32.3.6.2 Fast External Booting Procedure
      7. 32.3.7 Memory Booting
        1. 32.3.7.1 Overview
        2. 32.3.7.2 Non-XIP Memory
        3. 32.3.7.3 XIP Memory
          1. 32.3.7.3.1 GPMC Initialization
        4. 32.3.7.4 NAND
          1. 32.3.7.4.1 Initialization and NAND Detection
          2. 32.3.7.4.2 NAND Read Sector Procedure
        5. 32.3.7.5 SPI/QSPI Flash Devices
        6. 32.3.7.6 eMMC Memories and SD Cards
          1. 32.3.7.6.1 eMMC Memories
            1. 32.3.7.6.1.1 System Conditions and Limitations
            2. 32.3.7.6.1.2 eMMC Memory Connection
          2. 32.3.7.6.2 SD Cards
            1. 32.3.7.6.2.1 System Conditions and Limitations
            2. 32.3.7.6.2.2 SD Card Connection
            3. 32.3.7.6.2.3 Booting Procedure
            4. 32.3.7.6.2.4 eMMC Partitions Handling in Alternative Boot Operation Mode
              1. 32.3.7.6.2.4.1 eMMC Devices Preflashing
              2. 32.3.7.6.2.4.2 eMMC Device State After ROM Code Execution
              3. 32.3.7.6.2.4.3 Consideration on device Global Warm Reset
              4. 32.3.7.6.2.4.4 Booting Image Size
              5. 32.3.7.6.2.4.5 Booting Image Layout
          3. 32.3.7.6.3 Initialization and Detection
          4. 32.3.7.6.4 Read Sector Procedure
          5. 32.3.7.6.5 File System Handling
            1. 32.3.7.6.5.1 MBR and FAT File System
        7. 32.3.7.7 SATA Device Boot Operation
          1. 32.3.7.7.1 SATA Booting Overview
          2. 32.3.7.7.2 SATA Power-Up Initialization Sequence
          3. 32.3.7.7.3 System Conditions and Limitations for SATA Boot
          4. 32.3.7.7.4 SATA Read Sector Procedure in FAT Mode
      8. 32.3.8 Image Format
        1. 32.3.8.1 Overview
        2. 32.3.8.2 Configuration Header
          1. 32.3.8.2.1 CHSETTINGS Item
          2. 32.3.8.2.2 CHFLASH Item
          3. 32.3.8.2.3 CHMMCSD Item
          4. 32.3.8.2.4 CHQSPI Item
        3. 32.3.8.3 GP Header
        4. 32.3.8.4 Image Execution
      9. 32.3.9 Tracing
    4. 32.4 Services for HLOS Support
      1. 32.4.1 Hypervisor
      2. 32.4.2 Caches Maintenance
      3. 32.4.3 CP15 Registers
      4. 32.4.4 Wakeup Generator
      5. 32.4.5 Arm Timer
  35. 33On-Chip Debug Support
    1. 33.1  Introduction
      1. 33.1.1 Key Features
    2. 33.2  Debug Interfaces
      1. 33.2.1 IEEE1149.1
      2. 33.2.2 Debug (Trace) Port
      3. 33.2.3 Trace Connector and Board Layout Considerations
    3. 33.3  Debugger Connection
      1. 33.3.1 ICEPick Module
      2. 33.3.2 ICEPick Boot Modes
        1. 33.3.2.1 Default Boot Mode
        2. 33.3.2.2 Wait-In-Reset
      3. 33.3.3 Dynamic TAP Insertion
        1. 33.3.3.1 ICEPick Secondary TAPs
    4. 33.4  Primary Debug Support
      1. 33.4.1 Processor Native Debug Support
        1. 33.4.1.1 Cortex-A15 Processor
        2. 33.4.1.2 Cortex-M4 Processor
        3. 33.4.1.3 DSP C66x
        4. 33.4.1.4 IVA Arm968
        5. 33.4.1.5 ARP32
        6. 33.4.1.6 4735
      2. 33.4.2 Cross-Triggering
        1. 33.4.2.1 SoC-Level Cross-Triggering
        2. 33.4.2.2 Cross-Triggering With External Device
      3. 33.4.3 Suspend
        1. 33.4.3.1 Debug Aware Peripherals and Host Processors
    5. 33.5  Real-Time Debug
      1. 33.5.1 Real-Time Debug Events
        1. 33.5.1.1 Emulation Interrupts
    6. 33.6  Power, Reset, and Clock Management Debug Support
      1. 33.6.1 Power and Clock Management
        1. 33.6.1.1 Power and Clock Control Override From Debugger
          1. 33.6.1.1.1 Debugger Directives
            1. 33.6.1.1.1.1 FORCEACTIVE Debugger Directive
            2. 33.6.1.1.1.2 INHIBITSLEEP Debugger Directive
          2. 33.6.1.1.2 Intrusive Debug Model
        2. 33.6.1.2 Debug Across Power Transition
          1. 33.6.1.2.1 Nonintrusive Debug Model
          2. 33.6.1.2.2 Debug Context Save and Restore
            1. 33.6.1.2.2.1 Debug Context Save
            2. 33.6.1.2.2.2 Debug Context Restore
      2. 33.6.2 Reset Management
        1. 33.6.2.1 Debugger Directives
          1. 33.6.2.1.1 Assert Reset
          2. 33.6.2.1.2 Block Reset
          3. 33.6.2.1.3 Wait-In-Reset
    7. 33.7  Performance Monitoring
      1. 33.7.1 MPU Subsystem Performance Monitoring
        1. 33.7.1.1 Performance Monitoring Unit
        2. 33.7.1.2 L2 Cache Controller
      2. 33.7.2 IPU Subsystem Performance Monitoring
        1. 33.7.2.1 Subsystem Counter Timer Module
        2. 33.7.2.2 Cache Events
      3. 33.7.3 DSP Subsystem Performance Monitoring
        1. 33.7.3.1 Advanced Event Triggering
      4. 33.7.4 EVE Subsystem Performance Monitoring
        1. 33.7.4.1 EVE Subsystem Counter Timer Module
        2. 33.7.4.2 EVE Subsystem SCTM Events
    8. 33.8  MPU Memory Adaptor (MPU_MA) Watchpoint
    9. 33.9  Processor Trace
      1. 33.9.1 Cortex-A15 Processor Trace
      2. 33.9.2 DSP Processor Trace
      3. 33.9.3 Trace Export
        1. 33.9.3.1 Trace Exported to External Trace Receiver
        2. 33.9.3.2 Trace Captured Into On-Chip Trace Buffer
        3. 33.9.3.3 Trace Exported Through USB
    10. 33.10 System Instrumentation
      1. 33.10.1  MIPI STM (CT_STM)
      2. 33.10.2  System Trace Export
        1. 33.10.2.1 CT_STM ATB Export
        2. 33.10.2.2 Trace Streams Interleaving
      3. 33.10.3  Software Instrumentation
        1. 33.10.3.1 MPU Software Instrumentation
        2. 33.10.3.2 SoC Software Instrumentation
      4. 33.10.4  OCP Watchpoint
        1. 33.10.4.1 OCP Target Traffic Monitoring
        2. 33.10.4.2 Messages Triggered from System Events
        3. 33.10.4.3 DMA Transfer Profiling
      5. 33.10.5  IVA Pipeline
      6. 33.10.6  EVE SMSET
      7. 33.10.7  L3 NOC Statistics Collector
        1. 33.10.7.1 L3 Target Load Monitoring
        2. 33.10.7.2 L3 Master Latency Monitoring
          1. 33.10.7.2.1  SC_LAT0 Configuration
          2. 33.10.7.2.2  SC_LAT1 Configuration
          3. 33.10.7.2.3  SC_LAT2 Configuration
          4. 33.10.7.2.4  SC_LAT3 Configuration
          5. 33.10.7.2.5  SC_LAT4 Configuration
          6. 33.10.7.2.6  SC_LAT5 Configuration
          7. 33.10.7.2.7  SC_LAT6 Configuration
          8. 33.10.7.2.8  SC_LAT7 Configuration
          9. 33.10.7.2.9  SC_LAT8 Configuration
          10. 33.10.7.2.10 Statistics Collector Alarm Mode
          11. 33.10.7.2.11 Statistics Collector Suspend Mode
      8. 33.10.8  PM Instrumentation
      9. 33.10.9  CM Instrumentation
      10. 33.10.10 Master-ID Encoding
        1. 33.10.10.1 Software Masters
        2. 33.10.10.2 Hardware Masters
    11. 33.11 Concurrent Debug Modes
    12. 33.12 DRM Register Manual
      1. 33.12.1 DRM Instance Summary
      2. 33.12.2 DRM Registers
        1. 33.12.2.1 DRM Register Summary
        2. 33.12.2.2 DRM Register Description
  36. 34Glossary
  37. 35Revision History

25.6.2.2 eMMC/SD/SDIO Register Description

Table 25-60 MMCHS_HL_REV
Address Offset0x0000 0000
Physical Address0x4809 C000
0x480B 4000
0x480A D000
0x480D 1000		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionIP Revision Identifier (X.Y.R)
Used by software to track features, bugs, and compatibility
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
REVISION
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:0REVISIONIP RevisionRTI internal data
Table 25-61 MMCHS_HL_HWINFO
Address Offset0x0000 0004
Physical Address0x4809 C004
0x480B 4004
0x480A D004
0x480D 1004		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionInformation about the IP module's hardware configuration.
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDRETMODEMEM_SIZEMERGE_MEMMADMA_EN
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:7RESERVEDR0x-
6RETMODERetention Mode generic parameter

This bit field indicates whether the retention mode is supported using the pin PIRFFRET.		R0x-
Read 0x1: Retention mode enabled
Read 0x0: Retention mode disabled
5:2MEM_SIZEMemory size for FIFO buffer:R0x-
Read 0x2: Memory of 1024 bytes, max block length is 1024 bytes
Read 0x1: Memory of 512 bytes, max block length is 512 bytes
Read 0x8: Memory of 4096 bytes, max block length is 2048 bytes
Read 0x4: Memory of 2048 bytes, max block length is 2048 bytes
1MERGE_MEMMemory merged for FIFO buffer:

This register defines the configuration of FIFO buffer architecture. If the bit is set STA and DFT shall support clock multiplexing and balancing.		R0x-
Read 0x1: A single memory is used with multiplexed addresses, data and clocks.
Read 0x0: 2 memories instantiated, one per data transfer direction.
0MADMA_ENMaster DMA enabled generic parameter:

This register defines the configuration of the controller to know if it supports the master DMA management called ADMA.		R0x-
Read 0x1: Controller supports ADMA
Read 0x0: No Master DMA (ADMA) management supported
Table 25-62 MMCHS_HL_SYSCONFIG
Address Offset0x0000 0010
Physical Address0x4809 C010
0x480B 4010
0x480A D010
0x480D 1010		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionClock Management Configuration Register
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDSTANDBYMODEIDLEMODEFREEEMUSOFTRESET
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:6RESERVEDR0x000 0000
5:4STANDBYMODEConfiguration of the local initiator state management mode.
By definition, initiator may generate read/write transaction as long as it is out of STANDBY state.		RW0x2
0x0: Force-standby mode: local initiator is unconditionally placed in standby state.Backup mode, for debug only.
0x1: No-standby mode: local initiator is unconditionally placed out of standby state.Backup mode, for debug only.
0x3: Smart-Standby wakeup-capable mode: local initiator standby status depends on local conditions, i.e. the module's functional requirement from the initiator. IP module may generate (master-related) wakeup events when in standby state.Mode is only relevant if the appropriate IP module "mwakeup" output is implemented.
0x2: Smart-standby mode: local initiator standby status depends on local conditions, i.e. the module's functional requirement from the initiator.IP module shall not generate (initiator-related) wakeup events.
3:2IDLEMODEConfiguration of the local target state management mode.
By definition, target can handle read/write transaction as long as it is out of IDLE state.		RW0x2
0x0: Force-idle mode: local target's idle state follows (acknowledges) the system's IDLE requests unconditionally, i.e. regardless of the IP module's internal requirements.Backup mode, for debug only.
0x1: No-idle mode: local target never enters idle state.Backup mode, for debug only.
0x3: Smart-idle wakeup-capable mode: local target's idle state eventually follows (acknowledges) the system's IDLE requests, depending on the IP module's internal requirements.IP module may generate (IRQ- or DMA-request-related) wakeup events when in idle state.Mode is only relevant if the appropriate IP module "swakeup" output(s) is (are) implemented.
0x2: Smart-idle mode: local target's idle state eventually follows (acknowledges) the system's IDLE requests, depending on the IP module's internal requirements.IP module shall not generate (IRQ- or DMA-request-related) wakeup events.
1FREEEMUSensitivity to emulation (debug) suspend input signal.
Functionality NOT implemented in MMCHS.		RW0
0x0: IP module is sensitive to emulation suspend
0x1: IP module is not sensitive to emulation suspend
0SOFTRESETSoftware reset. (Optional)RW0
Write 0x0: No action
Write 0x1: Initiate software reset
Read 0x1: Reset (software or other) ongoing
Read 0x0: Reset done, no pending action
Table 25-63 MMCHS_SYSCONFIG
Address Offset0x0000 0110
Physical Address0x4809 C110
0x480B 4110
0x480A D110
0x480D 1110		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionSystem Configuration Register

This register allows controlling various parameters of the Interconnect interface.
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDSTANDBYMODERESERVEDCLOCKACTIVITYRESERVEDSIDLEMODEENAWAKEUPSOFTRESETAUTOIDLE
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:14RESERVEDR0x0 0000
13:12STANDBYMODEMaster interface power Management, standby/wait control.
The bit field is only useful when generic parameter MMCHS_HL_HWINFO[0] MADMA_EN (Master ADMA enable) is set as active, otherwise it is a read only register read a '0'.		RW0x2
0x0: Force-standby. Mstandby is forced unconditionnaly.
0x1: No-standby. Mstandby is never asserted.
0x2: Smart-standby mode:
local initiator standby status depends on local conditions, i.e. the module's functional requirement from the initiator.IP module shall not generate (initiator-related) wakeup events.
11:10RESERVEDR0x0
9:8CLOCKACTIVITYClocks activity during wake up mode period.

Bit8: Interface clock
Bit9: Functional clock		RW0x0
0x0: Interface and Functional clock may be switched off.
0x1: Interface clock is maintained. Functional clock may be switched-off.
0x3: Interface and Functional clocks are maintained.
0x2: Functional clock is maintained. Interface clock may be switched-off.
7:5RESERVEDThis bit is initialized to zero, and writes to it are ignored. Reads return 0.R0x0
4:3SIDLEMODEPower managementRW0x2
0x0: If an IDLE request is detected, the MMCHS acknowledges it unconditionally and goes in Inactive mode. Interrupt and DMA requests are unconditionally de-asserted.
0x1: If an IDLE request is detected, the request is ignored and the module keeps on behaving normally.
0x3: Smart-idle wakeup-capable mode:
local target's idle state eventually follows (acknowledges) the system's IDLE requests, depending on the IP module's internal requirements.IP module may generate (IRQ- or DMA-request-related) wakeup events when in idle state.Mode is only relevant if the appropriate IP module "swakeup" output(s) is (are) implemented.
0x2: Smart-idle mode:
local target's idle state eventually follows (acknowledges) the system's IDLE requests, depending on the IP module's internal requirements.IP module shall not generate (IRQ- or DMA-request-related) wakeup events.
2ENAWAKEUPWakeup feature controlRW1
0x0: Wakeup capability is disabled
0x1: Wakeup capability is enabled
1SOFTRESETSoftware reset.

The bit is automatically reset by the hardware. During reset, it always returns 0.		RW0
Write 0x0: No effect.
Write 0x1: Trigger a module reset.
Read 0x1: The module is reset.
Read 0x0: Normal mode
0AUTOIDLEInternal Clock gating strategyRW1
0x0: Clocks are free-running
0x1: Automatic clock gating strategy is applied, based on the Interconnect and MMC interface activity
Table 25-64 MMCHS_SYSSTATUS
Address Offset0x0000 0114
Physical Address0x4809 C114
0x480B 4114
0x480A D114
0x480D 1114		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionSystem Status Register

This register provides status information about the module excluding the interrupt status information
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDRESETDONE
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:1RESERVEDR0x0000 0000
0RESETDONEInternal Reset Monitoring

Note: the debounce clock , the system clock (Interface) and the functional clock shall be provided to the MMC/SD/SDIO host controller to allow the internal reset monitoring.		R0
Read 0x1: Reset completed.
Read 0x0: Internal module reset is on-going
Table 25-65 MMCHS_CSRE
Address Offset0x0000 0124
Physical Address0x4809 C124
0x480B 4124
0x480A D124
0x480D 1124		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionCard Status Response Error

This register enables the host controller to detect card status errors of response type R1, R1b for all cards and of R5, R5b and R6 response for cards types SD or SDIO.

When a bit MMCHS_CSRE[i] is set to 1, if the corresponding bit at the same position in the response MMCHS_RSP0[i] is set to 1, the host controller indicates a card error (MMCHS_STAT[CERR]) interrupt status to avoid the host driver reading the response register (MMCHS_RSP0).

Note: No automatic card error detection for autoCMD12 is implemented; the host system has to check autoCMD12 response register (MMCHS_RESP76) for possible card errors.
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
CSRE
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:0CSRECard status response errorRW0x0000 0000
Table 25-66 MMCHS_SYSTEST
Address Offset0x0000 0128
Physical Address0x4809 C128
0x480B 4128
0x480A D128
0x480D 1128		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionSystem Test Register

This register is used to control the signals that connect to I/O pins when the module is configured in system test (SYSTEST) mode for boundary connectivity verification.

Note: In SYSTEST mode, a write into MMCHS_CMD register will not start a transfer. The buffer behaves as a stack accessible only by the local host (push and pop operations). In this mode, the Transfer Block Size (MMCHS_BLK[BLEN]) and the Blocks count for current transfer (MMCHS_BLK[NBLK]) are needed to generate a Buffer write ready interrupt (MMCHS_STAT[BWR]) or a Buffer read ready interrupt (MMCHS_STAT[BRR]) and DMA requests if enabled.
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDOBISDCDSDWPWAKDSSBD7DD6DD5DD4DD3DD2DD1DD0DDDIRCDATCDIRMCKD
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:17RESERVEDR0x0000
16OBIOut-Of-Band Interrupt (OBI) data valueR0
Read 0x1: The Out-of-Band Interrupt pin is driven high.
Read 0x0: The Out-of-Band Interrupt pin is driven low.
15SDCDCard detect input signal (mmci_sdcd) data valueR0
Read 0x1: The card detect pin is driven high.
Read 0x0: The card detect pin is driven low.
14SDWPWrite protect input signal (mmci_sdwp) data valueR0
Read 0x1: The write protect pin mmci_sdwp is driven high.
Read 0x0: The write protect pin mmci_sdwp is driven low.
13WAKDWake request output signal data valueRW0
Write 0x0: The pin SWAKEUP is driven low.
Write 0x1: The pin SWAKEUP is driven high.
Read 0x1: No action. Returns 1.
Read 0x0: No action. Returns 0.
12SSBSet status bit

This bit must be cleared prior attempting to clear a status bit of the interrupt status register (MMCHS_STAT).		RW0
Write 0x0: Clear this SSB bitfield. Writing 0 does not clear already set status bits;
Write 0x1: Force to 1 all status bits of the interrupt status register (MMCHS_STAT) only if the corresponding bitfield in the Interrupt signal enable register (MMCHS_ISE) is set.
Read 0x1: No action. Returns 1.
Read 0x0: No action. Returns 0.
11D7DDAT7 input/output signal data valueRW0
Write 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT7 line is driven low.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Write 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT7 line is driven high.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Read 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT7 line (high)
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 1
Read 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT7 line (low).
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 0
10D6DDAT6 input/output signal data valueRW0
Write 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT6 line is driven low.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Write 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT6 line is driven high.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Read 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT6 line (high)
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 1
Read 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT6 line (low).
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 0
9D5DDAT5 input/output signal data valueRW0
Write 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT5 line is driven low.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Write 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT5 line is driven high.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Read 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT5 line (high)
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 1
Read 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT5 line (low).
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 0
8D4DDAT4 input/output signal data valueRW0
Write 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT4 line is driven low.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Write 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT4 line is driven high.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Read 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT4 line (high)
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 1
Read 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT4 line (low).
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 0
7D3DDAT3 input/output signal data valueRW0
Write 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT3 line is driven low.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Write 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT3 line is driven high.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Read 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT3 line (high)
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 1
Read 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT3 line (low).
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 0
6D2DDAT2 input/output signal data valueRW0
Write 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT2 line is driven low.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Write 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT2 line is driven high.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Read 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT2 line (high)
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 1
Read 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT2 line (low).
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 0
5D1DDAT1 input/output signal data value
RW0
Write 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT1 line is driven low.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Write 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT1 line is driven high.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Read 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT1 line (high)
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 1
Read 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT1 line (low).
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 0
4D0DDAT0 input/output signal data valueRW0
Write 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT0 line is driven low.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Write 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the DAT0 line is driven high.
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Read 0x1: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT0 line (high)
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 1
Read 0x0: If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the DAT0 line (low).
If SYSTEST[DDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 0
3DDIRControl of the DAT[7:0] pins direction.RW0
Write 0x0: The DAT lines are outputs (host to card)
Write 0x1: The DAT lines are inputs (card to host)
Read 0x1: No action. Returns 1.
Read 0x0: No action. Returns 0.
2CDATCMD input/output signal data valueRW0
Write 0x0: If SYSTEST[CDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the CMD line is driven low.
If SYSTEST[CDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Write 0x1: If SYSTEST[CDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), the CMD line is driven high.
If SYSTEST[CDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), no effect.
Read 0x1: If SYSTEST[CDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the CMD line (high)
If SYSTEST[CDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 1
Read 0x0: If SYSTEST[CDIR] = 1 (input mode direction), returns the value on the CMD line (low).
If SYSTEST[CDIR] = 0 (output mode direction), returns 0
1CDIRControl of the CMD pin direction.RW0
Write 0x0: The CMD line is an output (host to card)
Write 0x1: The CMD line is an input (card to host)
Read 0x1: No action. Returns 1.
Read 0x0: No action. Returns 0.
0MCKDMMC clock output signal data valueRW0
Write 0x0: The output clock is driven low.
Write 0x1: The output clock is driven high.
Read 0x1: No action. Returns 1.
Read 0x0: No action. Returns 0.
Table 25-67 MMCHS_CON
Address Offset0x0000 012C
Physical Address0x4809 C12C
0x480B 412C
0x480A D12C
0x480D 112C		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionConfiguration Register

This register is used:
- to select the functional mode or the SYSTEST mode for any card.
- to send an initialization sequence to any card.
- to enable the detection on DAT[1] of a card interrupt for SDIO cards only.
and also to configure :
- specific data and command transfers for MMC cards only.
- the parameters related to the card detect and write protect input signals.
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDSDMA_LNEDMA_MNSDDRBOOT_CF0BOOT_ACKCLKEXTFREEPADENOBIEOBIPCEATACTPLDVALWPPCDPMITDW8MODESTRHRINITOD
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:22RESERVEDR0x000
21SDMA_LNESlave DMA Level/Edge Request:

The waveform of the DMA request can be configured either edge sensitive with early de-assertion on first access to MMCHS_DATA register or late de-assertion, request remains active until last allowed data written into MMCHS_DATA.		RW0
0x0: Slave DMA edge sensitive, Early DMA de-assertion
0x1: Slave DMA level sensitive, Late DMA de-assertion
20DMA_MNSDMA Master or Slave selection:

When this bit is set and the controller is configured to use the DMA, Interconnect master interface is used to get datas from system using ADMA2 procedure (direct access to the memory).This option is only available if generic parameter MADMA_EN is asserted to '1'.		RW0
0x0: The controller is slave on data transfers with system.
0x1: The controller is master on data exchange with system, controller must be configured as using DMA.
19DDRDual Data Rate mode:

When this register is set, the controller uses both clock edge to emit or receive data. Odd bytes are transmitted on falling edges and even bytes are transmitted on rise edges. It only applies on Data bytes and CRC, Start, end bits and CRC status are kept full cycle.
This bit field is only meaningful and active for even clock divider ratio of MMCHS_SYSCTL[CLKD], it is insensitive to MMCHS_HCTL[HSPE] setting.		RW0
0x0: Standard mode : data are transmitted on a single edge depending on MMCHS_HCTRL[HSPE].
0x1: Data Bytes and CRC are transmitted on both edge.
18BOOT_CF0Boot status supported:

This register is set when the CMD line need to be forced to '0' for a boot sequence. CMD line is driven to '0' after writing in MMCHS_CMD. The line is released when this bit field is de-asserted and abort data transfer in case of a pending transaction.		RW0
Write 0x0: CMD line is released when it was previously forced to '0' by a boot sequence.
Write 0x1: CMD line forced to '0' is enabled and will be active after writing into MMCHS_CMD
Read 0x1: CMD line forced to '0' is enabled
Read 0x0: CMD line not forced
17BOOT_ACKBoot acknowledge received:
When this bit is set the controller should receive a boot status on DAT0 line after next command issued. If no status is received a data timeout will be generated.		RW0
0x0: No acknowledge to be received
0x1: A boot status will be received on DAT0 line after issuing a command.
16CLKEXTFREEExternal clock free running:

This register is used to maintain card clock out of transfer transaction to enable slave module for example to generate a synchronous interrupt on DAT[1]. The Clock will be maintain only if MMCHS_SYSCTL[CEN] is set.		RW0
0x0: External card clock is cut off outside active transaction period.
0x1: External card clock is maintain even out of active transaction period only if MMCHS_SYSCTL[CEN] is set.
15PADENControl Power for MMC Lines:

This register is only useful when MMC PADs contain power saving mechanism to minimize its leakage power. It works as a GPIO that directly control the ACTIVE pin of PADs. Excepted for DAT[1], the signal is also combine outside the module with the dedicated power control MMCHS_CON[CTPL] bit.		RW0
0x0: ADPIDLE module pin is not forced, it is automatically generated by the MMC fsms.
0x1: ADPIDLE module pin is forced to active state.
14OBIEOut-of-Band Interrupt Enable
MMC cards only:
This bit enables the detection of Out-of-Band Interrupt on MMCOBI input pin.
The usage of the Out-of-Band signal (OBI) is optional and depends on the system integration.		RW0
0x0: Out-of-Band interrupt detection disabled
0x1: Out-of-Band interrupt detection enabled
13OBIPOut-of-Band Interrupt Polarity
MMC cards only:
This bit selects the active level of the out-of-band interrupt coming from MMC cards.
The usage of the Out-of-Band signal (OBI) is optional and depends on the system integration.		RW0
0x0: Active high level
0x1: Active low level
12CEATACE-ATA control mode

MMC cards compliant with CE-ATA:By default, this bit is set to 0. It is used to indicate that next commands are considered as specific CE-ATA commands that potentially use 'command completion' features.		RW0
0x0: Standard MMC/SD/SDIO mode.
0x1: CE-ATA mode next commands are considered as CE-ATA commands.
11CTPLControl Power for DAT[1] line

MMC and SD cards:
By default, this bit is set to 0 and the host controller automatically disables all the input buffers outside of a transaction to minimize the leakage current.

SDIO cards:
When this bit is set to 1, the host controller automatically disables all the input buffers except the buffer of DAT[1] outside of a transaction in order to detect asynchronous card interrupt on DAT[1] line and minimize the leakage current of the buffers.		RW0
0x0: Disable all the input buffers outside of a transaction.
0x1: Disable all the input buffers except the buffer of DAT[1]
outside of a transaction.
10:9DVALDebounce filter value

All cards

This register is used to define a debounce period to filter the card detect input signal (mmci_sdcd).
The usage of the card detect input signal (mmci_sdcd) is optional and depends on the system integration and the type of the connector housing that accommodates the card.		RW0x3
0x0: 33 us debounce period
0x1: 231 us debounce period
0x3: 8,4 ms debounce period
0x2: 1 ms debounce period
8WPPWrite protect polarity

For SD and SDIO cards only

This bit selects the active level of the write protect input signal (mmci_sdwp).
The usage of the write protect input signal (mmci_sdwp) is optional and depends on the system integration and the type of the connector housing that accommodates the card.		RW0
0x0: Active high level
0x1: Active low level
7CDPCard detect polarity

All cards

This bit selects the active level of the card detect input signal (mmci_sdcd).
The usage of the card detect input signal (mmci_sdcd) is optional and depends on the system integration and the type of the connector housing that accommodates the card.		RW0
0x0: Active low level
0x1: Active high level
6MITMMC interrupt command

Only for MMC cards.

This bit must be set to 1, when the next write access to the command register (MMCHS_CMD) is for writing a MMC interrupt command (CMD40) requiring the command timeout detection to be disabled for the command response.		RW0
0x0: Command timeout enabled
0x1: Command timeout disabled
5DW88-bit mode MMC select

For SD/SDIO cards, this bit must be set to 0.

For MMC card,
this bit must be set following a valid SWITCH command (CMD6) with the correct value and extend CSD index written in the argument. Prior to this command, the MMC card configuration register (CSD and EXT_CSD) must be verified for compliancy with MMC standard specification 4.x (see section 3.6).		RW0
0x0: 1-bit or 4-bit Data width (DAT[0] used, MMC, SD cards)
0x1: 8-bit Data width (DAT[7:0] used, MMC cards)
4MODEMode select

All cards

This bit select between Functional mode and SYSTEST mode.		RW0
0x0: Functional mode.

Transfers to the MMC/SD/SDIO cards follow the card protocol. MMC clock is enabled. MMC/SD transfers are operated under the control of the CMD register.
0x1: SYSTEST mode

The signal pins are configured as general-purpose input/output and the 1024-byte buffer is configured as a stack memory accessible only by the local host or system DMA. The pins retain their default type (input, output or in-out). SYSTEST mode is operated under the control of the SYSTEST register.
3STRStream command

Only for MMC cards.

This bit must be set to 1 only for the stream data transfers (read or write) of the adtc commands.
Stream read is a class 1 command (CMD11: READ_DAT_UNTIL_STOP).
Stream write is a class 3 command (CMD20: WRITE_DAT_UNTIL_STOP).		RW0
0x0: Block oriented data transfer
0x1: Stream oriented data transfer
2HRBroadcast host response

Only for MMC cards.

This register is used to force the host to generate a 48-bit response for bc command type.
It can be used to terminate the interrupt mode by generating a CMD40 response by the core (see section 4.3, "Interrupt Mode", in the MMC specification). In order to have the host response to be generated in open drain mode, the register MMCHS_CON[OD] must be set to 1.

When MMCHS_CON[CEATA] is set to 1 and MMCHS_ARG set to 0x00000000 when writing 0x00000000 into MMCHS_CMD register, the host controller performs a 'command completion signal disable' token i.e. CMD line held to '0' during 47 cycles followed by a 1.		RW0
0x0: The host does not generate a 48-bit response instead of a command.
0x1: The host generates a 48-bit response instead of a command or a command completion signal disable token.
1INITSend initialization stream

All cards.

When this bit is set to 1, and the card is idle, an initialization sequence is sent to the card.

An initialization sequence consists of setting the CMD line to 1 during 80 clock cycles. The initialisation sequence is mandatory - but it is not required to do it through this bit - this bit makes it easier. Clock divider (MMCHS_SYSCTL[CLKD]) should be set to ensure that 80 clock periods are greater than 1ms. (see section 9.3, "Power-Up", in the MMC card specification, or section 6.4 in the SD card specification).

Note: in this mode, there is no command sent to the card and no response is expected		RW0
0x0: The host does not send an initialization sequence.
0x1: The host sends an initialization sequence.
0ODCard open drain mode.

Only for MMC cards.

This bit must be set to 1 for MMC card commands 1, 2, 3 and 40, and if the MMC card bus is operating in open-drain mode during the response phase to the command sent. Typically, during card identification mode when the card is either in idle, ready or ident state.
It is also necessary to set this bit to 1, for a broadcast host response (see Broadcast host response register MMCHS_CON[HR])		RW0
0x0: No Open Drain
0x1: Open Drain or Broadcast host response
Table 25-68 MMCHS_PWCNT
Address Offset0x0000 0130
Physical Address0x4809 C130
0x480B 4130
0x480A D130
0x480D 1130		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionPower Counter Register

This register is used to program a mmc counter to delay command transfers after activating the PAD power, this value depends on PAD characteristics and voltage.
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDPWRCNT
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:16RESERVEDR0x0000
15:0PWRCNTPower counter register.

This register is used to introduce a delay between the PAD ACTIVE pin assertion and the command issued.		RW0x0000
0xFFFF: TCF x 65535 delay (card clock period)
0x0: No additional delay added
0x1: TCF delay (card clock period)
0xFFFE: TCF x 65534 delay (card clock period)
0x2: TCF x 2 delay (card clock period)
Table 25-69 MMCHS_DLL
Address Offset0x0000 0134
Physical Address0x4809 C134
0x480B 4134		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
DescriptionDLL control and status register

This register is used for tuning procedure required for SDR104/HS200 speed mode.
It gives visibility and control on the DLL
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
DLL_SOFT_RESETLOCK_TIMERMAX_LOCK_DIFFFORCE_SR_FSWTFORCE_SR_CFORCE_VALUESLAVE_RATIORESERVEDDLL_UNLOCK_CLEARDLL_UNLOCK_STICKYDLL_CALIBDLL_LOCK
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31DLL_SOFT_RESETSoft reset for DLL, active HIGH.RW1
Write 0x0: No action.
Write 0x1: Issue soft reset
Read 0x1: Reset is in progress
Read 0x0: Reset completed.
30LOCK_TIMERTimer for the dll_lock signal to be asserted after reset.RW0
0x0: 1024 cycles (equivalent to DLL fast mode lock)
0x1: 66560 cycles
29:22MAX_LOCK_DIFFMaximum number of taps that the master DLL clock period measurement can deviate without resulting in the master DLL losing lock.RW0x00
21FORCE_SR_FForced fine delay value.RW0x0
20SWTSoftware Tuning enable.
The bit shall be set to manage the tuning sequence fully in software.
NOTE: For proper operation when SDR104/HS200 mode is used this bit must be set to 0x1 which disables the Conflict Error (CFT Error) on the CMD line.
0x0: No software tuning sequence.
0x1: Execute software tuning sequence.		RW0x0
19:13FORCE_SR_CForced coarse delay valueRW0x00
12FORCE_VALUEPut forced values to slave DLL, ignoring master DLL output and ratio value.RW0
0x0: Do not put force value
0x1: Put force value.
11:6SLAVE_RATIOFraction of a clock cycle for the shift to be implemented, in units of 256ths of a clock cycle.RW0x00
0x6: 135 degrees delay
0x3F: 4 clocks delay
0x8: 180 degrees delay
0x2: 45 degrees delay
0xA: 225 degrees delay
0x10: Full clock delay
0x0: 0 degree delay
0xC: 270 degrees delay
0x4: 90 degrees delay
0xE: 315 degrees delay
5:4RESERVEDR0x0
3DLL_UNLOCK_CLEARClears the phy_reg_status_mdll_unlock_sticky flags of the DLL.RW0
0x0: No effect.
0x1: Clears the flag.
2DLL_UNLOCK_STICKYAsserted when any single period measurement exceeds MAX_LOCK_DIFF.R0
1DLL_CALIBEnables Slave DLL to update new delay values.RW0
0x0: Disabled
0x1: Enabled
0DLL_LOCKMaster DLL lock status.R0
Read 0x1: DLL is locked
Read 0x0: DLL is not locked
Table 25-70 MMCHS_SDMASA
Address Offset0x0000 0200
Physical Address0x4809 C200
0x480B 4200
0x480A D200
0x480D 1200		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionSDMA System Address / Argument 2 Register
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
SDMA_ARG2
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:0SDMA_ARG2SDMA System Address / Argument 2

This register contains the physical system memory address used for DMA transfers or the second argument for the Auto CMD23.

(1) SDMA System Address
This register contains the system memory address for a SDMA transfer. When the Host Controller stops a SDMA transfer, this register shall point to the system address of the next contiguous data position. It can be accessed only if no transaction is executing (i.e., after a transaction has stopped). Read operations during transfers may return an invalid value.
The Host Driver shall initialize this register before starting a SDMA transaction. After SDMA has stopped, the next system address of the next contiguous data position can be read from this register.
The SDMA transfer waits at the every boundary specified by the Host SDMA Buffer Boundary in the Block Size register. The Host Controller generates DMA Interrupt to request the Host Driver to update this register. The Host Driver sets the next system address of the next data position to this register. When the most upper byte of this register (003h) is written, the Host Controller restarts the SDMA transfer.
When restarting SDMA by the Resume command or by setting Continue Request in the Block Gap Control register, the Host Controller shall start at the next contiguous address stored here in the SDMA System Address register.
ADMA does not use this register.

(2) Argument 2
This register is used with the Auto CMD23 to set a 32-bit block count value to the argument of the CMD23 while executing Auto CMD23.
If Auto CMD23 is used with ADMA, the full 32-bit block count value can be used. If Auto CMD23 is used without AMDA, the available block count value is limited by the Block Count register. 65535 blocks is the maximum value in this case.		RW0x0000 0000
Table 25-71 MMCHS_BLK
Address Offset0x0000 0204
Physical Address0x4809 C204
0x480B 4204
0x480A D204
0x480D 1204		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionTransfer Length Configuration Register

MMCHS_BLK[BLEN] is the block size register.
MMCHS_BLK[NBLK] is the block count register.

This register shall be used for any card.
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
NBLKRESERVEDBLEN
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:16NBLKBlocks count for current transfer

This register is enabled when Block count Enable (MMCHS_CMD[BCE]) is set to 1 and is valid only for multiple block transfers. Setting the block count to 0 results no data blocks being transferred.

Note: The host controller decrements the block count after each block transfer and stops when the count reaches zero.

This register can be accessed only if no transaction is executing (i.e, after a transaction has stopped). Read operations during transfers may return an invalid value and write operation will be ignored.

In suspend context, the number of blocks yet to be transferred can be determined by reading this register. When restoring transfer context prior to issuing a Resume command, The local host shall restore the previously saved block count.		RW0x0000
0xFFFF: 65535 blocks
0x0: Stop count
0x1: 1 block
0x2: 2 blocks
15:12RESERVEDR0x0
11:0BLENTransfer Block Size.

This register specifies the block size for block data transfers.

Read operations during transfers may return an invalid value, and write operations are ignored.

When a CMD12 command is issued to stop the transfer, a read of the BLEN field after transfer completion (MMCHS_STAT[TC] set to 1) will not return the true byte number of data length while the stop occurs but the value written in this register before transfer is launched.		RW0x000
0x1: 1 byte block length
0x7FF: 2047 bytes block length
0x0: No data transfer
0x1FF: 511 bytes block length
0x800: 2048 bytes block length
0x2: 2 bytes block length
0x3: 3 bytes block length
0x200: 512 bytes block length
Table 25-72 MMCHS_ARG
Address Offset0x0000 0208
Physical Address0x4809 C208
0x480B 4208
0x480A D208
0x480D 1208		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionCommand Argument Register

This register contains command argument specified as bit 39-8 of Command-Format

These registers must be initialized prior to sending the command itself to the card (write action into the register MMCHS_CMD register). Only exception is for a command index specifying stuff bits in arguments, making a write unnecessary.
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
ARG
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:0ARGCommand argument bits [31:0]RW0x0000 0000
Table 25-73 MMCHS_CMD
Address Offset0x0000 020C
Physical Address0x4809 C20C
0x480B 420C
0x480A D20C
0x480D 120C		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionCommand and Transfer Mode Register

MMCHS_CMD[31:16] = the command register
MMCHS_CMD[15:0] = the transfer mode.

This register configures the data and command transfers. A write into the most significant byte send the command. A write into MMCHS_CMD[15:0] registers during data transfer has no effect.

This register shall be used for any card.

Note: In SYSTEST mode, a write into MMCHS_CMD register will not start a transfer.
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDINDXCMD_TYPEDPCICECCCERESERVEDRSP_TYPERESERVEDMSBSDDIRACENBCEDE
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:30RESERVEDR0x0
29:24INDXCommand indexRW0x00
Binary encoded value from 0 to 63 specifying the command number send to card
0xD: CMD13 or ACMD13
0x33: CMD51 or ACMD51
0x3B: CMD59 or ACMD59
0x15: CMD21 or ACMD21
0x1E: CMD30 or ACMD30
0x8: CMD8 or ACMD8
0x5: CMD5 or ACMD5
0x2E: CMD46 or ACMD46
0x1B: CMD27 or ACMD27
0x2C: CMD44 or ACMD44
0x36: CMD54 or ACMD54
0x2: CMD2 or ACMD2
0x3E: CMD62 or ACMD62
0x4: CMD4 or ACMD4
0x39: CMD57 or ACMD57
0x32: CMD50 or ACMD50
0x6: CMD6 or ACMD6
0x1: CMD1 or ACMD1
0x1D: CMD29 or ACMD29
0x3F: CMD63 or ACMD63
0x28: CMD40 or ACMD40
0x3A: CMD58 or ACMD58
0x24: CMD36 or ACMD36
0x0: CMD0 or ACMD0
0x2D: CMD45 or ACMD45
0x38: CMD56 or ACMD56
0x3C: CMD60 or ACMD60
0xB: CMD11 or ACMD11
0x3D: CMD61 or ACMD61
0x20: CMD32 or ACMD32
0x3: CMD3 or ACMD3
0x17: CMD23 or ACMD23
0x30: CMD48 or ACMD48
0x31: CMD49 or ACMD49
0x11: CMD17 or ACMD17
0x23: CMD35 or ACMD35
0x35: CMD53 or ACMD53
0x2F: CMD47 or ACMD47
0xA: CMD10 or ACMD10
0x9: CMD9 or ACMD9
0x10: CMD16 or ACMD16
0x26: CMD38 or ACMD38
0x21: CMD33 or ACMD33
0x25: CMD37 or ACMD37
0x12: CMD18 or ACMD18
0x13: CMD19 or ACMD19
0x2B: CMD43 or ACMD43
0x37: CMD55 or ACMD55
0x18: CMD24 or ACMD24
0x14: CMD20 or ACMD20
0xE: CMD14 or ACMD14
0x16: CMD22 or ACMD22
0x2A: CMD42 or ACMD42
0x1C: CMD28 or ACMD28
0x7: CMD7 or ACMD7
0x19: CMD25 or ACMD25
0x1F: CMD31 or ACMD31
0x34: CMD52 or ACMD52
0x1A: CMD26 or ACMD26
0x29: CMD41 or ACMD41
0xF: CMD15 or ACMD15
0xC: CMD12 or ACMD12
0x27: CMD39 or ACMD39
0x22: CMD34 or ACMD34
23:22CMD_TYPECommand typeRW0x0
This register specifies three types of special command: Suspend, Resume and Abort.
These bits shall be set to 00b for all other commands.
0x0: Others Commands
0x1: CMD52 for writing "Bus Suspend" in CCCR
0x3: Abort command CMD12, CMD52 for writing " I/O Abort" in CCCR
0x2: CMD52 for writing "Function Select" in CCCR
21DPData present selectRW0
This register indicates that data is present and DAT line shall be used.
It must be set to 0 in the following conditions:
- command using only CMD line
- command with no data transfer but using busy signal on DAT[0]
- Resume command
0x0: Command with no data transfer
0x1: Command with data transfer
20CICECommand Index check enableRW0
This bit must be set to 1 to enable index check on command response to compare the index field in the response against the index of the command.
If the index is not the same in the response as in the command, it is reported as a command index error (MMCHS_STAT[CIE] set to1).
Note: The register CICE cannot be configured for an Auto CMD12, then index check is automatically checked when this command is issued.
0x0: Index check disable
0x1: Index check enable
19CCCECommand CRC check enableRW0
This bit must be set to 1 to enable CRC7 check on command response to protect the response against transmission errors on the bus.
If an error is detected, it is reported as a command CRC error (MMCHS_STAT[CCRC] set to 1).
Note: The register CCCE cannot be configured for an Auto CMD12, and then CRC check is automatically checked when this command is issued.
0x0: CRC7 check disable
0x1: CRC7 check enable
18RESERVEDR0
17:16RSP_TYPEResponse typeRW0x0
This bits defines the response type of the command
0x0: No response
0x1: Response Length 136 bits
0x3: Response Length 48 bits with busy after response
0x2: Response Length 48 bits
15:6RESERVEDR0x000
5MSBSMulti/Single block selectRW0
This bit must be set to 1 for data transfer in case of multi block command.
For any others command this bit shall be set to 0.
0x0: Single block.
If this bit is 0, it is not necessary to set the register MMCHS_BLK[NBLK].
0x1: Multi block.
When Block Count is disabled (MMCHS_CMD[BCE] is set to 0) in Multiple block transfers (MMCHS_CMD[MSBS] is set to 1), the module can perform infinite transfer.
4DDIRData transfer Direction SelectRW0
This bit defines either data transfer will be a read or a write.
0x0: Data Write (host to card)
0x1: Data Read (card to host)
3:2ACENAuto CMD Enable - SD card only.RW0x0
This field determines use of auto command functions.
There are two methods to stop Multiple-block read and write operation
  1. Auto CMD12 Enable

    When this field is set to 01b, the Host Controller issues CMD12 automatically when last block transfer is completed. Auto CMD12 error is indicated to the Auto CMD Error Status register (MMCHS_AC12). The Host Driver shall not set this bit if the command does not require CMD12. In particular, secure commands defined in the Part 3 File Security specification do not require CMD12.

  2. Auto CMD23 Enable

    When this bit field is set to 10b, the Host Controller issues a CMD23 automatically before issuing a command specified in the Command Register. The Host Controller Version 3.00 and later shall support this function. The following conditions are required to use the Auto CMD23.

– Auto CMD23 Supported (Host Controller Version is 3.00 or later)
– A memory card that supports CMD23 (SCR[33]=1)
– If DMA is used, it shall be ADMA.
–Only when CMD18 or CMD25 is issued
(Note: the Host Controller does not check command index.)
Auto CMD23 can be used with or without ADMA. By writing the Command register, the Host Controller issues a CMD23 first and then issues a command specified by the Command Index in Command register. If response errors of CMD23 are detected, the second command is not issued. A CMD23 error is indicated in the Auto CMD Error Status register (MMCHS_AC12). 32-bit block count value for CMD23 is set to SDMA System Address / Argument 2 register (MMCHS_SDMASA).
0x0: Auto Command Disabled
0x1: Auto CMD12 enable or CCS detection enabled.
0x3: Reserved
0x2: Auto CMD23 Enable
1BCEBlock Count EnableRW0
Multiple block transfers only.
This bit is used to enable the block count register (MMCHS_BLK[NBLK]).
When Block Count is disabled (MMCHS_CMD[BCE] is set to 0) in Multiple block transfers (MMCHS_CMD[MSBS] is set to 1), the module can perform infinite transfer.
0x0: Block count disabled for infinite transfer.
0x1: Block count enabled for multiple block transfer with known number of blocks
0DEDMA EnableRW0
This bit is used to enable DMA mode for host data access.
0x0: DMA mode disable
0x1: DMA mode enable
Table 25-74 MMCHS_RSP10
Address Offset0x0000 0210
Physical Address0x4809 C210
0x480B 4210
0x480A D210
0x480D 1210		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionCommand Response[31:0] Register (bits [31:0] of the internal RSP register)

This 32-bit register holds bits positions [31:0] of command response type R1/R1b/R2/R3/R4/R5/R5b/R6/R7
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RSP1RSP0
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:16RSP1Command Response [31:16]R0x0000
15:0RSP0Command Response [15:0]R0x0000
Table 25-75 MMCHS_RSP32
Address Offset0x0000 0214
Physical Address0x4809 C214
0x480B 4214
0x480A D214
0x480D 1214		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionCommand Response[63:32] Register (bits [63:32] of the internal RSP register)

This 32-bit register holds bits positions [63:32] of command response type R2
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RSP3RSP2
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:16RSP3Command Response [63:48]R0x0000
15:0RSP2Command Response [47:32]R0x0000
Table 25-76 MMCHS_RSP54
Address Offset0x0000 0218
Physical Address0x4809 C218
0x480B 4218
0x480A D218
0x480D 1218		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionCommand Response[95:64] Register (bits [95:64] of the internal RSP register)

This 32-bit register holds bits positions [95:64] of command response type R2
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RSP5RSP4
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:16RSP5Command Response [95:80]R0x0000
15:0RSP4Command Response [79:64]R0x0000
Table 25-77 MMCHS_RSP76
Address Offset0x0000 021C
Physical Address0x4809 C21C
0x480B 421C
0x480A D21C
0x480D 121C		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionCommand Response[127:96] Register (bits [127:96] of the internal RSP register)

This 32-bit register holds bits positions [127:96] of command response type R1(Auto CMD23)/R1b(Auto CMD12)/R2
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RSP7RSP6
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:16RSP7Command Response [127:112]R0x0000
15:0RSP6Command Response [111:96]R0x0000
Table 25-78 MMCHS_DATA
Address Offset0x0000 0220
Physical Address0x4809 C220
0x480B 4220
0x480A D220
0x480D 1220		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionData Register

This register is the 32-bit entry point of the buffer for read or write data transfers.

The buffer size is 32bits x256(1024 bytes). Bytes within a word are stored and read in little endian format. This buffer can be used as two 512 byte buffers to transfer data efficiently without reducing the throughput.

Sequential and contiguous access is necessary to increment the pointer correctly. Random or skipped access is not allowed. In little endian, if the local host accesses this register byte-wise or 16bit-wise, the least significant byte (bits [7:0]) must always be written/read first. The update of the buffer address is done on the most significant byte write for full 32-bit DATA register or on the most significant byte of the last word of block transfer.

Example 1: Byte or 16-bit access

Mbyteen[3:0]=0001 (1-byte) => Mbyteen[3:0]=0010 (1-byte) => Mbyteen[3:0]=1100 (2-bytes) OK
Mbyteen[3:0]=0001 (1-byte) => Mbyteen[3:0]=0010 (1-byte) => Mbyteen[3:0]=0100 (1-byte) OK
Mbyteen[3:0]=0001 (1-byte) => Mbyteen[3:0]=0010 (1-byte) => Mbyteen[3:0]=1000 (1-byte) Bad
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
DATA
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:0DATAData Register [31:0]

In functional mode (MMCHS_CON[MODE] set to the default value 0) ,

A read access to this register is allowed only when the buffer read enable status is set to 1 (MMCHS_PSTATE[BRE]), otherwise a bad access (MMCHS_STAT[BADA]) is signaled.

A write access to this register is allowed only when the buffer write enable status is set to 1(MMCHS_STATE[BWE]), otherwise a bad access (MMCHS_STAT[BADA]) is signaled and the data is not written.		RW0x0000 0000
Table 25-79 MMCHS_PSTATE
Address Offset0x0000 0224
Physical Address0x4809 C224
0x480B 4224
0x480A D224
0x480D 1224		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionPresent State Register

The Host can get status of the Host Controller from this 32-bit read only register.
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDCLEVDLEVWPCDPLCSSCINSRESERVEDBREBWERTAWTARESERVEDRTRDLADATICMDI
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:25RESERVEDR0x00
24CLEVCMD line signal level

This status is used to check the CMD line level to recover from errors, and for debugging.

The value of this register after reset depends on the CMD line level at that time.		R-
Read 0x1: The CMD line level is 1.
Read 0x0: The CMD line level is 0.
23:20DLEVDAT[3:0] line signal level

DAT[3] => bit 23
DAT[2] => bit 22
DAT[1] => bit 21
DAT[0] => bit 20

This status is used to check DAT line level to recover from errors, and for debugging. This is especially useful in detecting the busy signal level from DAT[0].

The value of these registers after reset depends on the DAT lines level at that time.		R0x-
19WPWrite protect switch pin level

For SDIO cards only.

This bit reflects the write protect input pin (mmci_sdwp) level.

The value of this register after reset depends on the protect input pin (mmci_sdwp) level at that time.		R-
Read 0x1: If MMCHS_CON[WPP] is set to 0 (default), the card is not write protected, otherwise the card is protected.
Read 0x0: If MMCHS_CON[WPP] is set to 0 (default), the card is write protected, otherwise the card is not protected.

18CDPLCard detect pin level

This bit reflects the inverse value of the card detect input pin (mmci_sdcd), debouncing is not performed on this bit and bit is valid only when Card State Stable (MMCHS_PSTAE[CSS]) is set to 1.

Use of this bit is limited to testing since it must be debounced y software.

The value of this register after reset depends on the card detect input pin (mmci_sdcd) level at that time.		R-
Read 0x1: The value of the card detect input pin (mmci_sdcd) is 0
Read 0x0: The value of the card detect input pin (mmci_sdcd) is 1
17CSSCard State Stable

This bit is used for testing. It is set to 1 only when Card Detect Pin Level is stable (MMCHS_PSTATE[CDPL]). Debouncing is performed on the card detect input pin (mmci_sdcd) to detect card stability.

This bit is not affected by a software reset.		R0
Read 0x1: No card or card inserted
Read 0x0: Reset or Debouncing
16CINSCard inserted

This bit is the debounced value of the card detect input pin (mmci_sdcd).

An inactive to active transition of the card detect input pin (mmci_sdcd) will generate a card insertion interrupt (MMCHS_STAT[CINS]).
A active to inactive transition of the card detect input pin (mmci_sdcd) will generate a card removal interrupt (MMCHS_STAT[REM]).

This bit is not affected by a software reset.		R0
Read 0x1: If MMCHS_CON[CDP] is set to 1, the card has been inserted from the card slot.

If MMCHS_CON[CDP] is set to 0, no card is detected. The card may have been removed from the card slot.
Read 0x0: If MMCHS_CON[CDP] is set to 1, no card is detected. The card may have been removed from the card slot.

If MMCHS_CON[CDP] is set to 0, the card has been inserted.
15:12RESERVEDR0x0
11BREBuffer read enable

This bit is used for non-DMA read transfers.
It indicates that a complete block specified by MMCHS_BLK[BLEN] has been written in the buffer and is ready to be read.

It is set to 0 when the entire block is read from the buffer. It is set to 1 when a block data is ready in the buffer and generates the Buffer read ready status of interrupt (MMCHS_STAT[BRR]).		R0
Read 0x1: Read BLEN bytes enable. Readable data exists in the buffer.
Read 0x0: Read BLEN bytes disable
10BWEBuffer Write enable

This status is used for non-DMA write transfers.

It indicates if space is available for write data.		R0
Read 0x1: There is enough space in the buffer to write BLEN bytes of data.
Read 0x0: There is no room left in the buffer to write BLEN bytes of data.
9RTARead transfer active

This status is used for detecting completion of a read transfer. It is set to 1 after the end bit of read command or by activating a continue request (MMCHS_HCTL[CR]) following a stop at block gap request. This bit is set to 0 when all data have been read by the local host after last block or after a stop at block gap request.		R0
Read 0x1: read data transfer on going.
Read 0x0: No valid data on the DAT lines.
8WTAWrite transfer active

This status indicates a write transfer active. It is set to 1 after the end bit of write command or by activating a continue request (MMCHS_HCTL[CR]) following a stop at block gap request. This bit is set to 0 when CRC status has been received after last block or after a stop at block gap request.		R0
Read 0x1: Write data transfer on going.
Read 0x0: No valid data on the DAT lines.
7:4RESERVEDR0x0
3RTRRe-Tuning Request
Host Controller may request Host Driver to execute re-tuning sequence by setting
this bit when the data window is shifted by temperature drift and a tuned sampling
point does not have a good margin to receive correct data.
This bit is cleared when a command is issued with setting MMCHS_AC12[22] ET.
This bit isn't set to 1 if MMCHS_AC12[23] SCLK_SEL is set
to 0 (using fixed sampling clock). Refer to MMCHS_CAPA2[15:14] RTM
for more detail.		R0
Read 0x1: Sampling clock needs re-tuning
Read 0x0: Fixed or well tuned sampling clock
2DLADAT line active

This status bit indicates whether one of the DAT line is in use.

In the case of read transactions (card to host):
This bit is set to 1 after the end bit of read command or by activating continue request MMCHS_HCTL[CR].
This bit is set to 0 when the host controller received the end bit of the last data block or at the beginning of the read wait mode.

In the case of write transactions (host to card):
This bit is set to 1 after the end bit of write command or by activating continue request MMCHS_HCTL[CR].
This bit is set to 0 on the end of busy event for the last block; host controller must wait 8 clock cycles with line not busy to really consider not "busy state" or after the busy block as a result of a stop at gap request.		R0
Read 0x1: DAT Line active
Read 0x0: DAT Line inactive
1DATICommand inhibit(DAT)

This status bit is generated if either DAT line is active (MMCHS_PSTATE[DLA]) or Read transfer is active (MMCHS_PSTATE[RTA]) or when a command with busy is issued. This bit prevents the local host to issue a command.

A change of this bit from 1 to 0 generates a transfer complete interrupt (MMCHS_STAT[TC]).		R0
Read 0x1: Issuing of command using DAT lines is not allowed
Read 0x0: Issuing of command using the DAT lines is allowed
0CMDICommand inhibit(CMD)

This status bit indicates that the CMD line is in use.

This bit is set to 0 when the most significant byte is written into the command register. This bit is not set when Auto CMD12 is transmitted.

This bit is set to 0 in either the following cases:
- After the end bit of the command response, excepted if there is a command conflict error (MMCHS_STAT[CCRC] or MMCHS_STAT[CEB] set to 1) or a Auto CMD12 is not executed (MMCHS_AC12[ACNE]).
- After the end bit of the command without response (MMCHS_CMD[RSP_TYPE] set to "00")

In case of a command data error is detected (MMCHS_STAT[CTO] set to 1), this register is not automatically cleared.		R0
Read 0x1: Issuing of command using CMD line is not allowed
Read 0x0: Issuing of command using CMD line is allowed
Table 25-80 MMCHS_HCTL
Address Offset0x0000 0228
Physical Address0x4809 C228
0x480B 4228
0x480A D228
0x480D 1228		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionHost Control Register

This register defines the host controls to set power, wakeup and transfer parameters.

MMCHS_HCTL[31:24] = Wakeup control
MMCHS_HCTL[23:16] = Block gap control
MMCHS_HCTL[15:8] = Power control
MMCHS_HCTL[7:0] = Host control
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDOBWEREMINSIWERESERVEDIBGRWCCRSBGRRESERVEDSDVSSDBPCDSSCDTLRESERVEDDMASHSPEDTWLED
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:28RESERVEDR0x0
27OBWEWakeup event enable for 'Out-of-Band' Interrupt.

This bit enables wakeup events for 'Out-of-Band' assertion.
Wakeup is generated if the wakeup feature is enabled (MMCHS_SYSCONFIG[ENAWAKEUP]).
The write to this register is ignored when MMCHS_CON[OBIE] is not set.		RW0
0x0: Disable wakeup on 'Out-of-Band' Interrupt
0x1: Enable wakeup on 'Out-of-Band' Interrupt
26REMWakeup event enable on SD card removal

This bit enables wakeup events for card removal assertion. Wakeup is generated if the wakeup feature is enabled (MMCHS_SYSCONFIG[ENAWAKEUP]).		RW0
0x0: Disable wakeup on card removal
0x1: Enable wakeup on card removal
25INSWakeup event enable on SD card insertion

This bit enables wakeup events for card insertion assertion. Wakeup is generated if the wakeup feature is enabled (MMCHS_SYSCONFIG[ENAWAKEUP]).		RW0
0x0: Disable wakeup on card insertion
0x1: Enable wakeup on card insertion
24IWEWakeup event enable on SD card interrupt

This bit enables wakeup events for card interrupt assertion. Wakeup is generated if the wakeup feature is enabled (MMCHS_SYSCONFIG[ENAWAKEUP]).		RW0
0x0: Disable wakeup on card interrupt
0x1: Enable wakeup on card interrupt
23:20RESERVEDR0x0
19IBGInterrupt block at gap

This bit is valid only in 4-bit mode of SDIO card to enable interrupt detection in the interrupt cycle at block gap for a multiple block transfer. For MMC cards and for SD card this bit should be set to 0.		RW0
0x0: Disable interrupt detection at the block gap in 4-bit mode
0x1: Enable interrupt detection at the block gap in 4-bit mode
18RWCRead wait control

The read wait function is optional only for SDIO cards. If the card supports read wait, this bit must be enabled, then requesting a stop at block gap (MMCHS_HCTL[SBGR]) generates a read wait period after the current end of block. Be careful, if read wait is not supported it may cause a conflict on DAT line.		RW0
0x0: Disable Read Wait Control. Suspend/Resume cannot be supported.
0x1: Enable Read Wait Control
17CRContinue request

This bit is used to restart a transaction that was stopped by requesting a stop at block gap (MMCHS_HCTL[SBGR]). Set this bit to 1 restarts the transfer. The bit is automatically set to 0 by the host controller when transfer has restarted i.e DAT line is active (MMCHS_PSTATE[DLA]) or transferring data (MMCHS_PSTATE[WTA]).
The Stop at block gap request must be disabled (MMCHS_HCTL[SBGR]=0) before setting this bit.		RW0
0x0: No affect
0x1: transfer restart
16SBGRStop at block gap request

This bit is used to stop executing a transaction at the next block gap. The transfer can restart with a continue request (MMCHS_HCTL[CR]) or during a suspend/resume sequence.

In case of read transfer, the card must support read wait control.
In case of write transfer, the host driver shall set this bit after all block data written.

Until the transfer completion (MMCHS_STAT[TC] set to 1), the host driver shall leave this bit set to 1.

If this bit is set, the local host shall not write to the data register (MMCHS_DATA).		RW0
0x0: Transfer mode
0x1: Stop at block gap
15:12RESERVEDR0x0
11:9SDVSSD bus voltage select

All cards.

The host driver should set to these bits to select the voltage level for the card according to the voltage supported by the system (MMCHS_CAPA[VS18,VS30,VS33]) before starting a transfer.		RW0x0
0x6: 3.0V (Typical)
0x7: 3.3V (Typical)
0x5: 1.8V (Typical)
8SDBPSD bus power

Before setting this bit, the host driver shall select the SD bus voltage (MMCHS_HCTL[SDVS]). If the host controller detects the No card state, this bit is automatically set to 0. If the module is power off, a write in the command register (MMCHS_CMD) will not start the transfer. A write to this bit has no effect if the selected SD bus voltage MMCHS_HCTL[SDVS] is not supported according to capability register (MMCHS_CAPA[VS*]).		RW0
0x0: Power off
0x1: Power on
7CDSSCard Detect Signal Selection
This bit selects source for the card detection.When the source for the card detection is switched, the interrupt should be disabled during the switching period by clearing the Interrupt Status/Signal Enable register in order to mask unexpected interrupts caused by the glitch. The Interrupt Status/Signal Enable should be disabled during over the period of debouncing.		RW0
0x0: mmci_sdcd is selected (for normal use)
0x1: MMCHS_HCTL[6] CDTL is selected (for test purpose)
6CDTLCard Detect Test Level:
This bit is enabled while MMCHS_HCTL[7] CDSS is set to 1 and it indicates whether the card is inserted or not.		RW0
0x0: No Card
0x1: Card Inserted
5RESERVEDR0
4:3DMASDMA Select Mode:
One of supported DMA modes can be selected. The host driver shall check support of DMA modes by referring the Capabilities register MMCHS_CAPA . Use of selected DMA is determined by DMA Enable of the Transfer Mode register. This register is only meaningful when MADMA_EN is set to 1. When MADMA_EN is set to 0 the bit field is read only and returned value is 0.		RW0x0
0x0: Reserved
0x1: Reserved
0x3: Reserved
0x2: 32-bit Address ADMA2 is selected
2HSPEBefore setting this bit, the Host Driver shall check the MMCHS_CAPA[21] HSS. This bit shall not be set when dual data rate mode is activated in MMCHS_CON[DDR].RW0
0x0: Тhe Host Controller outputs CMD line and DAT lines at the falling edge of the SD Clock
0x1: Тhe Host Controller outputs CMD line and DAT lines at the rising edge of the SD Clock
NOTE: Do not set this bit to 0x1 because device was timing closed with HSPE bit set to 0x0 for all supported modes of operation.
1DTWData transfer width

For MMC card, this bit must be set following a valid SWITCH command (CMD6) with the correct value and extend CSD index written in the argument. Prior to this command, the MMC card configuration register (CSD and EXT_CSD) must be verified for compliance with MMC standard specification 4.x (see section 3.6).

This register has no effect when the MMC 8-bit mode is selected (register MMCHS_CON[DW8] set to1 ),

For SD/SDIO cards, this bit must be set following a valid SET_BUS_WIDTH command (ACMD6) with the value written in bit 1 of the argument. Prior to this command, the SD card configuration register (SCR) must be verified for the supported bus width by the SD card.		RW0
0x0: 1-bit Data width (DAT[0] used)
0x1: 4-bit Data width (DAT[3:0] used)
0LEDReserved bit.

LED control feature is not supported

This bit is initialized to zero, and writes to it are ignored.		R0
Table 25-81 MMCHS_SYSCTL
Address Offset0x0000 022C
Physical Address0x4809 C22C
0x480B 422C
0x480A D22C
0x480D 122C		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionSD System Control Register

This register defines the system controls to set software resets, clock frequency management and data timeout.

MMCHS_SYSCTL[31:24] = Software resets
MMCHS_SYSCTL[23:16] = Timeout control
MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:0] = Clock control
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDSRDSRCSRARESERVEDDTOCLKDCGSRESERVEDCENICSICE
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:27RESERVEDR0x00
26SRDSoftware reset for DAT line

This bit is set to 1 for reset and released to 0 when completed.
For more information about SRD bit manipulation, see
DATA Lines Reset Procedure.
DAT finite state machine in both clock domain are also reset.

Here below are the registers cleared by MMCHS_SYSCTL[SRD]:
- MMCHS_DATA
- MMCHS_PSTATE: BRE, BWE, RTA, WTA, DLA and DATI
- MMCHS_HCTL: SBGR and CR
- MMCHS_STAT: BRR, BWR, BGE and TC

Interconnect and MMC buffer data management is reinitialized.		RW0
0x0: Reset completed
0x1: Software reset for DAT line
25SRCSoftware reset for CMD line

For more information about SRC bit manipulation, see
CMD Line Reset Procedure.
This bit is set to 1 for reset and released to 0 when completed.
CMD finite state machine in both clock domain are also reset.

Here below the registers cleared by MMCHS_SYSCTL[SRC]:
- MMCHS_PSTATE: CMDI
- MMCHS_STAT: CC

Interconnect and MMC command status management is reinitialized.		RW0
0x0: Reset completed
0x1: Software reset for CMD line
24SRASoftware reset for all

This bit is set to 1 for reset , and released to 0 when completed.
This reset affects the entire host controller except for the capabilities registers (MMCHS_CAPA and MMCHS_CUR_CAPA).		RW0
0x0: Reset completed
0x1: Software reset for all the design
23:20RESERVEDR0x0
19:16DTOData timeout counter value and busy timeout.

This value determines the interval by which DAT lines timeouts are detected.
The host driver needs to set this bitfield based on
- the maximum read access time (NAC) (Refer to the SD Specification Part1 Physical Layer),
- the data read access time values (TAAC and NSAC) in the card specific data register (CSD) of the card,
- the timeout clock base frequency (MMCHS_CAPA[TCF]).
If the card does not respond within the specified number of cycles, a data timeout error occurs (MMCHS_STA[DTO]).

The MMCHS_SYSCTL[DTO] register is also used to check busy duration, to generate busy timeout for commands with busy response or for busy programming during a write command. Timeout on CRC status is generated if no CRC token is present after a block write.		RW0x0
0xF: Reserved
0x0: TCF x 2^13
0x1: TCF x 2^14
0xE: TCF x 2^27
15:6CLKDClock frequency select

These bits define the ratio between MMCi_FCLK and the output clock frequency on the CLK pin of either the memory card (MMC, SD or SDIO).		RW0x000
0x0: MMCi_FCLK bypass
0x1: MMCi_FCLK bypass
0x2: MMCi_FCLK / 2
0x3: MMCi_FCLK / 3
0x3FF: MMCi_FCLK / 1023
5CGSClock Generator Select - For SD cards

Host Controller Version 3.00 supports this bit. This bit is used to select the clock generator mode in MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:6] CLKD. If the Programmable Clock Mode is supported (non-zero value is set to MMCHS_CAPA2[23:16] CM), this bit attribute is RW, and if not supported, this bit attribute is RO and zero is read. This bit depends on the setting of MMCHS_AC12[31] PV_ENABLE. If PV_ENABLE = 0, this bit is set by Host Driver. If PV_ENABLE = 1, this bit is automatically set to a value specified in one of Preset Value registers, see, Table 25-22.		R0
4:3RESERVEDR0x0
2CENClock enable

This bit controls if the clock is provided to the card or not.		RW0
0x0: The clock is not provided to the card . Clock frequency can be changed .
0x1: The clock is provided to the card and can be automatically gated when MMCHS_SYSCONFIG[AUTOIDLE] is set to 1 (default value) .
The host driver shall wait to set this bit to 1 until the Internal clock is stable (MMCHS_SYSCTL[ICS]).
1ICSInternal clock stable (status)

This bit indicates either the internal clock is stable or not.		R0
Read 0x1: The internal clock is stable after enabling the clock (MMCHS_SYSCTL[ICE]) or after changing the clock ratio (MMCHS_SYSCTL[CLKD]).
Read 0x0: The internal clock is not stable.
0ICEInternal clock enable

This register controls the internal clock activity.
In very low power state, the internal clock is stopped.

Note: The activity of the debounce clock (used for wakeup events) and the interface clock (used for reads and writes to the module register map) are not affected by this register.		RW0
0x0: The internal clock is stopped (very low power state).
0x1: The internal clock oscillates and can be automatically gated when MMCHS_SYSCONFIG[AUTOIDLE] is set to 1 (default value) .
Table 25-82 MMCHS_STAT
Address Offset0x0000 0230
Physical Address0x4809 C230
0x480B 4230
0x480A D230
0x480D 1230		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionInterrupt Status Register

The interrupt status regroups all the status of the module internal events that can generate an interrupt.

MMCHS_STAT[31:16] = Error Interrupt Status
MMCHS_STAT[15:0] = Normal Interrupt Status
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDBADACERRRESERVEDTEADMAEACERESERVEDDEBDCRCDTOCIECEBCCRCCTOERRIRESERVEDBSROBICIRQCREMCINSBRRBWRDMABGETCCC
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:30RESERVEDR0x0
29BADABad access to data space

This bit is set automatically to indicate a bad access to buffer when not allowed:

-This bit is set during a read access to the data register (MMCHS_DATA) while buffer reads are not allowed (MMCHS_PSTATE[BRE] =0)
-This bit is set during a write access to the data register (MMCHS_DATA) while buffer writes are not allowed (MMCHS_STATE[BWE] =0)		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Bad Access
Read 0x0: No Interrupt.
28CERRCard error

This bit is set automatically when there is at least one error in a response of type R1, R1b, R6, R5 or R5b. Only bits referenced as type E(error) in status field in the response can set a card status error. An error bit in the response is flagged only if corresponding bit in card status response error MMCHS_CSRE in set.

There is no card error detection for autoCMD12 command. The host driver shall read MMCHS_RSP76 register to detect error bits in the command response.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Card error
Read 0x0: No Error
27RESERVEDR0
26TETuning Error

This bit is set when an unrecoverable error is detected in a tuning circuit except during tuning procedure (Occurrence of an error during tuning procedure is indicated by Sampling Select). By detecting Tuning Error, Host Driver needs to abort a command executing and perform tuning. To reset tuning circuit, Sampling Clock shall be set to 0 before executing tuning procedure. The Tuning Error is higher priority than the other error interrupts generated during data transfer. By detecting Tuning Error, the Host Driver should discard data transferred by a current read/write command and retry data transfer after the Host Controller retrieved from tuning circuit error. The bit is set if the lock is lost (but not during the tuning process) or if the lock counter expires without the lock being asserted. If the latter happens, the SW can decide to ignore the interrupt and wait some more for the lock to be set.		RW0
0x0: No Error
0x1: Error
25ADMAEADMA Error:

This bit is set when the Host Controller detects errors during ADMA based data transfer. The state of the ADMA at an error occurrence is saved in the ADMA Error Status Register.In addition, the Host Controller generates this interrupt when it detects invalid descriptor data (Valid=0) at the ST_FDS state. ADMA Error State in the ADMA Error Status indicates that an error occurs in ST_FDS state. The Host Driver may find that Valid bit is not set at the error descriptor.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: ADMA error
Read 0x0: No Interrupt.
24ACEAuto CMD error

Auto CMD12 and Auto CMD23 use this error status. This bit is set when detecting that one of the bits D00-D04 in Auto CMD Error Status register (MMCHS_AC12) has changed from 0 to 1. In case of Auto CMD12, this bit is set to 1, not only when the errors in Auto CMD12 occur but also when Auto CMD12 is not executed due to the previous command error.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Auto CMD error
Read 0x0: No Error.
23RESERVEDR0
22DEBData End Bit error

This bit is set automatically when detecting a 0 at the end bit position of read data on DAT line or at the end position of the CRC status in write mode.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Data end bit error
Read 0x0: No Error
21DCRCData CRC Error

This bit is set automatically when there is a CRC16 error in the data phase response following a block read command or if there is a 3-bit CRC status different of a position "010" token during a block write command.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Data CRC error
Read 0x0: No Error.
20DTOData timeout error

This bit is set automatically according to the following conditions:
- busy timeout for R1b, R5b response type
- busy timeout after write CRC status
- write CRC status timeout
- read data timeout		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Time out
Read 0x0: No error.
19CIECommand index error

This bit is set automatically when response index differs from corresponding command index previously emitted. It depends on the enable in MMCHS_CMD[CICE] register.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Command index error
Read 0x0: No error.
18CEBCommand end bit error

This bit is set automatically when detecting a 0 at the end bit position of a command response.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Command end bit error
Read 0x0: No error.
17CCRCCommand CRC Error

This bit is set automatically when there is a CRC7 error in the command response depending on the enable in MMCHS_CMD[CCCE] register.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Command CRC error
Read 0x0: No Error.
16CTOCommand Timeout Error

This bit is set automatically when no response is received within 64 clock cycles from the end bit of the command.
For commands that reply within 5 clock cycles - the timeout is still detected at 64 clock cycles.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Time Out
Read 0x0: No error
15ERRIError Interrupt

If any of the bits in the Error Interrupt Status register (MMCHS_STAT[31:16]) are set, then this bit is set to 1. Therefore the host driver can efficiently test for an error by checking this bit first.

Writes to this bit are ignored.		R0
Read 0x1: Error interrupt event(s) occurred
Read 0x0: No Interrupt.
14:11RESERVEDR0x0
10BSRBoot status received interrupt
This bit is set automatically when MMCHS_CON[BOOT] is set 0x1 or 0x2 and a boot status is received on DAT[0] line. This interrupt is only useful for MMC card.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Boot status received interrupt.
Read 0x0: No Interrupt.
9OBIOut-Of-Band interrupt
This bit is set automatically when MMCHS_CON[OBIE] is set and an Out-of-Band interrupt occurs on OBI pin.
The interrupt detection depends on polarity controlled by MMCHS_CON[OBIP].
This interrupt is only useful for MMC card.
The Out-of-Band interrupt signal is a system specific feature for future use, this signal is not required for existing specification implementation.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Interrupt Out-Of-Band occurs
Read 0x0: No Out-Of-Band interrupt.
8CIRQCard interrupt

This bit is only used for SD and SDIO and CE-ATA cards.

In 1-bit mode, interrupt source is asynchronous (can be a source of asynchronous wakeup).

In 4-bit mode, interrupt source is sampled during the interrupt cycle.

In CE-ATA mode, interrupt source is detected when the card drives CMD line to zero during one cycle after data transmission end.All modes above are fully exclusive.

The controller interrupt must be clear by setting MMCHS_IE[CIRQ] to 0, then the host driver must start the interrupt service with card (clearing card interrupt status) to remove card interrupt source. Otherwise the Controller interrupt will be reasserted as soon as MMCHS_IE[CIRQ] is set to 1.

Writes to this bit are ignored.		R0
Read 0x1: Generate card interrupt
Read 0x0: No card interrupt
7CREMCard removal

This bit is set automatically when MMCHS_PSTATE[CINS] changes from 1 to 0.
A clear of this bit doesn't affect Card inserted present state (MMCHS_PSTATE[CINS]).		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Card removed
Read 0x0: Card state stable or Debouncing
6CINSCard insertion

This bit is set automatically when MMCHS_PSTATE[CINS] changes from 0 to 1.
A clear of this bit doesn't affect Card inserted present state (MMCHS_PSTATE[CINS]).		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Card inserted
Read 0x0: Card state stable or debouncing
5BRRBuffer read ready

This bit is set automatically during a read operation to the card (see class 2 - block oriented read commands) when one block specified by MMCHS_BLK[BLEN] is completely written in the buffer. It indicates that the memory card has filled out the buffer and that the local host needs to empty the buffer by reading it. Note: If the DMA receive-mode is enabled, this bit is never set; instead a DMA receive request to the main DMA controller of the system is generated.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Ready to read buffer
Read 0x0: Not Ready to read buffer
4BWRBuffer write ready

This bit is set automatically during a write operation to the card (see class 4 - block oriented write command) when the host can write a complete block as specified by MMCHS_BLK[BLEN]. It indicates that the memory card has emptied one block from the buffer and that the local host is able to write one block of data into the buffer. Note: If the DMA transmit mode is enabled, this bit is never set; instead, a DMA transmit request to the main DMA controller of the system is generated.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Ready to write buffer
Read 0x0: Not Ready to write buffer
3DMADMA interrupt :
This status is set when an interrupt is required in the ADMA instruction and after the data transfer completion.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: No dma interrupt
Read 0x0: Dma interrupt detected
2BGEBlock gap event

When a stop at block gap is requested (MMCHS_HCTL[SBGR]), this bit is automatically set when transaction is stopped at the block gap during a read or write operation.

This event does not occur when the stop at block gap is requested on the last block.

In read mode, a 1-to-0 transition of the DAT Line active status (MMCHS_PSTATE[DLA]) between data blocks generates a Block gap event interrupt.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Transaction stopped at block gap
Read 0x0: No block gap event
1TCTransfer completed

This bit is always set when a read/write transfer is completed or between two blocks when the transfer is stopped due to a stop at block gap request (MMCHS_HCTL[SBGR]).

In Read mode:
This bit is automatically set on completion of a read transfer (MMCHS_PSTATE[RTA]).

In write mode:
This bit is set automatically on completion of the DAT line use (MMCHS_PSTATE[DLA]).		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Data transfer complete
Read 0x0: No transfer complete
0CCCommand complete

This bit is set when a 1-to-0 transition occurs in the register command inhibit (MMCHS_PSTATE[CMDI])

If the command is a type for which no response is expected, then the command complete interrupt is generated at the end of the command.

A command timeout error (MMCHS_STAT[CTO]) has higher priority than command complete (MMCHS_STAT[CC]).
If a response is expected but none is received, then a command timeout error is detected and signaled instead of the command complete interrupt.		RW0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
Read 0x1: Command complete
Read 0x0: No Command complete
Table 25-83 MMCHS_IE
Address Offset0x0000 0234
Physical Address0x4809 C234
0x480B 4234
0x480A D234
0x480D 1234		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionInterrupt Status Enable Register

This register allows to enable/disable the module to set status bits, on an event-by-event basis.

MMCHS_IE[31:16] = Error Interrupt Status Enable
MMCHS_IE[15:0] = Normal Interrupt Status Enable
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDBADA_ENABLECERR_ENABLERESERVEDTE_ENABLEADMAE_ENABLEACE_ENABLERESERVEDDEB_ENABLEDCRC_ENABLEDTO_ENABLECIE_ENABLECEB_ENABLECCRC_ENABLECTO_ENABLENULLRESERVEDBSR_ENABLEOBI_ENABLECIRQ_ENABLECREM_ENABLECINS_ENABLEBRR_ENABLEBWR_ENABLEDMA_ENABLEBGE_ENABLETC_ENABLECC_ENABLE
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:30RESERVEDR0x0
29BADA_ENABLEBad access to data space Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
28CERR_ENABLECard Error Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
27RESERVEDR0
26TE_ENABLETuning Error Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
25ADMAE_ENABLEADMA Error Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
24ACE_ENABLEAuto CMD Error Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
23RESERVEDR0
22DEB_ENABLEData End Bit Error Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
21DCRC_ENABLEData CRC Error Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
20DTO_ENABLEData Timeout Error Status EnableRW0
0x0: The data timeout detection is deactivated.

The host controller provides the clock to the card until the card sends the data or the transfer is aborted.
0x1: The data timeout detection is enabled.
19CIE_ENABLECommand Index Error Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
18CEB_ENABLECommand End Bit Error Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
17CCRC_ENABLECommand CRC Error Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
16CTO_ENABLECommand Timeout Error Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
15NULLFixed to 0

The host driver shall control error interrupts using the Error Interrupt Signal Enable register.

Writes to this bit are ignored		R0
14:11RESERVEDR0x0
10BSR_ENABLEBoot Status Enable

A write to this register when MMCHS_CON[BOOT_ACK] is set to 0x0 is ignored.		RW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
9OBI_ENABLEOut-of-Band Status Enable

A write to this register when MMCHS_CON[OBIE] is set to '0' is ignored.		RW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
8CIRQ_ENABLECard Status Enable

A clear of this bit also clears the corresponding status bit.
During 1-bit mode, if the interrupt routine doesn't remove the source of a card interrupt in the SDIO card, the status bit is reasserted when this bit is set to 1.		RW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
7CREM_ENABLECard Removal Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
6CINS_ENABLECard Insertion Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
5BRR_ENABLEBuffer Read Ready Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
4BWR_ENABLEBuffer Write Ready Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
3DMA_ENABLEDMA Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
2BGE_ENABLEBlock Gap Event Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
1TC_ENABLETransfer Complete Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
0CC_ENABLECommand Complete Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
Table 25-84 MMCHS_ISE
Address Offset0x0000 0238
Physical Address0x4809 C238
0x480B 4238
0x480A D238
0x480D 1238		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionInterrupt Signal Enable Register

This register allows to enable/disable the module internal sources of status, on an event-by-event basis.

MMCHS_ISE[31:16] = Error Interrupt Signal Enable
MMCHS_ISE[15:0] = Normal Interrupt Signal Enable
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDBADA_SIGENCERR_SIGENRESERVEDTE_SIGENADMAE_SIGENACE_SIGENRESERVEDDEB_SIGENDCRC_SIGENDTO_SIGENCIE_SIGENCEB_SIGENCCRC_SIGENCTO_SIGENNULLRESERVEDBSR_SIGENOBI_SIGENCIRQ_SIGENCREM_SIGENCINS_SIGENBRR_SIGENBWR_SIGENDMA_SIGENBGE_SIGENTC_SIGENCC_SIGEN
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:30RESERVEDR0x0
29BADA_SIGENBad access to data space Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
28CERR_SIGENCard Error Interrupt Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
27RESERVEDR0
26TE_SIGENTuning Error Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
25ADMAE_SIGENADMA Error Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
24ACE_SIGENAuto CMD Error Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
23RESERVEDR0
22DEB_SIGENData End Bit Error Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
21DCRC_SIGENData CRC Error Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
20DTO_SIGENData Timeout Error Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
19CIE_SIGENCommand Index Error Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
18CEB_SIGENCommand End Bit Error Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
17CCRC_SIGENCommand CRC Error Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
16CTO_SIGENCommand timeout Error Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
15NULLFixed to 0

The host driver shall control error interrupts using the Error Interrupt Signal Enable register.

Writes to this bit are ignored		R0
14:11RESERVEDR0x0
10BSR_SIGENBoot Status Signal Enable

A write to this register when MMCHS_CON[BOOT_ACK] is set to 0x0 is ignored.		RW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
9OBI_SIGENOut-Of-Band Interrupt Signal Enable

A write to this register when MMCHS_CON[OBIE] is set to '0' is ignored.		RW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
8CIRQ_SIGENCard Interrupt Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
7CREM_SIGENCard Removal Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
6CINS_SIGENCard Insertion Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
5BRR_SIGENBuffer Read Ready Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
4BWR_SIGENBuffer Write Ready Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
3DMA_SIGENDMA Interrupt Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
2BGE_SIGENBlack Gap Event Signal EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
1TC_SIGENTransfer Completed Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
0CC_SIGENCommand Complete Status EnableRW0
0x0: Masked
0x1: Enabled
Table 25-85 MMCHS_AC12
Address Offset0x0000 023C
Physical Address0x4809 C23C
0x480B 423C
0x480A D23C
0x480D 123C		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionHost Control 2 Register and Auto CMD Error Status Register

This register is used to indicate CMD12 response error of Auto CMD12 and CMD23 response error of Auto CMD23. The Host driver can determine what kind of Auto CMD12 / CMD23 errors occur by this register. Auto CMD23 errors are indicated only in bits[4:1]. Bits[7:0] are valid only when the MMCHS_CMD[3:2] ACEN bitfield is configured to enable Auto CMD and the Auto CMD Error bit (MMCHS_STAT[24]ACE) is set.
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
PV_ENABLEAI_ENABLERESERVEDSCLK_SELETDS_SELV1V8_SIGENUHSMSRESERVEDCNIRESERVEDACIEACEBACCEACTOACNE
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31PV_ENABLEPreset Value Enable

Host Controller Version 3.00 supports this bit.
As the operating SDCLK frequency and I/O driver strength depend on the Host System implementation, it is difficult to determine these parameters in the Standard Host Driver. When Preset Value Enable is set, automatic SDCLK frequency generation and driver strength selection is performed without considering system specific conditions. This bit enables the functions defined in the Preset Value registers, see, Table 25-22.
If this bit is set to 0, MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:6] CLKD, MMCHS_SYSCTL[5] CGS and MMCHS_AC12[21:20] DS_SEL are set by Host Driver.
If this bit is set to 1, MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:6] CLKD, MMCHS_SYSCTL[5] CGS and MMCHS_AC12[21:20] DS_SEL are set by Host Controller as specified in the Preset Value registers, see, Table 25-22.		RW0
0x0: SDCLK and Driver Strength (DS_SEL) are controlled by Host Driver.
0x1: Automatic Selection by Preset Value are Enabled.
30AI_ENABLEAsynchronous Interrupt Enable

This bit can be set to 1 if a card supports asynchronous interrupts and MMCHS_CAPA[29] AIS is set to 1. Asynchronous interrupt is effective when DAT[1] interrupt is used in 4-bit SD mode (and zero is set to Interrupt Pin Select in the Shared Bus Control register). If this bit is set to 1, the Host Driver can stop the SDCLK during asynchronous interrupt period to save power. During this period, the Host Controller continues to deliver the Card Interrupt to the host when it is asserted by the Card.		RW0
0x0: Disabled
0x1: Enabled
29:24RESERVEDR0x00
23SCLK_SELSampling Clock Select

Host Controller uses this bit to select sampling clock to receive CMD and DAT. This bit is set by tuning procedure and valid after the completion of tuning (when MMCHS_AC12[22] ET is cleared). Setting 1 means that tuning is completed successfully and setting 0 means that tuning is failed. Writing 1 to this bit is meaningless and ignored. A tuning circuit is reset by writing to 0. This bit can be cleared with setting MMCHS_AC12[22] ET. Once the tuning circuit is reset, it will take time to complete tuning sequence. Therefore, Host Driver should keep this bit to 1 to perform re-tuning sequence to compete re-tuning sequence in a short time. Change of this bit is not allowed while the Host Controller is receiving response or a read data block.		RW0
0x0: Fixed clock is used to sample data
0x1: Tuned clock is used to sample data
22ETExecute Tuning

This bit is set to 1 to start tuning procedure and automatically cleared when tuning procedure is completed. The result of tuning is indicated to MMCHS_AC12[23] SCLK_SEL. Tuning procedure is aborted by writing 0.
This is Read-Write with automatic clear register		RW0
0x0: Not Tuned or Tuning Completed
0x1: Execute Tuning
21:20DS_SELDriver Strength Select

Host Controller output driver in 1.8V signaling is selected by this bit. In 3.3V signaling, this field is not effective. This field can be set depending on Driver Type A, C and D support bits (DTA, DTC and DTD respectively) in the MMCHS_CAPA2 register.

This bit depends on setting of Preset Value Enable.
If Preset Value Enable = 0, this field is set by Host Driver.
If Preset Value Enable = 1, this field is automatically set by a value specified in the one of Preset Value registers, see, Table 25-22.		RW0x0
0x0: Driver Type B is selected (Default)
0x1: Driver Type A is selected
0x3: Driver Type D is selected
0x2: Driver Type C is selected
19V1V8_SIGEN1.8V Signaling Enable

This bit controls voltage regulator for I/O cell. 3.3V is supplied to the card regardless of signaling voltage.
Setting this bit from 0 to 1 starts changing signal voltage from 3.3V to 1.8V. 1.8V regulator output shall be stable within 5ms. Host Controller clears this bit if switching to 1.8V signaling fails.
Clearing this bit from 1 to 0 starts changing signal voltage from 1.8V to 3.3V. 3.3V regulator output shall be stable within 5ms.

Host Driver can set this bit to 1 when Host Controller supports 1.8V signaling (One of support bits is set to 1: SDR50, SDR104 or DDR50 in MMCHS_CAPA2 register) and the card or device supports UHS-I (S18A=1. Refer to Bus Signal Voltage Switch Sequence in the Physical Layer Specification Version 3.0x).		RW0
0x0: 3.3V Signaling
0x1: 1.8V Signaling
18:16UHSMSUHS Mode Select

This field is used to select one of UHS-I modes or eMMC HS200 mode and is effective when 1.8V Signaling Enable is set to 1.

If MMCHS_AC12[31] PV_ENABLE is set to 1, Host Controller sets MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:6] CLKD, MMCHS_SYSCTL[5] CGS and MMCHS_AC12[21:20] DS_SEL according to Preset Value registers, see, Table 25-22. In this case, one of preset value registers is selected by this field. Host Driver needs to reset MMCHS_SYSCTL[2] CEN before changing this field to avoid generating clock glitch. After setting this field, Host Driver sets MMCHS_SYSCTL[2] CEN again.

When SDR50, SDR104 or DDR50 is selected for SDIO card, interrupt detection at the block gap shall not be used. Read Wait timing is changed for these modes. Refer to the SDIO Specification Version 3.00 for more detail.		RW0x0
0x0: SDR12
0x1: SDR25
0x2: SDR50
0x3: SDR104/HS200
0x4: DDR50
0x5: Reserved
0x6: Reserved
0x7: Reserved
15:8RESERVEDR0x00
7CNICommand Not Issued By Auto CMD12 Error

Setting this bit to 1 means CMD_wo_DAT is not executed due to an Auto CMD12 Error (D04-D01) in this register.
This bit is set to 0 when Auto CMD Error is generated by Auto CMD23.		R0
Read 0x1: Command not issued
Read 0x0: No error
6:5RESERVEDR0x0
4ACIEAuto CMD Index Error - For Auto CMD12 and Auto CMD23

This bit is set if the Command Index error occurs in response to a command.		R0
Read 0x1: Error
Read 0x0: No error
3ACEBAuto CMD End Bit Error - For Auto CMD12 and Auto CMD23

This bit is set when detecting that the end bit of command response is 0.		R0
Read 0x1: End bit Error Generated
Read 0x0: No error
2ACCEAuto CMD CRC Error - For Auto CMD12 and Auto CMD23

This bit is set when detecting a CRC error in the command response.		R0
Read 0x1: CRC Error Generated
Read 0x0: No error
1ACTOAuto CMD Timeout Error - For Auto CMD12 and Auto CMD23

This bit is set if no response is returned within 64 SDCLK cycles from the end bit of command.
If this bit is set to1, the other error status bits (D04-D02) are meaningless.		R0
Read 0x1: Auto CMD Time Out
Read 0x0: No error
0ACNEAuto CMD12 Not Executed

If memory multiple block data transfer is not started due to command error, this bit is not set because it is not necessary to issue Auto CMD12. Setting this bit to 1 means the Host Controller cannot issue Auto CMD12 to stop memory multiple block data transfer due to some error. If this bit is set to 1, other error status bits (D04-D01) are meaningless.
This bit is set to 0 when Auto CMD Error is generated by Auto CMD23.		R0
Read 0x1: Auto CMD12 Not Executed
Read 0x0: Auto CMD12 Executed
Table 25-86 MMCHS_CAPA
Address Offset0x0000 0240
Physical Address0x4809 C240
0x480B 4240
0x480A D240
0x480D 1240		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionCapabilities Register

This register lists the capabilities of the MMC/SD/SDIO host controller.
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDAISBIT64RESERVEDVS18VS30VS33SRSDSHSSRESERVEDAD2SRESERVEDMBLBCFTCURESERVEDTCF
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:30RESERVEDR0x0
29AISAsynchronous Interrupt Support
Refer to SDIO Specification Version 3.00 about asynchronous interrupt.		R1
Read 0x1: Asynchronous Interrupt Supported
Read 0x0: Asynchronous Interrupt Not Supported
28BIT6464 Bit System Bus Support

Setting 1 to this bit indicates that the Host Controller supports 64-bit address descriptor mode and is connected to 64-bit address system bus.		R0
Read 0x1: 64 bit System bus address
Read 0x0: 32 bit System bus address
27RESERVEDR0
26VS18Voltage support 1.8V

Initialization of this register (via a write access to this register) depends on the system capabilities. The host driver shall not modify this register after the initilaization.
This register is only reinitialized by a hard reset (via RESETN signal)		RW0
Write 0x0: 1.8V Not supported
Write 0x1: 1.8V Supported
Read 0x1: 1.8V Supported
Read 0x0: 1.8V Not Supported
25VS30Voltage support 3.0V

Initialization of this register (via a write access to this register) depends on the system capabilities. The host driver shall not modify this register after the initilaization.
This register is only reinitialized by a hard reset (via RESETN signal)		RW0
Write 0x0: 3.0V Not supported
Write 0x1: 3.0V Supported
Read 0x1: 3.0V Supported
Read 0x0: 3.0V Not Supported
24VS33Voltage support 3.3V

Initialization of this register (via a write access to this register) depends on the system capabilities. The host driver shall not modify this register after the initilaization.
This register is only reinitialized by a hard reset (via RESETN signal)		RW0
Write 0x0: 3.3V Not supported
Write 0x1: 3.3V Supported
Read 0x1: 3.3V Supported
Read 0x0: 3.3V Not Supported
23SRSSuspend/Resume support (SDIO cards only)

This bit indicates whether the host controller supports Suspend/Resume functionality.		R1
Read 0x1: The Host controller supports Suspend/Resume functionality.
Read 0x0: The Host controller does not Suspend/Resume functionality.
22DSDMA support

This bit indicates that the Host Controller is able to use DMA to transfer data between system memory and the Host Controller directly.		R1
Read 0x1: DMA Supported
Read 0x0: DMA Not Supported
21HSSHigh speed support

This bit indicates that the host controller supports high speed operations and can supply an up-to maximum card frequency.		R1
Read 0x1: High Speed Supported
Read 0x0: High Speed Not Supported
NOTE: High Speed modes are supported, but MMCHS_HCTL[HSPE] bit must always be set to 0x0 because device was timing closed with HSPE bit set to 0x0 for all supported modes of operation.
20RESERVEDR0
19AD2SADMA2 Support

This bit indicates whether the Host Controller is capable of using ADMA2. It depends on setting of generic parameter MADMA_EN		R0
Read 0x1: ADMA2 Supported
Read 0x0: ADMA2 not Supported
18RESERVEDR0
17:16MBLMaximum block length

This value indicates the maximum block size that the host driver can read and write to the buffer in the host controller.
This value depends on definition of generic parameter with a max value of 2048 bytes.
The host controller supports 512 bytes and 1024 bytes block transfers.		R0x1
Read 0x2: 2048 bytes
Read 0x1: 1024 bytes
Read 0x0: 512 bytes
15:8BCFBase Clock Frequency For SD Clock

This value indicates the base (maximum) clock frequency for the SD Clock.
8-bit Base Clock Frequency
This mode is supported by the Host Controller Version 3.00.
Unit values are 1MHz. The supported clock range is 10MHz to 255MHz.
FFh : 255MHz
.... : .......
02h : 2MHz
01h : 1MHz
00h : Get information via another method
If the real frequency is 16.5MHz, the lager value shall be set 0001 0001b
(17MHz) because the Host Driver use this value to calculate the clock
divider value (Refer to MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:6] CLKD)
and it shall not exceed upper limit of the SD Clock frequency.
If these bits are all 0, the Host System has to get information via another
method.		R0x00
Read 0x0: The value indicating the base (maximum) frequency for the output clock provided to the card is system dependent and is not available in this register.
Get the information via another method.
7TCUTimeout clock unit

This bit shows the unit of base clock frequency used to detect Data Timeout Error (MMCHS_STAT[DTO]).		R1
Read 0x1: MHz
Read 0x0: KHz
6RESERVEDR0
5:0TCFTimeout clock frequency

The timeout clock frequency is used to detect Data Timeout Error (MMCHS_STAT[DTO]).		R0x00
Read 0x0: The timeout clock frequency depends on the frequency of the clock provided to the card.
The value of the timeout clock frequency is not available in this register.
Table 25-87 MMCHS_CAPA2
Address Offset0x0000 0244
Physical Address0x4809 C244
0x480B 4244
0x480A D244
0x480D 1244		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionCapabilities 2 Register

This register provides the Host Driver with information specific to the Host Controller implementation. The Host Controller may implement these values as fixed or loaded from flash memory during power on initialization. Refer to Software Reset For All in the Software Reset register for loading from flash memory and completion timing control.
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDCMRTMTSDR50RESERVEDTCRTRESERVEDDTDDTCDTARESERVEDDDR50SDR104SDR50
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:24RESERVEDR0x00
23:16CMClock Multiplier

This field indicates clock multiplier value of programmable clock generator. Refer to MMCHS_SYSCTL [15:0]. Setting 00h means that Host Controller does not support programmable clock generator.
00h : Clock Multiplier is Not Supported
01h : Clock Multiplier M = 2
02h : Clock Multiplier M = 3
.... : ......................
FFh : Clock Multiplier M = 256		R0x00
15:14RTMRe-Tuning Modes

This field selects re-tuning method and limits the maximum data length.
Bit47-46 Re-Tuning Mode Re-Tuning Method Data Length

There are two re-tuning timings: Re-Tuning Request controlled by the Host Controller and expiration of a Re-Tuning Timer controlled by the Host Driver. By receiving either timing, the Host Driver executes the re-tuning procedure just before a next command issue.
The maximum data length per read/write command is restricted so that re-tuning procedures can be inserted during data transfers.

(1) Re-Tuning Mode 1
The host controller does not have any internal logic to detect when the re-tuning needs to be performed. In this case, the Host Driver should maintain all re-tuning timings by using a Re-Tuning Timer. To enable inserting the re-tuning procedure during data transfers, the data length per read/write command shall be limited up to 4 MiB.

(2) Re-Tuning Mode 2
The host controller has the capability to indicate the re-tuning timing by Re-Tuning Request during data transfers. Then the data length per read/write command shall be limited up to 4 MiB. During non data transfer, re-tuning timing is determined by either Re-Tuning Request or Re-Tuning Timer. If Re-Tuning Request is used, Re-Tuning Timer should be disabled.

(3) Re-Tuning Mode 3
The host controller has the capability to take care of the re-tuning during data transfer (Auto Re-Tuning). Re-Tuning Request shall not be generated during data transfers and there is no limitation to data length per read/write command. During non data transfer, re-tuning timing is determined by either Re-Tuning Request or Re-Tuning Timer. If Re-Tuning Request is used, Re-Tuning Timer should be disabled.

Re-Tuning Timer Control Example for Re-Tuning Mode 1
The initial value of re-tuning timer is provided by Timer Count for Re-Tuning field in this register. The timer starts counting by loading the initial value. When the timer expires, the Host Driver marks an expiration flag. On receiving a command request, the Host driver checks the expiration flag. If the expiration flag is set, then the Host Driver should perform the re-tuning procedure before issuing a command. If the expiration flag is not set, then the Host Driver issues a command without performing the re-tuning procedure. Every time the re-tuning procedure is performed, the timer loads the new initial value and the expiration flag is cleared.

Re-Tuning Timer Control Example for Re-Tuning Mode 2 and Mode 3
The timer control is almost the same as Re-Tuning Mode 1 except the timer loads the new initial value after data transfer (when receiving Transfer Complete). In case of Mode 3, Timer Count for Re-Tuning is set either smaller value: Tuning effective time after re-tuning procedure or after data transfer. If a Host System goes into power down mode, the Host Driver should stop the re-tuning timer and set the expiration flag to 1 when the Host System resumes from power down mode.		R0x0
Read 0x3: Reserved
Read 0x2: Auto Re-Tuning (for transfer) - Timer and Re-Tuning Request
Read 0x1: Timer and Re-Tuning Request - Max data length 4 MiB
Read 0x0: Timer - Max data length 4 MiB
13TSDR50Use Tuning for SDR50

If this bit is set to 1, this Host Controller requires tuning to operate SDR50.
(Tuning is always required to operate SDR104.)		R0
Read 0x1: SDR50 requires tuning.
Read 0x0: SDR50 does not require tuning.
12RESERVEDR0
11:8TCRTTimer Count for Re-Tuning
This field indicates an initial value of the Re-Tuning Timer for Re-Tuning Mode 1 to 3. Setting to 0 disables Re-Tuning Timer.		R0xF
Read 0x3: 4 seconds
Read 0xE: Reserved
Read 0xC: Reserved
Read 0x4: 8 seconds
Read 0xB: 1024 seconds
Read 0xF: Get information from other source
Read 0x2: 2 seconds
Read 0x0: Re-Tuning Timer disabled
Read 0xA: 512 seconds
Read 0x6: 32 seconds
Read 0x1: 1 second
Read 0x8: 128 seconds
Read 0x7: 64 seconds
Read 0x9: 256 seconds
Read 0xD: Reserved
Read 0x5: 16 seconds
7RESERVEDR0
6DTDDriver Type D Support

This bit indicates support of Driver Type D for 1.8 Signaling.		R1
Read 0x1: Driver Type D is Supported
Read 0x0: Driver Type D is Not Supported.
5DTCDriver Type C Support

This bit indicates support of Driver Type C for 1.8 Signaling.		R1
Read 0x1: Driver Type C is Supported.
Read 0x0: Driver Type C is Not Supported.
4DTADriver Type A Support

This bit indicates support of Driver Type A for 1.8 Signaling.		R1
Read 0x1: Driver Type A is Supported.
Read 0x0: Driver Type A is Not Supported.
3RESERVEDR0
2DDR50DDR50 SupportR1(1)
Read 0x1: DDR50 is Supported.
Read 0x0: DDR50 is Not Supported.
1SDR104SDR104 Support

SDR104 requires tuning.		R1(1)
Read 0x1: SDR104 is Supported.
Read 0x0: SDR104 is Not Supported.
0SDR50SDR50 Support

If SDR104 is supported, this bit shall be set to 1. Bit 13 indicates whether SDR50 requires tuning or not.		R1(1)
Read 0x1: SDR50 is Supported.
Read 0x0: SDR50 is Not Supported.
(1) This bit is only supported by the MMC modules listed in Table 25-88. The value should be ignored for any modules not listed.
Table 25-88 Supported Data Rate Modes
Supported ModeSupported By
DDR50MMC1
SDR104MMC1
SDR50MMC1, MMC3
Table 25-89 MMCHS_CUR_CAPA
Address Offset0x0000 0248
Physical Address0x4809 C248
0x480B 4248
0x480A D248
0x480D 1248		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionMaximum Current Capabilities Register

This register indicates the maximum current capability for each voltage. The value is meaningful if the voltage support is set in the capabilities register (MMCHS_CAPA).

Initialization of this register (via a write access to this register) depends on the system capabilities. The host driver shall not modify this register after the initilaization.

This register is only reinitialized by a hard reset (via RESETN signal)
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDCUR_1V8CUR_3V0CUR_3V3
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:24RESERVEDR0x00
23:16CUR_1V8Maximum current for 1.8VRW0x00
Read 0x0: The maximum current capability for this voltage is not available. Feature not implemented.
15:8CUR_3V0Maximum current for 3.0VRW0x00
Read 0x0: The maximum current capability for this voltage is not available. Feature not implemented.
7:0CUR_3V3Maximum current for 3.3VRW0x00
Read 0x0: The maximum current capability for this voltage is not available. Feature not implemented.
Table 25-90 MMCHS_FE
Address Offset0x0000 0250
Physical Address0x4809 C250
0x480B 4250
0x480A D250
0x480D 1250		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionForce Event Register for Auto CMD Error Status and Error Interrupt status

The Force Event Register is not a physically implemented register. Rather, it is an address at which the Auto CMD Error Status Register (MMCHS_AC12) can be written.
Writing 1 : set each bit of the Auto CMD Error Status Register
Writing 0 : no effect

Rather, it is an address at which the Error Interrupt Status register can be written. The effect of a write to this address will be reflected in the Error Interrupt Status Register if the corresponding bit of the Error Interrupt Status Enable Register is set.
Writing 1 : set each bit of the Error Interrupt Status Register
Writing 0 : no effect

Note: By setting this register, the Error Interrupt can be set in the Error Interrupt Status register. In order to generate interrupt signal, both the Error Interrupt Status Enable and Error Interrupt Signal Enable shall be set.
TypeW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDFE_BADAFE_CERRRESERVEDFE_ADMAEFE_ACERESERVEDFE_DEBFE_DCRCFE_DTOFE_CIEFE_CEBFE_CCRCFE_CTORESERVEDFE_CNIRESERVEDFE_ACIEFE_ACEBFE_ACCEFE_ACTOFE_ACNE
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:30RESERVEDNA0x0
29FE_BADAForce Event Bad access to data space.W0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
28FE_CERRForce Event Card error.W0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
27:26RESERVEDNA0x0
25FE_ADMAEForce Event ADMA Error.W0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
24FE_ACEForce Event for Auto CMD Error - For Auto CMD12 and Auto CMD23W0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
23RESERVEDNA0
22FE_DEBForce Event Data End Bit error.W0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
21FE_DCRCForce Event Data CRC Error.W0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
20FE_DTOForce Event Data Timeout Error.W0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
19FE_CIEForce Event Command Index Error.W0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
18FE_CEBForce Event Command End Bit Error.W0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
17FE_CCRCForce Event Command CRC Error.W0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
16FE_CTOCommand Timeout Error

This bit is set automatically when no response is received within 64 clock cycles from the end bit of the command.
For commands that reply within 5 clock cycles - the timeout is still detected at 64 clock cycles.		W0
Write 0x0: Status bit unchanged
Write 0x1: Status is cleared
15:8RESERVEDNA0x00
7FE_CNIForce Event Command not issue by Auto CMD12 errorW0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
6:5RESERVEDNA0x0
4FE_ACIEForce Event for Auto CMD Index Error - For Auto CMD12 and Auto CMD23W0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
3FE_ACEBForce Event Auto CMD End Bit ErrorW0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
2FE_ACCEForce Event Auto CMD CRC ErrorW0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
1FE_ACTOForce Event Auto CMD Timeout ErrorW0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
0FE_ACNEForce Event Auto CMD12 Not ExecutedW0
Write 0x0: No effect, No Interrupt.
Write 0x1: Interrupt Forced
Table 25-91 MMCHS_ADMAES
Address Offset0x0000 0254
Physical Address0x4809 C254
0x480B 4254
0x480A D254
0x480D 1254		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionADMA Error Status Register

When ADMA Error Interrupt is occurred, the ADMA Error States field in this register holds the ADMA state and the ADMA System Address Register holds the address around the error descriptor. For recovering the error, the Host Driver requires the ADMA state to identify the error descriptor address as follows:
ST_STOP: Previous location set in the ADMA System Address register is the error descriptor address
ST_FDS: Current location set in the ADMA System Address register is the error descriptor address
ST_CADR: This sate is never set because do not generate ADMA error in this state.
ST_TFR: Previous location set in the ADMA System Address register is the error descriptor address
In case of write operation, the Host Driver should use ACMD22 to get the number of written block rather than using this information, since unwritten data may exist in the Host Controller. The Host Controller generates the ADMA Error Interrupt when it detects invalid descriptor data (Valid=0) at the ST_FDS state. In this case, ADMA Error State indicates that an error occurs at ST_FDS state. The Host Driver may find that the Valid bit is not set in the error descriptor.
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
RESERVEDLMEAES
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:3RESERVEDR0x0000 0000
2LMEADMA Length Mismatch Error:
(1) While Block Count Enable being set, the total data length specified by the Descriptor table is different from that specified by the Block Count and Block Length.
(2) Total data length can not be divided by the block length.		RW0
0x0: No Error
0x1: Error
1:0AES

ADMA Error State

This field indicates the state of ADMA when error occurred during ADMA data transfer. This field will never be 0x2 because ADMA never stops in that state.

0x0: ST_STOP (STOP_ADMA). Previous SYS_ADR is the error descriptor address

0x1: ST_FDS (Fetch Descriptor). Content of current SYS_ADR is the error descriptor address

0x2: Not used. Error never set in this state

0x3: ST_TFR (Transfer Data). Previous SYS_ADR is the error descriptor address

RW0x0
Table 25-92 MMCHS_ADMASAL
Address Offset0x0000 0258
Physical Address0x4809 C258
0x480B 4258
0x480A D258
0x480D 1258		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionADMA System address Low bits
TypeRW
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
ADMA_A32B
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:0ADMA_A32BADMA System address 32 bits.This register holds byte address of executing command of the Descriptor table. 32-bit Address Descriptor uses lower 32-bit of this register. At the start of ADMA, the Host Driver shall set start address of the Descriptor table. The ADMA increments this register address, which points to next line, when every fetching a Descriptor line. When the ADMA Error Interrupt is generated, this register shall hold valid Descriptor address depending on the ADMA state. The Host Driver shall program Descriptor Table on 32-bit boundary and set 32-bit boundary address to this register. ADMA2 ignores lower 2-bit of this register and assumes it to be 00b.RW0x0000 0000
Table 25-93 MMCHS_PVINITSD
Address Offset0x0000 0260
Physical Address0x4809 C260
0x480B 4260
0x480A D260
0x480D 1260		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionPreset Value for Initialization and Default Speed modes
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
DSDS_SELRESERVEDDSCLKGEN_SELDSSDCLK_SELINITDS_SELRESERVEDINITCLKGEN_SELINITSDCLK_SEL
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:30DSDS_SELDriver Strength Select Value - Default Speed mode

Driver Strength is supported by 1.8V signaling bus speed modes. This field is meaningless for 3.3V signaling.		R0x0
Read 0x3: Driver Type D is Selected.
Read 0x2: Driver Type C is Selected.
Read 0x1: Driver Type A is Selected.
Read 0x0: Driver Type B is Selected.
29:27RESERVEDR0x0
26DSCLKGEN_SELClock Generator Select Value - Default Speed mode

This bit is effective when Host Controller supports programmable clock generator.		R0
Read 0x1: Programmable Clock Generator.
Read 0x0: Host Controller Ver2.00 Compatible Clock Generator.
25:16DSSDCLK_SELSDCLK Frequency Select Value - Default Speed mode

10-bit preset value to set MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:6] CLKD is described by a host system.		R0x004
15:14INITDS_SELDriver Strength Select Value - Initialization mode

Driver Strength is supported by 1.8V signaling bus speed modes. This field is meaningless for 3.3V signaling.		R0x0
Read 0x3: Driver Type D is Selected
Read 0x2: Driver Type C is Selected
Read 0x1: Driver Type A is Selected
Read 0x0: Driver Type B is Selected
13:11RESERVEDR0x0
10INITCLKGEN_SELClock Generator Select Value - Initialization mode

This bit is effective when Host Controller supports programmable clock generator.		R0
Read 0x1: Programmable Clock Generator.
Read 0x0: Host Controller Ver2.00 Compatible Clock Generator.
9:0INITSDCLK_SELSDCLK Frequency Select Value - Initialization mode

10-bit preset value to set MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:6] CLKD is described by a host system.		R0x1E0
Table 25-94 MMCHS_PVHSSDR12
Address Offset0x0000 0264
Physical Address0x4809 C264
0x480B 4264
0x480A D264
0x480D 1264		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionPreset Value for High Speed and SDR12 speed modes
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
SDR12DS_SELRESERVEDSDR12CLKGEN_SELSDR12SDCLK_SELHSDS_SELRESERVEDHSCLKGEN_SELHSSDCLK_SEL
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:30SDR12DS_SELDriver Strength Select Value - SDR12 mode

Driver Strength is supported by 1.8V signaling bus speed modes. This field is meaningless for 3.3V signaling.		R0x0
Read 0x3: Driver Type D is Selected.
Read 0x2: Driver Type C is Selected.
Read 0x1: Driver Type A is Selected.
Read 0x0: Driver Type B is Selected.
29:27RESERVEDR0x0
26SDR12CLKGEN_SELClock Generator Select Value - SDR12 mode

This bit is effective when Host Controller supports programmable clock generator.		R0
Read 0x1: Programmable Clock Generator.
Read 0x0: Host Controller Ver2.00 Compatible Clock Generator.
25:16SDR12SDCLK_SELSDCLK Frequency Select Value - SDR12 mode

10-bit preset value to set MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:6] CLKD is described by a host system.		R0x004
15:14HSDS_SELDriver Strength Select Value - High Speed mode

Driver Strength is supported by 1.8V signaling bus speed modes. This field is meaningless for 3.3V signaling.		R0x0
Read 0x3: Driver Type D is Selected.
Read 0x2: Driver Type C is Selected.
Read 0x1: Driver Type A is Selected.
Read 0x0: Driver Type B is Selected.
13:11RESERVEDR0x0
10HSCLKGEN_SELClock Generator Select Value - High Speed mode

This bit is effective when Host Controller supports programmable clock generator.		R0
Read 0x1: Programmable Clock Generator.
Read 0x0: Host Controller Ver2.00 Compatible Clock Generator.
9:0HSSDCLK_SELSDCLK Frequency Select Value - High Speed mode

10-bit preset value to set MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:6] CLKD is described by a host system.		R0x002
Table 25-95 MMCHS_PVSDR25SDR50
Address Offset0x0000 0268
Physical Address0x4809 C268
0x480B 4268
0x480A D268
0x480D 1268		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionPreset Value for SDR25 and SDR50 speed modes
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
SDR50DS_SELRESERVEDSDR50CLKGEN_SELSDR50SDCLK_SELSDR25DS_SELRESERVEDSDR25CLKGEN_SELSDR25SDCLK_SEL
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:30SDR50DS_SELDriver Strength Select Value - SDR50 mode

Driver Strength is supported by 1.8V signaling bus speed modes. This field is meaningless for 3.3V signaling.		R0x0
Read 0x3: Driver Type D is Selected.
Read 0x2: Driver Type C is Selected.
Read 0x1: Driver Type A is Selected.
Read 0x0: Driver Type B is Selected.
29:27RESERVEDR0x0
26SDR50CLKGEN_SELClock Generator Select Value - SDR50 mode

This bit is effective when Host Controller supports programmable clock generator.		R0
Read 0x1: Programmable Clock Generator.
Read 0x0: Host Controller Ver2.00 Compatible Clock Generator.
25:16SDR50SDCLK_SELSDCLK Frequency Select Value - SDR50 mode

10-bit preset value to set MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:6] CLKD is described by a host system.		R0x001
15:14SDR25DS_SELDriver Strength Select Value - SDR25 mode

Driver Strength is supported by 1.8V signaling bus speed modes. This field is meaningless for 3.3V signaling.		R0x0
Read 0x3: Driver Type D is Selected.
Read 0x2: Driver Type C is Selected.
Read 0x1: Driver Type A is Selected.
Read 0x0: Driver Type B is Selected.
13:11RESERVEDR0x0
10SDR25CLKGEN_SELClock Generator Select Value - SDR25 mode

This bit is effective when Host Controller supports programmable clock generator.		R0
Read 0x1: Programmable Clock Generato.
Read 0x0: Host Controller Ver2.00 Compatible Clock Generator.
9:0SDR25SDCLK_SELSDCLK Frequency Select Value - SDR25 mode

10-bit preset value to set MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:6] CLKD is described by a host system.		R0x002
Table 25-96 MMCHS_PVSDR104DDR50
Address Offset0x0000 026C
Physical Address0x4809 C26C
0x480B 426C
0x480A D26C
0x480D 126C		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionPreset Value for SDR104 and DDR50 speed modes
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
DDR50DS_SELRESERVEDDDR50CLKGEN_SELDDR50SDCLK_SELSDR104DS_SELRESERVEDSDR104CLKGEN_SELSDR104SDCLK_SEL
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:30DDR50DS_SELDriver Strength Select Value - DDR50 mode

Driver Strength is supported by 1.8V signaling bus speed modes. This field is meaningless for 3.3V signaling.		R0x0
Read 0x3: Driver Type D is Selected.
Read 0x2: Driver Type C is Selected.
Read 0x1: Driver Type A is Selected.
Read 0x0: Driver Type B is Selected.
29:27RESERVEDR0x0
26DDR50CLKGEN_SELClock Generator Select Value - DDR50 mode

This bit is effective when Host Controller supports programmable clock generator.		R0
Read 0x1: Programmable Clock Generator
Read 0x0: Host Controller Ver2.00 Compatible Clock Generator
25:16DDR50SDCLK_SELSDCLK Frequency Select Value - DDR50 mode

10-bit preset value to set MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:6] CLKD is described by a host system.		R0x002
15:14SDR104DS_SELDriver Strength Select Value - SDR104 mode

Driver Strength is supported by 1.8V signaling bus speed modes. This field is meaningless for 3.3V signaling.		R0x0
Read 0x3: Driver Type D is Selected.
Read 0x2: Driver Type C is Selected.
Read 0x1: Driver Type A is Selected.
Read 0x0: Driver Type B is Selected.
13:11RESERVEDR0x0
10SDR104CLKGEN_SELClock Generator Select Value - SDR104 mode

This bit is effective when Host Controller supports programmable clock generator.		R0
Read 0x1: Programmable Clock Generator.
Read 0x0: Host Controller Ver2.00 Compatible Clock Generator.
9:0SDR104SDCLK_SELSDCLK Frequency Select Value - SDR104 mode

10-bit preset value to set MMCHS_SYSCTL[15:6] CLKD is described by a host system.		R0x000
Table 25-97 MMCHS_REV
Address Offset0x0000 02FC
Physical Address0x4809 C2FC
0x480B 42FC
0x480A D2FC
0x480D 12FC		InstanceMMC1
MMC2
MMC3
MMC4
DescriptionVersions Register

This register contains the hard coded RTL vendor revision number, the version number of SD specification compliancy and a slot status bit.

MMCHS_REV[31:16] = Host controller version
MMCHS_REV[15:0] = Slot Interrupt Status
TypeR
313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
VREVSREVRESERVEDSIS
BitsField NameDescriptionTypeReset
31:24VREVVendor Version Number: IP revision

[7:4] Major revision
[3:0] Minor revision

Examples:
0x10 for 1.0
0x21 for 2.1		R0x--
23:16SREVSpecification Version Number
This status indicates the Host Controller Spec. Version. The upper and
lower 4-bits indicate the version.		R0x02
Read 0x3: Reserved
Read 0x2: SD Host Specification Version 3.00.
Read 0x1: SD Host Specification Version 2.00 - Including the feature of the ADMA and Test Register.
Read 0x0: SD Host Specification Version 1.00.
15:1RESERVEDR0x0000
0SISSlot Interrupt Status

This status bit indicates the inverted state of interrupt signal for the module.
By a power on reset or by setting a software reset for all (MMCHS_HCTL[SRA]), the interrupt signal shall be de-asserted and this status shall read 0.		R0